Sie sind auf Seite 1von 212

SERVICE MANUAL

CODE : 00ZAL1566/A1E

DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL
SYSTEM

(AL-1566) AL-1556
MODEL AL-1566
CONTENTS

[ 1 ] GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1
[ 2 ] SPECIFICATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1
[ 3 ] CONSUMABLE PARTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1
[ 4 ] EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1
[ 5 ] UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1
[ 6 ] COPY PROCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1
[ 7 ] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1
[ 8 ] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 1
[ 9 ] ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 1
[10] TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES . . 10 - 1
[11] USER PROGRAMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 1
[12] ELECTRICAL SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 1
[13] CIRCUIT DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 1

Parts marked with “ ” are important for maintaining the safety of the machine. Be sure to replace these parts
with the replacement parts specified to maintain the safety and performance of the machine.

This document has been published to be used


SHARP CORPORATION for after sales service only.
The contents are subject to change without notice.
CAUTION

This product is a class 1 laser product that complies with 21CFR 1040 of the CDRH standard and
IEC825. This means that this machine does not produce hazardous laser radiation. The use of controls,
adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous
radiation exposure.
This laser radiation is not a danger to the skin, but when an exact focusing of the laser beam is achieved
on the eye’s retina, there is the danger of spot damage to the retina.
The following cautions must be observed to avoid exposure of the laser beam to your eyes at the time of
servicing.
1) When a problem in the laser optical unit has occurred, the whole optical unit must be exchanged as a
unit, not as individual parts.
2) Do not look into the machine with the main switch turned on after removing the developer unit, toner
cartridge, and drum cartridge.
3) Do not look into the laser beam exposure slit of the laser optical unit with the connector connected
when removing and installing the optical system.
4) The middle frame contains the safety interlock switch.
Do not defeat the safety interlock by inserting wedges or other items into the switch slot.

CAUTION VARO !
INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION, AVATTAESSA JA SUOJALUKITUS
OHITETTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA
WHEN OPEN AND INTERLOCKS DEFEATED.
NÄKYMÄTTÖMÄLLE LASERSÄTEILYLLE ÄLÄ
AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM. KATSO SÄTEESEEN.

VORSICHT ADVARSEL
UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG,
USYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING VED ÅBNING, NÅR
WENN ABDECKUNG GEÖFFNET UND
SIKKERHEDSBRYDERE ER UDE AF
SICHERHEITSVERRIEGELUNG ÜBERBRÜCKT.
FUNKTION. UNDGÅ UDSAETTELSE FOR
NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN.
STRÅLNING.

LASER WAVE – LENGTH : 770 – 795nm VARNING !


Pulse times : 10.24µsec OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING NÄR DENNA DEL
Out put power : 0.15mW ± 0.01mW ÄR ÖPPNAD OCH SPÄRREN ÄR URKOPPLAD.
BETRAKTA EJ STRÅLEN. – STRÅLEN ÄR
FARLIG.
At the production line, the output power Caution
of the scanner unit is adjusted to 0.57 This product contains a low power laser
MILLI-WATT PLUS 20 PCTS and is device. To ensure continued safety do not
maintained constant by the operation of remove any cover or attempt to gain access
the Automatic Power Control (APC). to the inside of the product. Refer all
Even if the APC circuit fails in operation
for some reason, the maximum output servicing to qualified personnel.
power will only be 15 MILLI-WATT 0.1
MICRO-SEC. Giving and accessible
emission level of 42 MICRO-WATT
which is still-less than the limit of
CLASS-1 laser product.

VAROITUS! LAITTEEN KÄYTTÄMINEN MUULLA


KUIN TÄSSÄ KÄYTTÖOHJEESSA MAINITULLA
TAVALLA SAATTAA ALTISTAA KÄYTTÄJÄN
TURVALLISUUSLUOKAN 1 YLITTÄVÄLLE
NÄKYMÄTTÖMÄLLE LASERSÄTEILYLLE.

VARNING - OM APPARATEN ANVÄNDS PÅ ANNAT


SÄTT ÄN I DENNA BRUKSANVISNING
SPECIFICERATS, KAN ANVÄNDAREN UTSÄTTAS
FÖR OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING, SOM
ÖVERSKRIDER GRÄNSEN FÖR LASERKLASS 1.

The foregoing is applicable only to the 220V LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE


model, 230V model and 240V model. KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT
CONTENTS
[1] GENERAL [8] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
1. Major functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 1. High voltage section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-1
2. Note for servicing and handling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 A. List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-1
B. Disassembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-1
[2] SPECIFICATIONS C. Assembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-1
1. Basic Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 D. Charger wire cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-1
2. Operation specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 E. Charger wire replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
3. Copy performance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 2. Operation panel section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
4. SPLC (JBIG GDI) printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 A. List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
5. Scan function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 B. Disassembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
6. RSPF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 C. Assembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3
7. Basic Specifications (FAX section) (AL-1566) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 3. Optical section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3
A. List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS B. Disassembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3
1. Supply system table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 C. Assembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4
2. Environmental . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 4. Fusing section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5
3. Production control number (lot No.) identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 A. List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5
B. Disassembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5
[4] EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES
C. Assembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
1. Appearance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
5. Tray paper feed/transport section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
2. Internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 A. List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
3. Operation panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 B. Disassembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
4. Motors and solenoids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 C. Assembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12
5. Sensors and switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 6. Manual paper feed section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13
6. PWB unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 A. List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13
7. Cross sectional view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 B. Disassembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13
C. Assembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14
[5] UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION D. Pressure plate holder attachment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14
1. Copier installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 7. Rear frame section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15
2. Cautions on handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 A. List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15
3. Checking packed components and accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 B. Disassembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15
4. Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 C. Assembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16
5. Removing protective packing materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 8. Power section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16
6. Installing the TD cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 A. List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16
7. Loading the paper tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 B. Disassembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16
8. Power to copier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 C. Assembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16
9. Software for AL-1556/1566 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 9. Duplex motor section (RSPF model only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16
A. Before installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 A. List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16
B. Installing the software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 B. Disassembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16
C. Setting up button manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 C. Assembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16
10. Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 10. Reverse roller section (RSPF model only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16
A. USB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 A. List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16
B. RJ45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 B. Disassembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16
C. Assembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17
11. Moving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
11. RSPF section (RSPF model only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17
[6] COPY PROCESS A. RSPF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17
1. Functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 B. Intermediate tray. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17
2. Outline of print process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 C. Upper cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17
3. Actual print process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 D. Pickup unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18
E. Upper cover of the pickup unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18
[7] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS F. Sensor PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18
1. Outline of operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 G. Pickup solenoid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18
2. Scanner section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 H. Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19
A. Scanner unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 I. Manual paper feed roller, pickup roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19
B. Optical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 J. Transport unit removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20
C. Drive system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 K. Belt 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20
3. Laser unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 L. Belt 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20
A. Basic structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 M. SPF motor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20
B. Laser beam path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 N. Solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20
C. Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 O. Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21
4. Fuser section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 P. Paper supply roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21
A. General description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 Q. Paper entry sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21
5. Paper feed section and paper transport section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 R. Transport roller 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22
A. Paper transport path and general operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 S. Paper exit roller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22
T. Solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23
6. Process unit new drum detection mechanism. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
7. RSPF section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
A. Outline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
B. Document transport path and basic composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
C. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
D. Cases where a document jam is caused . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
E. RSPF (SPF) open/close detection (book document detection) . . 7-8
8. D-D (Duplex to Duplex) mode paper/document transport
(Duplex model) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
A. Initial state. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
B. Front copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
C. Back copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
9. Shifter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
[9] ADJUSTMENTS
1. Optical section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
A. Copy magnification ratio adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
B. Image position adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
2. Copy density adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
A. Copy density adjustment timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
B. Note for copy density adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
C. Necessary tool for copy density adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
D. Features of copy density adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
E. Copy density adjustment procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
3. High voltage adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
A. Main charger (Grid bias) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
B. DV bias check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
4. Duplex adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
A. Adjusting the paper reverse position in memory for
duplex copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
B. Adjusting trailing edge void in duplex copy mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
5. SPF (RSPF) scan position automatic adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
6. RSPF (SPF) mode sub scanning direction magnification
ratio adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
7. Automatic black level correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
[10] TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES
1. Entering the test command mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
2. Key rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
3. List of test commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
4. Descriptions of various test commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
5. FAX soft switch (AL-1566) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
A. FAX soft switch setting change quick reference table . . . . . . . 10-38
B. Soft switch list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
C. Soft switch descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
6. Trouble codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68
A. Trouble codes list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68
B. Details of trouble codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68
7. Communication error codes (AL-1566) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70
A. Error code identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70
[11] USER PROGRAM
1. User programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
A. Copy mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
B. Print mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
2. Selecting a setting for a user program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
[12] ELECTRICAL SECTION
1. Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
A. Overall block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
2. Circuit descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
A. Main PWB (MCU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
B. DC power circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
[13] CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1. MCU PWB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
2. FAX MAIN PWB (AL-1566) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-25
3. OPERATION PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-31
4. FAX OPERATION (AL-1566) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-34
5. NIC PWB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-35
6. POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-39
7. ACTUAL WIRING DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-41
[1] GENERAL
1. Major functions
Configurations
Item CPM / Color
SB/ 2 GDI Sharp IEEE External
PPM SPF R-SPF Scanner SPLC E-SORT Duplex Shifter FAX USB RJ45
MB Tray printer desk 1284 NIC
Model A4 (push)
AL-1556 15 MB ✕ ✕ ❍ ❍ ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✕ ❍ ✕ ❍ ❍ ✕
(2.0) print only
AL-1566 15 MB ✕ ✕ ❍ ❍ ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✕ ❍ ❍ ✕
(2.0) print only

Descriptions of items
CPM: Copy speed (Copies Per Minute)
SB/MB: SB = Manual feed single bypass, MB = Manual feed multi bypass
2 tray: Second cassette unit
SPF: Original feed unit
R-SPF: Duplex original feed unit
Color scanner: Color scanner function
GDI printer: GDI printer function with USB
SPLC: SPLC printer function
E-SORT: Electrical sort
Duplex: Auto duplex copy function
Shifter: Job separator function
FAX: FAX function
Sharpdesk: Scanner utilities
IEEE1284: Interface port (parallel)
USB: Interface port (USB)
RJ45: Interface port (Network)
External NIC: Interface port (Network)
Descriptions of table
❍: Standard provision
✕: No function or no option available
Opt: Option

(AL-1556) (AL-1566)

2. Note for servicing and handling


When the main unit power is repeatedly turned OFF/ON rapidly (for about 1sec), the IC (OA982) on the MCU PWB may malfunction to cause an error
(E1-00 Communication error), which does not boot the machine. In case of this error, the blank display is kept for several tens seconds and then "E1-
00" is displayed on the panel display.
<Countermeasure>
Turn off the power and keep it for more than 10sec. Then turn on the power.
When the machine is booted.: There is no problem in the MCU PWB.
When the machine is not booted.: The MCU PWB trouble

AL-1556/1566 GENERAL 1 - 1
[2] SPECIFICATIONS
1. Basic Specifications
Item
Type Desktop
Copy system Dry, electrostatic
Segment (class) Digital personal copier
Copier dimensions AL-1556 20.4" (W) x 19.8" (D) x 15.0" (H) (518mm (W) x 503mm (D) x 465mm (H))
AL-1566 20.4" (W) x 19.8" (D) x 18.3" (H) (518mm (W) x 503mm (D) x 465mm (H))
Weight (Approximately) AL-1556 44.1 lbs. (20.0kg) Not includes toner cartridge
AL-1566 45.2 lbs. (20.5kg) Not includes toner cartridge

2. Operation specifications
Section, item Details
Paper feed Paper feed system 1 tray (250 sheets) + multi bypass (50 sheets)
section AB system Tray paper feed Paper size A4, B5, A5
section Paper weight 56 - 80g/m2 (15 - 21 lbs.)
Paper feed capacity 250 sheets
Kinds Standard paper, specified paper, recycled paper
Remark User adjustment of front paper guide available
Multi bypass paper Paper size A4, B5, A5, B6, A6 (Post card)
feed section Paper weight 52 - 128g/m2 (14 - 34.5 lbs.)
Paper feed capacity 50 sheets
Kinds Standard paper, specified paper, recycled paper, envelope,
OHP, Label (Single copy)
Remark User adjustment of side paper guide available
Inch system Tray paper feed Paper size 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2 x 11", 8-1/2" x 5-1/2" (Landscape)
section Paper weight 15 - 21 lbs.
Paper feed capacity 250 sheets
Kinds Standard paper, specified paper, recycled paper
Remark User adjustment of front paper guide available
Multi bypass paper Paper size 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2 x 11", 8-1/2" x 5-1/2", 3-1/2" x 5-1/2"
feed section (Landscape)
Paper weight 14 - 34.5 lbs.
Paper feed capacity 50 sheets
Kinds Standard paper, specified paper, recycled paper, OHP, Label,
Envelop (Single copy)
Remark User adjustment of side paper guide available
Paper exit section Exit way Face down
Capacity of output tray 200 sheets
Originals Original set Center Registration (left edge)
Max. original size A4 (8-1/2" x 14")
Original kinds sheet, book
Original size detection None
Optical Scanning section Scanning system 3 CCDs (RGB) sensor scanning by lighting white lamp
section CCD sensor Resolution 600 dpi
Lighting lamp Type CCFL
Voltage 560Vrms
Power consumption 2.8W
Output data R, G, B 1 or 8 bits/pixel / A/D 16bit
Writing section Writing system Writing to OPC drum by the semiconductor laser
Laser unit Resolution 600 dpi
Image forming Photoconductor type OPC (30ø)
Life 18k
Charger Charging system Saw -tooth charging with a grid, / (-) scorotron discharge
Transfer system (+) DC scorotron system
Separation system (-) DC scorotron system
Developing Developing system Dry, 2-component magnetic brush development system
Cleaning Cleaning system Counter blade system (Counter to rotation)

AL-1556/1566 SPECIFICATIONS 2 - 1
Section, item Details
Fusing section Fusing system Heat roller system
Upper heat roller type Teflon roller
Lower heat roller type Silicon rubber roller
Heater lamp type Halogen lamp
Voltage 200V
Power consumption 800W
Electrical section Power source Voltage 200V
Frequency 60Hz
Rated current 8A
Power consumption Max. Less than 1000W
Average (during copying) 350 Wh/H *1)
Average (stand-by) AL-1556: 80Wh/H *1)
AL-1566: 86Wh/H *1)
Pre-heat mode 25Wh/H *1)
Auto power shut-off mode 8.8Wh/H *1)
*1) May fluctuate due to environmental conditions and the input voltage.

3. Copy performance
Section, item Details
Copy magnification Fixed magnification 4 Reduction + 3 Enlargement
ratios (AB system : 25, 50, 70, 86, 100, 141, 200, 400%)
(Inch system : 25, 50, 64, 78, 100, 129, 200, 400%)
Zooming OC: 25 - 400%, RSPF 50 - 200%
magnification ratios (376 steps in 1% increments)
Manual steps (text, photo) 5 steps
Copy speed First copy time Tray paper feed 9.6 sec. (Pre-heat mode:25 sec. / Auto power-shut-off mode : 40 sec.)
A4 or Letter/100%/Auto Exposure
AB system Copy speed (CPM) Same size 15
A4 Enlargement 15
(Landscape) Reduction 15
AB system Copy speed (CPM) Same size 15
B5 Enlargement 15
(Landscape) Reduction 15
Inch system Copy speed (CPM) Same size 12
8-1/2" x 14" Enlargement 12
(Landscape) Reduction 12
Inch system Copy speed (CPM) Same size 16
8-1/2" x 11" Enlargement 16
(Landscape) Reduction 16
Max. continuous copy quantity 99
Void Void area leading edge 1 - 4mm
Trailing edge 4mm or less, 6mm or less (Duplex copying/both image)
Side void area 0.5mm or more (per side)
4.5mm or less (total of both sides)
Image loss leading edge Same size: 3.0mm or less (OC) / 4.0mm or less (SPF/R-SPF/Duplex)
Enlarge: 1.5mm or less (OC) / 3.0mm or less (SPF/R-SPF/Duplex)
Reduction (50%): 6.0mm or less (OC) / 8.0mm or less (SPF/R-SPF/Duplex)
Warm-up time 0 sec.
Power save mode reset time 0 sec.
Paper jam recovery time 0 sec.

AL-1556/1566 SPECIFICATIONS 2 - 2
4. SPLC (JBIG GDI) printer
Print speed Max. 15ppm (A4 / with ROPM) / 16ppm (Letter / with ROPM)
First print time 9.6 sec. (without data transfer time)
Duplex Yes
ROPM Yes
CPU None
Memory Share the memory with E-SORT function
Interface RJ45 (10 base) / USB 2.0
Network Internal NIC
Emulation SPLC (JBIG GDI)
MIB support No
Resolution 600dpi *1
Supported OS Win 95 / 98 / Me / NT 4.0 / 2000 / XP
WHQL support Yes *2
Application Status window
*1: Engine Resolution
*2: Running change

5. Scan function
Type Flat Bed Color Scanner
Scanning system Document glass/RSPF
Light source 3 CCDs (RGB) sensor scanning by lighting white lamp (2 pcs of CCFL)
Resolution Optical: 600 x 1200dpi
Setting range: 50 - 9600dpi (Preview resolution is fixed at 75dpi)
Originals Sheet type / Book type
Output data R, G, B 1 or 8 bits/pixel / A/D 16bit
Scan range OC / RSPF: 8.5" (297mm) (L) x 14" (431mm) (W)
Original position: Platen: Left center / SPF: Right center
Scan speed OC / SPF: Max. 2.88ms/line (Color/Gray scale), Max. 0.96 ms/line (B & W)
Protocol TWAIN / WIA (Only XP) / STI
Support file format RAW / JPEG
Interface USB2.0
Scanner utility Button Manager / Sharpdesk
Scan key/lamp Yes
Duplex scan No
Supported OS Win 98 / Me / 2000 / XP
Void area No (User settable by PC)
WHQL supported Yes *1
*1: Running change

6. RSPF
Original capacity 30 sheets (52 to 90g/m2) (14 to 23.9 lbs.)
Original size A4 to A5/10" x 14" to 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"
Original replacement speed 12CPM (A4/8-1/2" x 11"Landscape)
Job speed (Tray1,Landscape) Single copy S to S 12CPM
S to D 5.6CPM
D to S 5.5CPM
D to D 5.2CPM
Multi copy S to S 16CPM
D to S 16CPM
Original placement Face up
Original weight 52 to 90g/m2(14 - 23.9lbs.)
Mixed feeding No
Original which cannot Thermal papers, originals with punch holes for files, be used folded paper, transparent originals
such as OHP films, stapled or clip used originals with cover up liquid used, Originals with tape
sealed, originals with high level frictional coefficient such as photos or catalogs.

AL-1556/1566 SPECIFICATIONS 2 - 3
7. Basic Specifications (FAX section) (AL-1566)
Large item Middle item Small item Sub item Specifications
Communication Electronic Electronic Less than 3 sec (Super G3 mode, 33600bps)
system transmission transmission time Less than 7 sec (G3 ECM mode, 14400bps)
system Compression/ MH, MR, MMR, JBIG
Extraction system
MODEM speed 33600bps - 2400bps (Automatic fall-back)
Mutual communication Super G3/G3
Used line Public switched telephone network (PSTN), Private
branch exchange (PBX)
R-key operation when Yes (Germany only)
setting PBX
Used line number 1 line
Connection form For 1 line of telephone;
• FAX machine
• External telephone
ECM Yes
Transmission Transmission Items which can be • Specifying the destination number
functions operation selected and • Resolution
registered by user • Density
when transmitting • Transmission start time
• Polling receive
• Cover addition setting
• Send document scan system
Auto send function Auto send function to a predetermined telephone number
Application send Chain dial Max. 50 digits
function Rapid key dial Registration key One-touch key
Number of items Max. 18 items
Number of digits of Max. 40 digits
destination number
Destination registration Max. 20 characters
name
Retrieval characters 0 - 3 characters
Communication start Max. speed: 33600bps/ High speed: 14400bps/ Middle
speed speed: 9600bps/ Low speed: 4800bps
International NO/ Mode 1/ Mode 2/ Mode 3
communication mode
Transmission method One-touch dial key
Speed dial Number of items 100 items (Reduction number 00 - 99)
Number of digit of 40 digits
destination number
Destination registration 20 characters
name
Retrieval characters 0 - 3 characters
Communication start Max. speed: 33600bps/ High speed: 14400bps/ Meddle
speed speed: 9600bps/ Low speed: 4800bps
International NO/ Mode 1/ Mode 2/ Mode 3
communication mode
Transmission method Speed dial key + (00 - 99) + Start key
Group dial Registration key One-touch dial key
Number of groups 18 items (One-touch dial + Group dial)
which can be
registered
Destination registration 20 characters
name
Number of stations Max. 100 stations in one group (Max. total items which
which can be can be registered: 150 items)
registered in one group
Numbers which can be Destination numbers registered in one-touch dial and
registered speed dial, 10-key dial
Retrieval characters 0 - 3 characters
Transmission method Group dial key
Address book send Retrieval target • Speed dial
• One-touch dial
• Group dial
Retrieval key SEARCH key
Retrieval character 0 - 3 characters

AL-1556/1566 SPECIFICATIONS 2 - 4
Large item Middle item Small item Sub item Specifications
Send functions Document scan Document size Max. document width Inch series: 8.5"
function AB series: 210mm
Max. document length 500mm (Only form R-SPF, with user support)
Send document size AB series: A4
Inch series: Letter (8.5 x 11)/Legal (8.5 x 14) (Default:
Letter (8.5 x 11))
Document size Yes
specification
Half-tone reproduction Half-tone 256 gradations
Resolution selection Manual 5 steps
Standard/Fine/Super Fine/Fine + Half-tone/Super Fine +
Half-tone (Default: Standard)
Scan density select Density select Light/Medium/Dark
function
Scan resolution select Selectable image Scan density
function quality mode
Resolution select Standard: 8dot x 3.85 line/mm
Fine: 8dot x 7.7 line/mm
Super Fine: 8dot x 15.4 line/mm
Half-tone: Scan in 256 gradations
Document table scan Book document scan/send function from the document
(OC send) function table (OC). In one send job, the send document size is
fixed.
Send document Sender registration/ Sender telephone 20 digits
information adding send function number
function Sender registration 40 characters
name
Send header function Header display content Sender number registered in sender registration/ Sender
name/ Send date and time/ page
Page counter function Adding position Top right (The right edge)
Adding form P. XXX (Max. 999)
Cover adding function Display items • Date and time
• Destination name (Max. 20 characters)
• Destination number (Max. 40 digits)
• Sender name (Max. 20 characters)
• Sender number (Max. 20 digits)
• Send quantity (3 digits)
• Send message (When send message adding function
is used)
Send message adding Fixed message NO MESSAGE/CONFIDENTIAL/PLS. DISTRIBUTE/
function URGENT/PLS. CALL BACK/IMPORTANT
Index function Yes (Max. 10 kinds in printable area)
Basic send Direct send function Yes
functions Memory send function Send form • Send reservation
Number of items of • Time specifying send
send reservation • Group send
• Serial broadcast
Max. 52 items (excluding redial)
Group send and broadcast are treated as one item.
Operation when • Document scan stop
memory full • Memory full display → Job continuation check
• Job continuation: Scanned document data are sent.
• Job stop: Scanned document data are deleted.
• In either case, document is held in SPF and not
discharged.
Quick online send Valid when memory mode is ON. Scan of send
function document data and send are performed together.
Auto resend function When busy tone Redial is performed according to the setting of "Number/
detected interval of redial when busy."
When no response Redial is performed according to the setting of "Number/
(CED/ FSK signal are interval of resend in communication error."
not detected)
Communication error
Long document send Supports up to 500mm. When this length is exceeded,
function "PAPER JAM" occurs.

AL-1556/1566 SPECIFICATIONS 2 - 5
Large item Middle item Small item Sub item Specifications
Send functions Application send Manual send function This function allows to switch to FAX manually when off-
function hook with document set.
Time specifying send Available Memory send, Polling, serial broadcast, serial send
function communication request
Number of set items Max. 5 items
Set range 00:00 - 23:59 (Unit: 1 min)
Day of week 8 kinds (From Monday to Sunday, and no specification)
Group send function A message is sent sequentially to two or more
destinations registered in group dial. (Max. 52
destinations can be registered in one group.)
Serial broadcast Broadcast send Max. 100 items
function destination
Duplex send function Valid only in duplex support models.
Direct send and scan from OC cannot be made.
Send document size A4/ Letter/ Legal size
Incoming Incoming detection Call signal detection Call bell is distinguished from net call signals to judge
functions function function incoming.
system Remote select Receive is started when CNG signal is detected in
function by CNG standby with external telephone used.
detection
Application Incoming reject Incoming is rejected when remaining memory capacity is
incoming function function less than 7%.
Call sound volume Volume select OFF/LOW/MIDDLE/HIGH
adjustment function
Alarm sound volume Volume select OFF/LOW/MIDDLE/HIGH
adjustment function
Key sound volume Follows setting on the main unit.
setting
Junk FAX protection Junk stations are registered to be rejected.
function Number of Max. 10 items
registrations
Receive Receive function Receive standby • Auto (AUTO)
functions mode • Manual (MAN.)
system • Answering machine (A.M.)
Basic receive Auto receive function The line is switched to FAX by detection of call signal.
function (receive standby mode)
Number of calls AUTO: 0 - 9 times (Default: 2 times)
Tel/FAX auto select No
Incoming reject • During Test Command by serviceman
conditions • Insufficient memory capacity
• During menu
• During memory status display
Manual receive Receive is manually started.
function Number of calls 0 - 9 times (Default: 0 times)
Basic receive Memory receive Receive data are accumulated in memory, and outputted
function function when output conditions are satisfied.
Substitution receive Countermeasure against print inhibit state.
function • No recording paper
• Recording paper jam
• During copy/print job
• During printing by printer
• Cover open
• Paper empty, size error
Forcible memory No
receive function
Overtake output No
function

AL-1556/1566 SPECIFICATIONS 2 - 6
Large item Middle item Small item Sub item Specifications
Receive Receive document Auto reduction/ Auto reduction function When the reference line number is in the specified range.
functions output function divided receive Divided receive When the reference line number exceeds the specified
system function function range.
Polling receive The remote machine must be provided with polling
function (Send request function. Communication is allowed with an other
function) company machine.
Sequential send Polling is made to two or more specified destinations.
request (Polling) Number of items of destination registration: Max. 100
communication items
Remote send Scanned document data in memory are sent
automatically by send request from the remote machine.
Protection function • Check by sender number
• Check by allow number
Print system Recording paper Recordable size A4/8.5 x 11/8.5 x 14
Paper feed Paper feed by tray (Excluding multi manual feed)
Recording paper size The recording paper length is detected. If the size differs,
detection a paper size error occurs.
Recording paper Detected by a paper pickup error.
empty detection
Duplex receive Available only in the duplex function support models.
Transfer function Receive data are transferred to the registered station.
Number of registered 1 item
transfer destination
Registered telephone 40 digits
number
Local transfer Countermeasures against an error
• Paper jam
• No toner cartridge
• No toner
• During toner supply
• CRU life
• No recording paper
Telephone Main unit On-hook dial function Yes
functions telephone function Manual redial function Max. memory digit 50 digits
system Display digits End 20 digits
Pause function Yes (Fixed to 2sec)
Pulse/Tone select Yes (Set by soft switch)
function
External telephone Select function by Select number (1 digit) + [**] (0 - 9)
connection DTMF
function
Record table Report list Report output function Report select • TIMER LIST
system • ACTIVITY REPORT
• TELEPHONE# LIST
• GROUP LIST
• PASSCODE LIST
• JUNK FAX# LIST
• USER PROGRAM LIST
Recording table auto Number of items Auto print for every 50 items of send/receive total.
print function
Communication report Report select • Send report list
list • Receive report list
• Serial broadcast send report list
• Image memory addition
Print status select • ALWAYS PRINTS
• ERROR ONLY
• NEVER PRINTS

AL-1556/1566 SPECIFICATIONS 2 - 7
Large item Middle item Small item Sub item Specifications
Memory Memory outline Memory capacity Standard memory 2MB
functions Option No
system Document quantity to A4 standard documents 120 pages
be stored
Data storage area/ Image data Flash memory (Data are retained when the power is
backup when service turned off or when the battery is exhausted.)
interruption (Recorded Data other than image SRAM (Data are retained when the power is turned off,
data, receive data) but deleted when the battery is exhausted with the power
OFF.)
Treatment when Quick online Memory full on the first Send cancel without call-out
memory full page
Memory full on the The line is shut-off after sending the last page of scanned
second or later page data.
Memory send Memory full on the first Send cancel
page
Memory full on the Send/Cancel is selected depending on the select menu
second or later page display.
Send: The line is shut off after sending the scanned data.
Cancel: Cancel even scanned data.
Memory status Yes (The remaining memory capacity (%) is displayed on
check function the LCD.)
Memory content Not-sent job is displayed on the LCD. (Cancel is
check function possible.)
Document jam Error LED, LCD message are displayed.
Service Test command Send/receive of specified signals, commands, and image
functions function data are performed without a remote machine.
system Counter function Communication • Number of send pages
counter • Number of receive pages
• Number of output pages
• Send time
• Receive time
Others Environmental Auto clear Conforms to the main unit setting. When the operation is
functions left for 1 min or more, the display returns to the main
menu.
Auto shut -off Conforms to the main unit setting.
Date and time Day/ Month/ Year/ Day of week/ O'clock/ minute
setting function
Image priority STANDARD/FINE/SUPER FINE
function
BEEP LENGTH 3SEC/1SEC/NO BEEP
(Communication
end sound length)
setting
Auto summer time Last Sunday of March AM1:00 → 2:00,
setting Last Sunday of October AM1:00 → 0:00
(Default: ON)
Multi language Conforms to the main unit setting.
function

AL-1556/1566 SPECIFICATIONS 2 - 8
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS
1. Supply system table
Common to all destinations

No. Name Content Life Product name Package


1 TD cartridge (Black) 4K Toner/developer cartridge x 1 4K AL-110DC 5
(Toner: Net weight 124g) (Developer: Net weight 190g) A4 size at 5% coverage
2 Drum cartridge Drum cartridge x 1 18K AL-100DR 5

2. Environmental
The environmental conditions for assuring the copy quality and the machine operations are as follows:

(1) Normal operating condition (4) Supply storage condition


Temperature:20 - 25°C Humidity (RH)
Humidity:65 ± 5%RH
90%
(2) Acceptable operating condition
Humidity (RH)
85%

60%

20%

–5˚C 45˚C
20%

10˚C 30˚C 35˚C

(3) Transport condition


Humidity (RH)
90%

60%

15%

–25˚C 30˚C 40˚C

AL-1556/1566 CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 - 1


3. Production control number (lot No.) identification
<Developing cartridge>

Production month
Production day
Destination code
(Dealer, distributor, OEM, etc.)
Production place
(SOCC: Fixed to B.)
End digit of year
Version No.

∗: Destination code
Classification No.
A packed with machine G Production control
EX Destination
B packed with machine H label attachment position
A P
Option Destination
B Q

<Drum cartridge>
The label on the drum cartridge shows the date of production.
(SOCC production)

Production month
Production day
Destination code
(Dealer, distributor, OEM, etc.)
Production place
(SOCC: Fixed to B.)
Production control
End digit of year label attachment position(*1)
Version No.

*1 The production control label is not attached to the cartridge of a


China product.

AL-1556/1566 CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 - 2


[4] EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES
1. Appearance

RSPF
10
11
12
Interface
14 20
13

21
1
2
3
6
7 18 15
4
8 16 24
5
17
L 18
9 TE
22 19
23
E
LIN

(AL-1566)

1 Document glass 2 FAX operation panel (AL-1566) 3 Operation panel


4 Front cover 5 Paper tray 6 Side cover
7 Side cover open button 8 Bypass tray paper guides 9 Bypass tray
10 Reversing tray 11 Original guides 12 Document feeder cover
13 Document feeder tray 14 Exit area 15 Paper output tray
16 Paper output tray extension 17 Power switch 18 Handles
19 Power cord 20 USB port 21 LAN port
22 Telephone line port (AL-1566) 23 External telephone line port (AL-1566) 24 Paper holding arm

2. Internal

TD cartridge Drum cartridge

5 3
4

1 Side cover 2 Fusing unit release lever 3 Transfer charger


4 Charger cleaner 5 Front cover

AL-1556/1566 EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 4 - 1


3. Operation panel
22 23 24 25 26 27 1 2 3 4 5

01 02 03 04 05 SPEED/ BROAD- RECEPTION REDIAL/


10 11 12 13 14 MEMORY SEARCH CAST MODE PAUSE

06 07 08 09 RESOLU- COVER AL-1566


15 16 17 18 SHIFT TION CONTRAST SHEET REPORT 2-SIDED TX

OK
LINE STATUS SPEAKER

1 1 2
1,2,3,
AUTO
2 2
2 1 1
1,2,3,
SP. FUNC
ZOOM
AL-1566 only
33 28 29 30
31 34 32
Display
READY TO COPY. 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
100% 8.5x11 0

18 19 20 21

1 [MODE SELECT] key / Mode indicators 2 Display


Press this key to select the mode. The indicator of the selected mode This shows messages indicating the machine status and any
lights (copy, printer, scanner, fax). problems that occur, as well as user programs and function setting
menus.
3 Numeric keys 4 [CLEAR] key ( )
Use these to enter the number of copies and other numerical Use this to clear the set number of copies, as well as cancel a job
settings. that is in progress. When a setting menu appears, use this key to
The keys can also be used to select items in function setting menus. move back to the previous menu level.
5 Power save indicator 6 RSPF indicator
This lights up when the power save function is activated. This lights up when an original is placed in the RSPF.
7 Error indicator 8 [TRAY SELECT] key ( )
This lights steadily or blinks when a paper misfeed or other error Use to select the paper tray that has the desired paper for copying.
occurs.
9 Tray location indicator 10 [MENU] key
Indicates the selected paper tray. The indicator blinks when the tray Press this key to select the paper size for copying, to configure a
is out of paper or is not closed. user program or to display the total count.
11 [2-SIDED COPY] key 12 [E-SORT/SP.FUN] key
Use to copy both sides of an original. Press to select the sort function, 2 in 1 copy function, or margin shift
function.
13 [ ] key ( ), [ ] key ( ), [OK] key 14 [EXPOSURE] key
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( ) to select an item in a Use to switch from auto exposure adjustment to text mode or photo
function setting menu. mode.
Press the [OK] key to enter a selection.
15 [ZOOM] key 16 [START] key ( ) / Ready indicator
Press to select an enlargement or reduction ratio. The ready indicator lights up when copying or scanning is possible.
To select a preset ratio setting, press the [ZOOM] key and select the To begin copying, press the [START] key ( ).
desired preset ratio. To select a ratio that is not preset, press the The [START] key ( ) is also pressed to return to normal operation
[ZOOM] key, select the preset ratio that is closest to the desired ratio, from auto power shut-off mode.
and then press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( ) to increase or Press this key to start FAX send and FAX manual receive, etc.
decrease the ratio in increments of 1%.
17 [CLEAR ALL] key ( ) 18 Shows the current copy ratio.
This returns all functions to the default settings. When pressed in a
setting menu, this returns the settings and display to the initial state.
19 Shows the selected paper size. 20 Shows the number of copies that has been entered with the numeric
keys.
21 A checkmark " " appears when the exposure has been changed, or 22 One Touch keys (AL-1566)
when two-sided copying, sort, 2 IN 1, or margin shift is selected. Used to dial automatically to a registered destination.
23 [MEMORY] key (AL-1566) 24 [SPEED/SEARCH] key (AL-1566)
Used to turn ON/OFF the memory mode. Press this key to dial to a number registered as a reduction number.
Also used to delete a mistaken input of character and number. To
retrieve a registered FAX number, press this key twice.
25 [BROADCAST] key (AL-1566) 26 [RECEPTION MODE] key (AL-1566)
Used to send FAX message to two or more destinations. Press this key to select the reception mode.
27 [REDIAL/PAUSE] key (AL-1566) 28 [RESOLUTION] key (AL-1566)
Press this key to dial again to the destination which was previously Used to change the FAX resolution.
dialed to. When this key is pressed, the LCD display is shifted sequentially.
Press this key to insert pause when dialing. (2sec) Standard → Fine → Superfine → Fine + Half-tone →
Superfine + Half-tone
29 [CONTRAST] key (AL-1566) 30 [COVER SHEET] key (AL-1566)
Used to adjust the density in FAX send. Used to add a cover page and message.
31 [REPORT] key (AL-1566) 32 [2-SIDED TX] key (AL-1566)
Used to print reports. Press this key to send duplex document.
33 [SHIFT] key (AL-1566) 34 [SPEAKER] key (AL-1566)
Used in combination with the one-touch key to select one-touch Press this key to allow manual dialing.
destination umber 10 – 18.

AL-1556/1566 EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 4 - 2


4. Motors and solenoids

9
12
2

11

10

7
13 6
3

No. Part name Control signal Function / Operation


1 Main motor MM Drives the copier.
2 Scanner motor MRMT Drives the optical mirror base (scanner unit).
3 Toner motor TM Supplies toner.
4 Cooling fan motor VFM Cools the optical section.
5 Resist roller solenoid RRS Resist roller rotation control solenoid
6 Paper feed solenoid CPFS1 Cassette Paper feed solenoid 1
7 Multi paper feed solenoid MPFS Multi manual pages feed solenoid
8 SPF motor SPFM Drives the single pass feeder
9 Duplex motor DMT Devices the duplex paper transport section
10 Original feed solenoid SPUS Original pick up solenoid
11 SPF paper feed solenoid SPFS Original feed solenoid
12 SPF gate solenoid SGS Controls the document reverse gate.
13 Shifter motor SFTM Drives the shifter.

AL-1556/1566 EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 4 - 3


5. Sensors and switches

1
2
8

10

5
7
6

No. Name Signal Type Function Output


1 Scanner unit home position MHPS Transmission sensor Scanner unit home position detection "H" at home position
sensor
2 POD sensor POD Transmission sensor Paper exit detection "H" at paper pass
3 PPD2 sensor PPD2 Transmission sensor Paper transport detection 2 "L" at paper pass
4 Cassette detection switch CED1 Micro-switch Cassette installation detection "H" at cassette insertion
5 PPD1 sensor PPD1 Transmission sensor Paper transport detection 1 "L" at paper pass
6 Door switch DSW Micro-switch Door open/close detection 1 or 0V of 24V at door open
(safety switch for 24V)
7 Drum reset switch DRST Micro-switch New drum detection switch Instantaneously "H" at insertion of
new drum
8 SPF sensor SPID/ Transmission sensor Paper entry detection "L" at paper pass
SD SW Cover open/close detection
9 SPPD sensor SPPD Transmission sensor Paper transport detection "L" at paper pass
10 PD1 sensor PD1 Micro-switch Paper width detect "H" at A4 size or less
"L" at A4 size or more

AL-1556/1566 EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 4 - 4


6. PWB unit

5 2

1
11

10

4
7

No. Name Function


1 Exposure lamp inverter PWB Exposure lamp (CCFL) control
2 Main PWB (MCU) Copier control
3 Operation PWB Operation input/display
4 Power PWB AC power input, DC voltage control, High voltage control
5 CCD sensor PWB For image scanning
6 LSU motor PWB For polygon motor drive (In the LSU)
7 TCS PWB For toner sensor control
8 LSU PWB For laser control (In the LSU)
9 NIC PWB 10 BASE-T Network I/F
10 FAX-operation PWB FAX operation input (AL-1566)
11 Modem PWB FAX control (AL-1566)

AL-1556/1566 EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 4 - 5


7. Cross sectional view

3 5 18 15 16 17

1 2 4

10

14 13 12 11

No. Part name Function and operation


1 Scanner unit Illuminates the original with the copy lamp and passes the reflected light to the lens unit(CCD).
2 Exposure lamp Exposure lamp (CCFL) Illuminates original
3 LSU (Laser unit) Converts the original image signal into laser beams and writes onto the drum.
4 Paper exit roller Roller for paper exit
5 Main charger Provides negative charges evenly to the drum surface.
6 Heat roller Fuses toner on the paper. (Teflon roller)
7 Pressure roller Fuses toner on the paper. (Silicon rubber roller)
8 Drum Forms images.
9 Transfer unit Transfers images onto the drum.
10 Pickup roller Picks up the manual feed paper. (In multi feed only)
11 Manual paper feed tray Tray for manual feed paper
12 Manual paper feed roller Transport the paper from the manual paper feed port.
13 PS roller unit Takes synchronization between the lead edge and the rear edge of the paper.
14 Paper feed roller Picks up a sheet of paper from the cassette.
15 Pickup roller Picks up documents.
16 Separation roller Separates documents to feed properly.
17 PS roller Feeds documents to the scanning section.
18 Paper exit roller Discharges documents.

AL-1556/1566 EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 4 - 6


[5] UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 2. Cautions on handling
Be careful in handling the copier as follows to maintain the perfor-
1. Copier installation mance of this copier.
Do not drop the copier, subject it to shock or strike it against any
Improper installation may damage the copier. Please note the following
object.
during initial installation and whenever the copier is moved.
Caution: If the copier is moved from a cool place to a warm place, con-
densation may form inside the copier. Operation in this condi-
tion will cause poor copy quality and malfunctions.
Leave the copier at room temperature for at least 2 hours
before use.
Do not install your copier in areas that are:
• damp, humid, or very dusty

Do not expose the drum cartridge to direct sunlight.


• exposed to direct sunlight Doing so will damage the surface (green portion) of the drum cartridge,
causing poor print quality.

• poorly ventilated

Store spare supplies such as drum cartridges and TD cartridges in a


dark place without removing from the package before use.
If they are exposed to direct sunlight, poor print quality may result.
Do not touch the surface (green portion) of the drum cartridge.
Doing so will damage the surface of the cartridge, causing poor print
• subject to extreme temperature or humidity changes, e.g., near an quality.
air conditioner or heater.

3. Checking packed components and


accessories
Open the carton and check if the following components and accesso-
ries are included.

The copier should be installed near an accessible power outlet for easy • Operation manual
connection. • Operation manual
(For Facsimile)
Be sure to connect the power cord only to a power outlet that meets (AL-1566)
the specified voltage and current requirements.
Also make certain the outlet is properly grounded. AC cord
Be sure to allow the required space around the machine for servicing Software CD-ROM
and proper ventilation.

8" (20cm) 8"(20cm)


Telephone line cord Drum cartridge
(AL-1566) (installed in machine)
4" 4"
(10cm) (10cm)

TD cartridge

AL-1556/1566 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 1


4. Unpacking 2) Remove the CAUTION tape from the front cover and remove the
two protective pins from the fusing machine by pulling the strings
Be sure to hold the handles on both sides of the machine to unpack the upward one at a time.
machine and carry it to the installation location.

Protective pins
CAUTION tape

3) Press gently on both sides of the front cover to open the cover.

5. Removing protective packing materials


1) Remove all pieces of tape shown in the illustration below and then
open the RSPF and remove the protective materials. Take out the
bag containing the TD cartridge.

4) Remove the TD cartridge from the bag. Remove the protective


paper. Hold the cartridge on both sides and shake it horizontally
four or five times. Hold the tab of the protective cover and pull the
tab to your side to remove the cover.

4 or 5 times

2) Release the scan head locking switch.

Grasp here and turn in


the direction of the arrow.
5) While pushing the lock release button, gently insert the TD car-
tridge until it locks into place.

Lock release button

Lock Unlock

6. Installing the TD cartridge


1) Open the bypass tray, and then open the side cover. 6) Close the front cover and then the side cover by pressing the round
projections near the side cover open button.
Note: When closing the covers, be sure to close the front cover
securely and then close the side cover. If the covers are closed
in the wrong order, the covers may be damaged.

7) Ensure that the power switch of the machine is in the OFF position.
Plug the other end of the power cord into the nearest outlet.

AL-1556/1566 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 2


7. Loading the paper tray
Note: Make sure that the paper is not torn, is free of dust, and has no
wrinkles or curled edges.
1) Raise the handle of the paper tray and pull the paper tray out until it
stops.

6) Gently push the paper tray back into the machine.


Note:
• If you loaded a different size of paper than was loaded previously in
the tray.
2) Remove the pressure plate lock. Rotate the pressure plate lock in
the direction of the arrow to remove it while pressing down on the • When not using the machine for an extended period, remove all
pressure plate of the paper tray. paper from the paper tray and store it in a dry place. If paper is left in
the machine for an extended period, the paper will absorb moisture
from the air, resulting in paper jams.

3) Store the pressure plate lock which has been removed in step 2. To
store the pressure plate lock, rotate the lock to secure it as shown 8. Power to copier
below. 1) Ensure that the power switch of the copier is in the OFF position.
Pressure plate lock Insert the attached power cord into the power cord socket at the
rear of the copier.
2) Plug the other end of the power cord into the nearest outlet.

9. Software for AL-1556/1566


The CD-ROM that accompanies the machine contains the following
software:
4) Squeeze the lock lever of the front guide and slide the front guide to MFP driver
match the width of the paper, and move the left guide to the appro- Printer driver
priate slot as marked on the tray.
The printer driver enables you to use the printer function of the
machine.
The printer driver includes the Print Status Window. This is a utility that
monitors the machine and informs you of the printing status, the name
of the document currently being printed, and error messages.
Please note that the Print Status Window does not operate when the
machine is used as a network printer.
Left Front Scanner driver (USB only)
guide guide
The scanner driver allows you to use the scanning function of the
machine with TWAIN-compliant and WIA-compliant applications.
• The front guide is a slide-type guide. Grasp the locking knob on
the guide and slide the guide to the indicator line of the paper to Sharpdesk (USB only)
be loaded. Sharpdesk is an integrated software environment that makes it easy to
• The left guide is an insert-type guide. Remove it and then insert it manage documents and image files, and launch applications.
at the indicator line of the paper to be loaded. Button Manager (USB only)
5) Fan the paper and insert it into the tray. Make sure that the edges
Button Manager allows you to use the scanner menus on the machine
go under the corner hooks. to scan a document.
Note: Note: The scanning feature can only be used with computers that are
• Do not load paper above the maximum height line ( ). running Windows 98/Me/2000/XP and are connected to the
Exceeding the line will cause a paper misfeed. machine by a USB cable. If you are running Windows 95/NT 4.0
• If the paper is not fanned, double-feeds or misfeeds may occur. or are connected to the machine by a LAN connection, only the
• Make sure the stack of paper is straight before loading it. When add- printer function can be used.
ing paper, take the remaining paper out and combine it into a single
stack with the new paper.
• Make sure that all the paper in the stack is the same size and type.
• When loading paper, ensure that there is no space between the
paper and the guide, and make sure that the guide is not set too nar-
row and causes the paper to bend. Incorrect loading will cause the
paper to skew or misfeed.

AL-1556/1566 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 3


A. Before installation • If an error message appears, follow the instructions on the screen to
solve the problem. After the problem is solved, the installation proce-
(1) Hardware and software requirements dure will continue. Depending on the problem, you may have to click
Check the following hardware and software requirements in order to the "Cancel" button to exit the installer. In this case, reinstall the soft-
install the software. ware from the beginning after solving the problem.
Computer type IBM PC/AT or compatible computer equipped with a • When installing Sharpdesk, a minimal version of Internet Explorer
USB2.0*1/1.1*2 or 10Base-T LAN port 5.01 will be installed on your computer if your computer does not
Operating Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows currently have Internet Explorer version 4.01 or later.
system*3 *4 NT Workstation 4.0 (ServicePack 5 or later)*5, (1) Using the machine with a USB connection
Windows 2000 Professional*5, Windows XP
1) The USB cable must not be connected to the machine. Make sure
Professional*5, Windows XP Home Edition*5
that the cable is not connected before proceeding.
Display 800 x 600 dots (SVGA) display with 256 colors (or
If the cable is connected, a Plug and Play window will appear. If this
better)
happens, click the "Cancel" button to close the window and discon-
Hard disk free 150MB or more nect the cable.
space
Note: The cable will be connected in step 15.
Other hardware An environment on which any of the operating
2) Insert the CD-ROM into your computer's CD-ROM drive.
requirements systems listed above can fully operate
3) Click the "start" button, click "My Computer", and then double-click
*1 The machine's USB port will transfer data at the speed specified by the CD-ROM icon.
the USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed) only if the Microsoft USB 2.0 driver is prein- In Windows 98/Me/2000, double-click "My Computer", and then
stalled in the computer, or if the USB 2.0 driver for Windows 2000 double-click the CD-ROM icon.
Professional/XP that Microsoft provides through its "Windows
4) Double-click the "setup" icon.
Update" is installed.
Note: If the language selection screen appears after you double click
*2 Compatible with Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000 Profes-
the "setup" icon, select the language that you wish to use and
sional, Windows XP Professional or Windows XP Home Edition
click the "Next" button. (Normally the correct language is
preinstalled model standardly equipped with a USB port.
selected automatically.)
*3 Printing is not available in MS-DOS mode.
5) The "SOFTWARE LICENCE" window will appear. Make sure that
*4 The machine does not support printing from a Macintosh environ- you understand the contents of the software licence, and then click
ment. the "Yes" button.
*5 Administrator's rights are required to install the software using the 6) Read the "Readme First" in the "Welcome" window and then click
installer. the "Next" button.
(2) Installation environment and usable software 7) To install all of the software, click the "Standard" button.
The following table shows the drivers and software that can be To install particular packages, click the "Custom" button.
installed for each version of Windows and port connection method. If you selected "Custom", go to step 9.
MFP Driver
Button
Cable Operating system Printer Scanner Sharpdesk
Manager
driver driver
USB Windows 98/Me/
Available
*1 2000/XP Available
Windows 95/98/Me/ *2
LAN Not Available
NT 4.0/2000/XP
*1 Windows 98/Me does not support USB 2.0. A USB 2.0 connection
can be used in Windows 98/Me, however, the performance will be
the same as USB 1.1. The print speed based on USB 2.0 specifica-
tions can only be attained if your computer is running Windows
2000/XP, you are using a cable that supports USB 2.0 (USB 1.1 or
USB 2.0 certified), and the cable is connected to a USB 2.0 port on
your computer. If the connection is made through a hub, the hub
must support USB 2.0.
*2 The printer driver that is installed will vary depending on the type of
connection between the machine and your computer.

B. Installing the software


Note: 8) Read the message in the "Welcome" window and then click the
"Next" button.
• If you need to use a different connection method after installing the
software using a USB or network connection, you must first uninstall If you selected "Standard" in step 7, installation will begin.
the software and then install it using the new connection method. Go to step 14.
• In the following explanations it is assumed that the mouse is config- 9) If you clicked the "Custom" button, select the checkboxes of the
ured for right hand operation. software packages to be installed and then click the "Next" button.
• The scanner feature only works when using a USB cable. Click the "Display README" button to show information on pack-
ages that are selected.

AL-1556/1566 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 4


14) When the "Finish" screen appears, click the "Close" button.
Caution: If you are running Windows 2000/XP and a warning message
appears regarding the Windows logo test or digital signature,
be sure to click "Continue Anyway" or "Yes".
A message will appear instructing you to connect the machine to
your computer. Click the OK button.
Note:
• If this is a "Standard" installation, the "Finish" screen will appear
after several minutes.
• After the installation, a message prompting you to restart your com-
puter may appear. In this case, click the "Yes" button to restart your
computer.
15) Make sure that the power of the machine is turned on, and then
connect the USB cable.
Windows will detect the machine and a Plug and Play screen will
appear.
Caution: If the following message appears on your computer screen,
close it.
10) Check the packages on the screen, and then click the "Start" but-
ton.
The software packages to be installed will be displayed on the
screen. If an incorrect package is displayed, click the "Back" but-
ton and select the correct packages.
11) The files required for installation of the MFP driver are copied (if
"MFP Driver" was selected). A window regarding "HI-SPEED USB Device" will then
appear. Close the window.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
This message appears when the machine's USB 2.0 mode is
Caution: If you are running Windows 2000/XP and a warning message
not set to "HI-SPEED". For information on switching the USB
appears regarding the Windows logo test or digital signature,
2.0 mode.
be sure to click "Continue Anyway" or "Yes".
16) Begin installation of the scanner driver.
When "The installation of the SHARP software is complete"
appears, click the "OK" button. "SHARP AL-XXXX" will appear in the "Found New Hardware Wiz-
ard" dialog box. Select "Install the software automatically (Recom-
12) Begin the installation of Button Manager (if "Button Manager" was
mended)" and click the "Next" button. Follow the on-screen
selected).
instructions.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
Caution: If you are running Windows 2000/XP and a warning message
Click the "Finish" button when the message informs you that setup appears regarding the Windows logo test or digital signature,
is successful. be sure to click "Continue Anyway" or "Yes".
The Sharpdesk installer will start. Note: A "USB 2.0 Composite Device" installation window may appear
13) Begin the installation of Sharpdesk (if "Sharpdesk" was selected). prior to this procedure. In this case, follow the instructions in the
Follow the on-screen instructions. window to install the USB 2.0 Composite Device.
Click the "Finish" button when the message informs you that 17) Begin installation of the printer driver.
Setup is complete. "SHARP AL-XXXX" will appear in the "Found New Hardware Wiz-
Caution: In Windows 98/Me/2000, if the following screen appears, ard" dialog box. Select "Install the software automatically (Recom-
click the "Skip" button or the "Continue" button as appropriate mended)" and click the "Next" button. Follow the on-screen
to continue the Sharpdesk installation. instructions.
Caution: If you are running Windows 2000/XP and a warning message
appears regarding the Windows logo test or digital signature,
be sure to click "Continue Anyway" or "Yes".
18) Follow the instructions in the Plug and Play screen that appears in
your version of Windows to begin the installation.
This completes the installation of the software.
• If you installed Button Manager, set up Button Manager as explained
in "SETTING UP BUTTON MANAGER".
(2) Connecting a USB cable
Follow the procedure below to connect the machine to your computer.
A USB cable for connecting the machine to your computer is not
If "Skip" is selected, the Sharpdesk installation will continue included with the machine. Please purchase the appropriate cable for
without installing Sharpdesk Imaging. your computer.
If "Continue" is selected, Sharpdesk Imaging will be installed. Caution:
If Imaging for Windows is installed on your computer, Sharp- • USB is available with a PC/AT compatible computer that was origi-
desk nally equipped with USB and had Windows 98, Windows Me, Win-
Imaging will overwrite Imaging for Windows. dows 2000 Professional, Windows XP Professional or Windows XP
Home Edition preinstalled.
• Do not connect the USB cable before installing the MFP driver. The
USB cable should be connected during installation of the MFP
driver.

AL-1556/1566 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 5


Note: 6) The "SOFTWARE LICENCE" window will appear. Make sure that
• If the machine will be connected using a USB 2.0 port of your com- you understand the contents of the software licence, and then click
puter, please purchase a USB cable that supports USB 2.0. the "Yes" button.
• The machine's USB port will transfer data at the speed specified by 7) Read the "Readme First" in the "Welcome" window and then click
the USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed) only if the Microsoft USB 2.0 driver is prein- the "Next" button.
stalled in the computer, or if the USB 2.0 driver for Windows 2000 Note: To set the IP address of the machine, follow the steps below. If
Professional/XP that Microsoft provides through its "Windows the machine is already connected to the network and its IP
Update" Web page is installed. address has been set, go to "LPR (TCP/IP) direct printing".
• To obtain the fastest USB 2.0 data transfer speed, "USB2.0 MODE Set the IP Address
SWITCH" in the machine's user programs must be set to "HI- This setting is only required once when using the machine on a net-
SPEED". For more information, see "USER PROGRAMS". work.
• Use the machine's "HI-SPEED" mode only when using a computer 8) Click the "Set the IP Address" button.
that is running Windows 2000/XP.
• Even when the Microsoft USB 2.0 driver is used, it may not be possi-
ble to obtain full USB 2.0 speed if a PC card supporting USB 2.0 is
used. To obtain the latest driver (which may enable a higher speed),
contact the manufacturer of your PC card.
• Connection is also possible using a USB 1.1 port on your computer.
However, the specifications will be USB 1.1 specifications (Full-
Speed).
1) Insert the cable into the USB port on the machine.

2) Insert the other end of the cable into your computer's USB port.
(3) Using the machine as a network printer 9) The printer or printers connected to the network will be detected.
Note: Click the printer to be configured (the machine) and click the "Next"
• Interface cables for connecting the machine to your computer are button.
not included with the machine. Please purchase the appropriate
cable for your computer.
• If you intend to use the machine as a scanner, it must be connected
to your computer with a USB interface cable. The scanner function
cannot be used if the machine is connected with a LAN cable.
• To install the software using a network connection in Windows 95,
Internet Explorer version 4.01 or later must be installed on your com-
puter. If this is not installed, double-click "My Computer" and then
double-click the CD-ROM icon. Double-click the "le501" folder, the
"EN" folder, and then "ie5setup.exe".
1) Insert the LAN cable into the LAN port on the machine.
Use a network cable that is shielded.

Note:
• The "Ethernet Address" is indicated on the left side of the machine
near the LAN port.
• If the machine is used on a different network after the IP address is
set, the machine will not be recognized. Enter the Ethernet Address
2) Turn on the machine. and click the "Initialize" button to initialize the IP address. Follow the
3) Insert the CD-ROM into your computer's CD-ROM drive. on-screen instructions to click the "OK" button and then the "Search"
4) Click the "start" button, click "My Computer", and then double-click button.
the CD-ROM icon.
In Windows 95/98/Me/NT 4.0/2000, double-click "My Computer",
and then double-click the CD-ROM icon.
5) Double-click the "setup" icon.
Note: If the language selection screen appears after you double click
the "setup" icon, select the language that you wish to use and
click the "Next" button. (Normally the correct language is
selected automatically.)

AL-1556/1566 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 6


10) Enter the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway. 10) Select "LPR (TCP/IP) direct printing" and click the "Next" button.
The settings in the above window are examples.
Be sure to ask your network administrator for the correct IP
address, subnet mask, and default gateway to be entered.

11) The printer or printers connected to the network will be detected.


Click the printer to be configured (the machine) and click the
"Next" button.

Note: When "Get IP Address Automatically" is selected, the IP


address may at times change automatically. This will prevent
printing. In this event, select "Assign IP Address" and enter the
IP address.
11) Click the "Next" button.
12) Click the "Yes" button.
Go to step 11.

Note: If the machine's IP address cannot be found, make sure the


machine is powered on, make sure the network cable is
connected correctly, and then click the "Search" button.
12) In the window for setting the destination print port name, make
sure that ":lp" appears at the end of the IP address and click the
"Next" button.

LPR (TCP/IP) direct printing


After step 1-7.
8) Click the "Printer Driver" button.
If you have not set the IP Address, click the "Set the IP Address"
button in first and go to step 8 on "Connecting a USB cable".

Note: Any name can be entered in "Printer Port Name" (maximum of


38 characters).
13) A window appears to let you check your entries. Make sure that
the entries are correct and then click the "Finish" button.
If any of the entries are incorrect, click the "Back" button to return
to the appropriate window and correct the entry.

9) Read the message in the "Welcome" window and then click the
"Next" button.

AL-1556/1566 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 7


14) When the model selection window appears, select the model 7) Select "Shared Printer" and click the "Next" button.
name of your machine and click the "Next" button.
For the model name of your machine, see the operation panel on
the machine.
Note: A Welcome window may appear before this step. Read the
message in the "Welcome" window and then click the "Next"
button.
15) Select whether or not you wish the printer to be your default
printer and click the "Next" button.
Caution: If you are running Windows 2000/XP and a warning message
appears regarding the Windows logo test or digital signature,
be sure to click "Continue Anyway" or "Yes".
16) When "This installation of the SHARP software is complete"
appears, click the "OK" button.
17) When the "Finish" screen appears, click the "Close" button. 8) For the port to be used, select the machine set as a shared printer,
and click the "Next" button.
Note: After the installation, a message prompting you to restart your
computer may appear. In this case, click the "Yes" button to You can also click the "Add Network Port" button and select the
restart your computer. printer to be shared (the machine) by browsing the network in the
window that appears.
This completes the installation of the software.
(4) Sharing the printer using windows networking
If the machine will be used as a shared printer on a network, follow
these steps to install the printer driver in the client computer.
Note: To configure the appropriate settings in the print server, see the
operation manual or help file of your operating system.
1) Insert the CD-ROM into your computer's CD-ROM drive.
2) Click the "start" button, click "My Computer", and then double-click
the CD-ROM icon.
In Windows 95/98/Me/NT 4.0/2000, double-click "My Computer",
and then double-click the CD-ROM icon.
3) Double-click the "setup" icon.
Note: If the language selection screen appears after you double click
the "setup" icon, select the language that you wish to use and
Note: If the shared printer does not appear in the list, check the
click the "Next" button. (Normally the correct language is
settings in the printer server.
selected automatically.)
9) When the model selection window appears, select model name of
4) The "SOFTWARE LICENCE" window will appear. Make sure that
your machine and click the "Next" button.
you understand the contents of the software licence, and then click
the "Yes" button. For the model name of your machine, see the operation panel on
the machine.
5) Click the "Printer Driver" button.
10) Follow the on-screen instructions.
11) When the "Finish" screen appears, click the "Close" button.
Note: After the installation, a message prompting you to restart your
computer may appear. In this case, click the "Yes" button to
restart your computer.
This completes the installation of the software.

C. Setting up button manager


Button Manager is a software program that works with the scanner
driver to enable scanning from the machine.
To scan using the machine, Button Manager must be linked with the
scan menu on the machine. Follow the steps below to link Button Man-
ager to scanner events.
(1) Windows XP
1) Click the "start" button, click "Control Panel", click "Printers and
Other Hardware", and then click "Scanners and Cameras".
2) Click the "SHARP AL-XXXX" icon and select "Properties" from the
"File" menu.
6) Read the message in the "Welcome" window and then click the 3) In the "Properties" screen, click the "Events" tab.
"Next" button.

AL-1556/1566 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 8


4) Select "SC1:" from the "Select an event" pull-down menu. 4) In the "Properties" screen, click the "Events" tab.
5) Select "SC1:" from the "Scanner events" pull-down menu.

5) Select "Start this program" and then select "Sharp Button Manager
B" from the pull-down menu. 6) Select "Sharp Button Manager B" in "Send to this application".

6) Click the "Apply" button. Note: If other applications are shown, deselect the checkboxes for the
7) Repeat Steps 4 through 6 to link Button Manager to "SC2:" through other applications and leave only the Button Manager checkbox
"SC6:". selected.
Select "SC2:" from the "Select an event" pull-down menu. Select 7) Click the "Apply" button.
"Start this program", select "Sharp Button Manager B" from the pull- 8) Repeat Steps 5 through 7 to link Button Manager to "SC2:" through
down menu, and then click the "Apply" button. Do the same for "SC6:".
each ScanMenu through "SC6:". Select "SC2:" from the "Scanner events" pull-down menu. Select
When the settings have been completed, click the "OK" button to "Sharp Button Manager B" in "Send to this application" and click the
close the screen. "Apply" button. Do the same for each ScanMenu through "SC6:".
Button Manager is now linked to the scan menu (1 through 6). When the settings have been completed, click the "OK" button to
The scan settings for each of scan menu 1 through 6 can be changed close the screen.
with the setting window of Button Manager. Button Manager is now linked to the scan menu (1 through 6).
For the factory default settings of the scan menu. For the procedures The scan settings for each of scan menus 1 through 6 can be changed
for configuring Button Manager settings, see "Button Manager Set- with the setting window of Button Manager.
tings" in the Online Manual. For the factory default settings of the scan menu. For the procedures
(2) Windows 98/Me/2000 for configuring Button Manager settings, see "Button Manager Set-
tings" in the Online Manual.
1) click the "Start" button, select "Settings", and then click "Control
Panel".
2) Double-click the "Scanners and Cameras" icon.
Note: If the "Scanners and Cameras" icon does not appear in
Windows Me, click "view all Control Panel options".
3) Select "SHARP AL-XXXX" and click the "Properties" button.
In Windows Me, right click "SHARP AL-XXXX" and click "Proper-
ties" in the pop-up menu.

AL-1556/1566 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 9


10. Interface 11. Moving
A. USB Moving instructions
Connector When moving the unit, follow the procedure below.

4-pin ACON UBR23-4K2200 Note: When moving this unit, be sure to remove the TD cartridge in
advance.
Type-B connector
1) Turn the power switch off and remove the power cord from the out-
Cable let.
Shielded twisted pair cable 2) Open the side cover and front cover, in that order. Remove the TD
(2 m (6 feet) Max.: high-speed transmission equivalent) cartridge and close the front cover and side cover, in that order.
Pin configuration To open and close the side cover and front cover, and to remove
the TD cartridge.
The pin numbers and signal names are listed in the following table.
3) Raise the handle of the paper tray and pull the paper tray out until it
Pin No. Signal name stops.
1 +5V
4) Push the center of the pressure plate down until it locks in place
2 -DATA and lock the plate using the pressure plate lock which has been
3 +DATA stored in the front of the paper tray.
4 GND 5) Push the paper tray back into the unit.
6) Lock the scan head locking switch.
2 1 Note: When shipping the unit, the scan head locking switch must be
locked to prevent shipping damage.
7) Close the multi-bypass tray and the paper output tray extension,
and attach the packing materials and tape which were removed
during installation of the unit.
8) Pack the unit into the carton.

3 4

B. RJ45
RJ-45 connector pin arrangement
1 8

Pin No. Signal name LAN adapter RJ-45 connector


1 TD+ Send output +
2 TD– Send output -
3 RD+ Receive input +
6 RD– Receive input -
4, 5, 7, 8 Not used. Not used.

AL-1556/1566 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 10


[6] COPY PROCESS
An OPC drum is used for the photoconductor.
(Structure of the OPC drum layers)
OPC layer
(20 microns thick)
Pigment layer (0.2
to 0.3 microns thick)
Aluminum drum

1. Functional diagram
Main charger

Laser beam Cleaning blade

MG roller Drum

Transfer unit

Resist roller

(Basic operation cycle)

Semiconductor laser

Focus correction lens

Main high voltage unit


Exposure

Saw tooth Charge

Toner

Drum Developing
Developer
Cleaning
Cleaning blade

Waste toner box PS roller

To face Synchronization
Paper release Fusing Separation Transfer with drum
Manual feed
down tray

Heat roller Electrode Transfer charger Cassette


paper feed

Heater lamp Transfer high


voltage unit
Print process

Paper transport route

AL-1556/1566 COPY PROCESS 6 - 1


2. Outline of print process Step-2: Exposure (laser beam, lens)
A Laser beam is generated from the semiconductor laser and
This printer is a non-impact printer that uses a semiconductor laser
controlled by the print pattern signal. The laser writes onto the OPC
and electrostatic print process. This printer uses an OPC (Organic
drum surface through the polygon mirrors and lens. The resistance of
Photo Conductor) for its photoconductive material.
the OPC layer decreases for an area exposed by the laser beam
First, voltage from the main corona unit charges the drum surface and
(corresponding to the print pattern signal). The beam neutralizes the
a latent image is formed on the drum surface using a laser beam. This
negative charge. An electrostatic latent image is formed on the drum
latent image forms a visible image on the drum surface when toner is
surface.
applied. The toner image is then transferred onto the print paper by the
transfer corona and fused on the print paper in the fusing section with Semiconductor laser
a combination of heat and pressure.

Step-1: Charge
Step-2: Exposure
* Latent image is formed on the drum.
Step-3: Developing
Latent image formed on the drum is then changed into visible
image with toner.
Step-4: Transfer Exposure
(semiconductor laser)
The visible image (toner image) on the drum is transferred
onto the print paper. OPC layer
Step-5: Cleaning Pigment
layer
Residual toner on the drum surface is removed and collected
Aluminum
by the cleaning blade.
drum
Step-6: Optical discharge
Residual charge on the drum surface is removed, by
semiconductor laser beam.
Drum surface charge
3. Actual print process after the exposure
OPC layer
Step-1: DC charge
Pigment
A uniform negative charge is applied over the OPC drum surface by layer
the main charging unit. Stable potential is maintained by means of the Aluminum
layer
Scorotron charger. Non-image area Image area
Positive charges are generated in the aluminum layer.

About
DC5.5KV

( 580V/ 400V)

AL-1556/1566 COPY PROCESS 6 - 2


Step-3: Developing (DC bias) Step-4: Transfer
A bias potential is applied to the MG roller in the two component The visible image on the drum surface is transferred onto the print
magnetic brush developing method, and the toner is charged negative paper by applying a positive charge from the transfer corona to the
through friction with the carrier. backside of the print paper.
Non-image area of the drum surface charged with negative potential
repel the toner, whereas the laser exposed portions where no negative
charges exist, attract the toner. As a result, a visible image appears on
the drum surface.

:Carrier (Magnetized particle)


:Toner (Charge negative by friction)
(N) (S) Permanent magnet
(provided in three locations)

About DC 5.2kV

MG roller Step-5: Separation


DC
400V 8V Since the print paper is charged positively by the transfer corona, it is
discharged by the separation corona. The separation corona is
connected to ground.

Step-6: Cleaning
Toner remaining on the drum is removed and collected by the cleaning
blade. It is transported to the waste toner collecting section in the
cleaning unit by the waste toner transport roller.

Toner is attracted over the shadowed area because of the developing


bias.

AL-1556/1566 COPY PROCESS 6 - 3


Step-7: Optical discharge (Semiconductor laser) Start
Before the drum rotation is stopped, the semiconductor laser is 1) Because the grid potential is at a low level, the drum potential is at
radiated onto the drum to reduce the electrical resistance in the OPC about -400V. (Carrier may not be attracted though the carrier is
layer and eliminate residual charge, providing a uniform state to the pulled towards the drum by the electrostatic force of -400V.
drum surface for the next page to be printed. 2) Developing bias (-400V) is applied when the photoconductor
When the electrical resistance is reduced, positive charges on the potential is switched from LOW to HIGH.
aluminum layer are moved and neutralized with negative charges on 3) Once developing bias (-400V) is applied and the photo conductor
the OPC layer. potential rises to HIGH, toner will not be attracted to the drum.
Semiconductor laser
Stop
The reverse sequence takes place.
Retaining developing bias at an abnormal occurrence

Function
The developing bias will be lost if the power supply was removed
during print process. In this event, the drum potential slightly abates
and the carrier makes deposits on the drum because of strong static
Charge by the Scorotron charger power. To prevent this, the machine incorporates a function to retain
the developing bias for a certain period and decrease the voltage
gradually against possible power loss.
Function
The Scorotron charger functions to maintain uniform surface potential Basic function
on the drum at all times, It control the surface potential regardless of
Normally, the developing bias voltage is retained for a certain time
the charge characteristics of the photoconductor.
before the drum comes to a complete stop if the machine should stop
before completing the normal print cycle. The developing bias can be
Basic function
added before resuming the operation after an abnormal interruption.
A screen grid is placed between the saw tooth and the Therefore, carrier will not make a deposit on the drum surface.
photoconductor. A stable voltage is added to the screen grid to
maintain the corona current on the photoconductor.
As the photoconductor is charged by the saw tooth from the main
corona unit, the surface potential increases. This increases the current
flowing through the screen grid. When the photoconductor potential
nears the grid potential, the current turns to flow to the grid so that the
photoconductor potential can be maintained at a stable level.

Process controlling

Function
The print pattern signal is converted into an invisible image by the
semiconductor laser using negative to positive (reversible) developing
method. Therefore, if the developing bias is added before the drum is
charged, toner is attracted onto the drum. If the developing bias is not
added when the drum is charged, the carrier is attracted to the drum
because of the strong electrostatic force of the drum.
To avoid this, the process is controlled by adjusting the drum potential
and the grid potential of the Scorotron charger.

Basic function
Voltage added to the screen grid can be selected, high and low. To
make it easily understood, the figure below shows voltage transition at
the developer unit.
START STOP
0
Print potential

Toner attract
potential Developing bias
2)

3)

1) Low

Drum potential
4) High
Time

AL-1556/1566 COPY PROCESS 6 - 4


[7] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS
1. Outline of operation
The outline of operation is described referring to the basic configuration.
(Basic configuration)

Scanner section

Operation
CCD
section

MCU (Main control/image process section) Printer/ PC


Scanner I/F
USB or Network

Note: The scanner function is effective


only by USB connection.
Network is for print only.
LSU (Laser unit)
Laser diode, Polygon mirror lens

Laser beam
Paper exit
Fusing section
Process section
Printer section

Paper transport section

Cassette paper Manual paper


feed section feed section

(Outline of copy operation) Printing


Setting conditions 7) Electrostatic latent images are formed on the OPC drum according
1) Set copy conditions such as the copy quantity and the copy density to the laser beams, and the latent images are developed to be visi-
with the operation section, and press the COPY button. The infor- ble images(toner images).
mation on copy conditions is sent to the MCU. 8) Meanwhile the paper is fed to the image transfer section in syn-
Image scanning chronization with the image lead edge.

2) When the COPY button is pressed, the scanner section starts 9) After the transfer of toner images onto the paper, the toner images
are fused to the paper by the fusing section. The copied paper is
scanning of images.
The light from the copy lamp is reflected by the document and discharged onto the exit tray.
passed through the lens to the CCD. (Outline of printer operation)
Photo signal/Electric signal conversion The print data sent from the PC are passed through the I/F and the
3) The image is converted into electrical signals by the CCD circuit MCU to the LSU. The procedures after that are the same as above 5)
and passed to the MCU. and later.
Image process (Outline of scanner operation)
4) The document image signal sent from the CCD circuit is processed The scan data are passed through the MCU and the I/F to the PC
under the revised conditions and sent to the LSU (laser unit) as according to the conditions requested by the PC or set by the opera-
print data. tions with the operation panel.
Electric signal/Photo signal (laser beam) conversion
5) The LSU emits laser beams according to the print data.
(Electrical signals are converted into photo signals.)
6) The laser beams are radiated through the polygon mirror and vari-
ous lenses to the OPC drum.

AL-1556/1566 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 7 - 1


2. Scanner section
A. Scanner unit
The scanner unit in the digital copier scans images.
It is composed of the optical unit and the drive unit. The optical unit
performs scanning in the main scan direction with the light receiving
elements (color CCD). The drive unit performs scanning in the sub
scanning direction by moving the optical unit.

B. Optical system
Two white lamps are used as the light source.
Light radiated from the light source is applied to the document on the
document table. The reflected light from the document is reflected 5
times by No. 1 - No. 3 mirrors and passed through the reduction lens to
form images on the light-receiving surface of 3-line CCD.
The light-receiving surface of the color CCD is provided with 3 line
scanning sections for RGB. Separate images scanned in each color
section are overlapped to complete color scanning. (When PC scan-
(Spectrum characteristics of the color CCD)
ning)
The resolution is 600dpi.
1 10 8
When copying, only the green component is used to print with the 8
9
printer. 9
The color component for printing can be switched to red or blue by the
service test command.

MBVM26W25W260NLH/G 6
6.00E-01

5.00E-01 Lamp : MBVM26W25W260NLH/G


Lamp current : 5mA 7
Intensity of UV

Temp. : 25 degree
4.00E-01
2
3.00E-01 3
5 4
2.00E-01
(Optical unit)
1.00E-01
1 Table glass 2 Optical unit 3 Lens
0.00E+00
0 200 400 600 800
4 Mirror 1 5 Mirror 2 6 Mirror 3
Wave length (nm) 7 CCD PWB 8 Lamp 9 Reflector

(Spectrum characteristics of the lamp)

C. Drive system
The drive system is composed of the scanner motor, the pulley gear,
the idle pulley, the idle gear, the belt 473, the belt 190, and the shaft.
The motor rotation is converted into reciprocated movements of the
belt 473 through the idle gear, the pulley gear, the belt 190, and the
idle pulley to drive the optical unit.

7 1

3 4 6 2 8 5 3

1 Scanner motor 2 Pulley gear 3 Idle pulley


4 Belt 473 5 Belt 190 6 Optical unit
7 Shaft 8 Idle gear 9

AL-1556/1566 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 7 - 2


3. Laser unit B. Laser beam path
The image data sent from the MCU (image process circuit) is sent to
the LSU (laser unit), where it is converted into laser beams.

A. Basic structure
The LSU unit is the writing section of the digital optical system.
The semiconductor laser is used as the light source, and images are
formed on the OPC drum by the polygon mirror and fθ lens, etc.
The laser beams are passed through the collimator lens, the cylindrical
lens, the polygon mirror, the fθ lens, and the mirror to form images on
the OPC drum in the main scanning direction. The laser emitting PWB
is provided with the APC (auto power control) in order to eliminate fluc-
tuations in the laser power. The BD PWB works for measurement of
the laser writing start point.

4 3 2 1

C. Composition
Effective scanning width: 216mm (max.)
Resolution: 600dpi
Beam diameter: 75um in the main scanning direction, 80um in the sub
scanning direction
Image surface power: 0.15 ±0.01mW (Laser wavelength 770 - 795nm)
6 5 Polygon motor section: Brushless motor 31,180rpm
No. of mirror surfaces: 4 surfaces

No Component Function
1 Semiconductor laser Generates laser beams.
4. Fuser section
2 Collimator lens Converges laser beams in parallel.
3 CY lens Converges laser beams onto the
polygon mirror surface.
4 Polygon mirror, Reflects laser beams at a constant
polygon motor rpm.
(A four-surfaces polygon mirror is
used.)
5 BD (Mirror, lens, Detects start timing of laser scanning.
PWB)
6 fθ lens Converges laser beams at a spot on
the drum.
Makes the laser scanning speeds at
both ends of the drum same as each
other. (Refer to the figure below.)
Makes the laser scanning speeds at both ends of the drum same as
each other.

a≠b≠c d=e=f
a b c d e f

f θ LENS

AL-1556/1566 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 7 - 3


A. General description 2) The surface temperature of the upper heat roller is set to 165 -
General block diagram (cross section) 190°C. The surface temperature during the power save mode is
set to 100°C.
Thermal fuse Separator pawl 3) The self-check function comes active when one of the following
malfunctions occurs, and an "H" is displayed on the multicopy
PPD2 window.
a. When the heat roller surface temperature rises above 240°C.
b. When the heat roller surface temperature drops below 100°C during
the copy cycle.
c. Open thermistor
d. Open thermal fuse
e. When the heat roller temperature does not reach 190°C within 27
second after supplying the power.
Thermistor
Pressure roller (4) Fusing resistor
Fusing resistor
Heat roller
This model is provided with a fusing resistor in the fusing section to
improve transfer efficiency.
Paper guide Since the upper heat roller is conductive, when using copy paper that
contains moisture and the distance between the transfer unit and the
Top view fusing unit is short, the transfer current may find a path to ground via
the copy paper, the upper heat roller and the discharging brush.
Thermal fuse
Thermistor
Heat roller Heater lamp 5. Paper feed section and paper transport
section
A. Paper transport path and general operations
4 3 5 2

Separator pawl
1
(1) Heat roller
A Teflon roller is used for the heat roller and a silicone rubber roller is 6
used for the lower heat roller for better toner fusing performance and
paper separation. 7
8
(2) Separator pawl 9
Three separator pawls are used on the upper heat roller. The separa- 10
tor pawls are Teflon coated to reduce friction with the roller and prevent
a smear on the paper caused by the separator pawl.
14 13 12 11
(3) Thermal control
1) The heater lamp, thermistor, main PWB, DC power supply PWB, 1 Scanner unit 8 Drum
and triac within the power supply unit are used to control the 2 Copy lamp 9 Transfer unit
temperature in the fuser unit. 3 LSU (Laser unit) 10 Pickup roller
To prevent against abnormally high temperature in the fuser unit, a
4 Paper exit roller 11 Manual paper feed tray
thermal breaker and thermal fuse are used for safety purposes.
5 Main charger 12 Manual paper feed roller
6 Heat roller 13 PS roller unit
7 Pressure roller 14 Paper feed roller
Heated by the heater
lamp. (950W) Paper feed is made in two ways; the tray paper feed and the manual
paper feed. The tray is of universal-type, and has the capacity of 250
sheets.
Safety device
(thermal breaker, thermal The surface temperature The front loading system allows you to install or remove the tray from
fuse) of the upper heat roller is the front cabinet.
sensed by the thermistor.
The general descriptions on the tray paper feed and the manual paper
feed operation are given below.

Level of the thermistor is


controlled by the main PWB.
Triac (in the
power supply unit)

With the signal from the


main PWB, the triac is
controlled on and off.
(power supply PWB)

AL-1556/1566 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 7 - 4


(1) Cassette paper feed operation 5) At this time, the paper is fed passed the paper entry detection
1) The figure below shows the positions of the pick-up roller, the switch (PPD1), and detected by it. After about 0.15 sec from
paper feed clutch sleeve, and the paper feed latch in the initial detection of paper by PPD1, the tray paper feed solenoid (PFS)
state without pressing the COPY button after lighting the ready turns on so that the clutch sleeve projection comes into contact
lamp. with the paper feed latch to stop the pick-up roller. Then the pick-
The paper feed latch is in contact with the projection of the clutch up roller rotates for about 0.15 sec so that the lead edge of the
sleeve. paper is evenly pressed on the resist roller, preventing against
skew feeding.

2) When the COPY button is pressed, the main drive motor starts
rotating to drive each drive gear.
PFS
The pick-up drive gear also is driven at that time. Since, however, RRS
the paper feed latch is in contact with the projection of the clutch
sleeve, rotation of the drive gear is not transmitted to the pick-up ON
roller, which does not rotate therefore. OFF

PFS
RRS
6) To release the resist roller, the tray paper feed solenoid and the
OFF resist solenoid are turned on by the paper start signal to disengage
OFF the resist start latch from the clutch sleeve, transmitting rotation of
the resist drive gear to the resist roller shaft. Thus the paper is
transported by the resist roller.
7) After the resist roller starts rotating, the paper is passed through
the pre-transfer guide to the transfer section. Images are
3) After about 0.1 sec from when the main motor start rotating, the transferred on the paper, which is separated from the OPC drum
tray paper feed solenoid (PFS) turns on for a moment. by the drum curve and the separation section.
This disengages the paper feed latch from the projection of the
clutch sleeve, transmitting rotation of the pick-up drive gear to the
paper feed roller shaft, rotating the pick-up roller to feed the paper.

PFS
RRS
OFF
PFS ON
RRS
OFF
OFF
8) The paper separated from the drum is passed through the fusing
paper guide, the heat roller (fusing section), POD (paper out
detector) to the copy tray.

4) After more than half rotation of the pick-up roller, the paper feed
latch is brought in contact with a notch on the clutch sleeve,
stopping rotation of the pick-up roller.

AL-1556/1566 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 7 - 5


(2) Manual multi paper feed operation 3) When pawl C of the manual paper feed clutch sleeve is engaged
1) Before paper feed operation, the manual paper feed solenoid with the manual feed latch, the manual feed stopper falls and the
(MPFS) is turned OFF as shown in the figure below. manual take-up roller rises. At that time, the manual paper feed
roller is rotating.

A
C A
C

OFF ON
MPFS MPFS
2) When the PRINT button is pressed, the manual paper feed
4) The lead edge of the transported paper is pressed on the resist
solenoid (MPFS) turns on to disengage the manual paper feed
roller by the transport roller. Then the paper is stopped temporarily
latch.
to allow synchronization with the lead edge of the image on the
A from the manual paper feed clutch sleeve A, rotating the manual
OPC drum.
paper feed roller and the manual take-up roller. At the same time,
From this point, the operation is the same as the paper feed
the manual paper feed stopper opens and the manual take-up
operation from the tray. (Refer to A-5 - 8.)
roller is pressed to the surface of the paper to start paper feeding.
5) The solenoid turns off to close the gate and return to the initial
state.

A
A
C

ON
MPFS OFF
MPFS

AL-1556/1566 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 7 - 6


(3) Conditions of occurrence of paper misfeed 2) When the detection gear 38T turns one rotation, there is no gear
a. When the power is turned on: any more and it stops.
The latch section of the 38T gear is latched and fixed with the
PPD or POD is ON when the power is turned on.
projection of the process cover.
b. Copy operation
a PPD1 jam PPD1 does not turn off within 4 sec after turning
Gear notch
on the resist roller.
b PPD2 jam PPD2 is off immediately after turning on the
resist roller.
PPD2 does not turn off within 1.2 sec after
turning off the resist roller.
c POD jam POD does not turn on within 2.9 sec after turning
on the resist roller.
POD does not turn off within 1.5 sec - 2.7 sec
after turning off PPD2.

6. Process unit new drum detection


mechanism
1) When the power is turned on, the detection gear 38T is rotated in Gear pawl
the arrow direction by the detection gear 20T to push the micro-
switch (process detection switch) installed to the machine sensor Projection
cover, making a judgement as a new drum.

Gear notch

Gear 20T

Gear 38T

Projection

Gear pawl

7. RSPF section
Process detection switch
A. Outline
The RSPF (Reverse Single Path Feeder) is installed to the AL-1556/
1566 as a standard provision, and it automatically copies up to 30
sheets of documents of a same size. (Only one set of copies)

B. Document transport path and basic composition


12 3 1 4 5 6 7

13 10 11 2 8 9

1 Pickup roller 2 Sheet of document for paper feed


3 Set detection ACT 4 Paper stopper
5 Document feed roller 6 Separation sheet
7 Paper entry sensor 8 PS roller D
9 Transport follower roller 10 Paper exit roller
11 Paper exit follower roller 12 Document tray
13 Switch gate

AL-1556/1566 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 7 - 7


C. Operational descriptions 8. D-D (Duplex to Duplex) mode paper/
Time chart (Tray feed) document transport (Duplex model)
Document set
A. Initial state
SPID ON Document set sensor Set duplex documents on the document tray.
Set paper on the cassette. (In the duplex mode, the manual feed tray
Document feed unit lamp ON cannot be selected.)

Copy start
B. Front copy
PSW ON
Document transport:
The scanner is shifted
MIRM rotation to the exposure position. The document feed roller feeds the document from the paper feed
(Copier side) (SPF side) roller to the PS roller.
• The document is exposed in the exposure section, and sent to the
MM rotation Main motor rotation SPFM rotation SPF motor rotation document exit section
• by the transport/paper exit roller.
CPFS ON Paper feed
SPUS ON Document feed
• R-SPF gate solenoid ON
PPD ON • The document is sent to the intermediate tray.
(but not discharged completely.)
RRC ON Synchronization SPPD ON Document transport sensor • The document is stopped once, then switchback operation is
Paper transport Document transport performed.
(Transfer) (Exposure)
(To the back copy)
Paper transport:
(Fusing) (Document exit)
The document is passed through the paper feed roller and the PS
POD ON roller by the paper feed roller
and the images on the front surface are transferred.
(Paper exit) • The paper is passed through the fusing section and the lower side of
In the zooming mode, the magnification ratio in the sub the gate section to the paper exit tray side, (but not discharged
scanning direction (paper transport direction) is adjusted
by changing the document transport speed. completely.)
• It is stopped once and switchback operation is performed.
(To the back copy)
PSW
MIRR M
SPF M
CL
SPUS
625msec
SPPD
756msec 752msec
SCANST

MAIN M
CPFS1
RRS
PPD1
PPD2
POD

D. Cases where a document jam is caused


1) When SPPD is ON (document remaining) when the power is
turned on.
2) When SPPD is not turned ON within about 1.5 sec (at 100% copy)
after starting the document feed operation.
3) When SPPD is not turned on within about 4.7 sec (at 100% copy)
after turning on SPPD.
4) When the SPF document jam release door or the OC cover is
opened during document transport (SPF motor rotating).

E. RSPF (SPF) open/close detection (book


document detection)
RSPF (SPF) open/close detection (book document) detection is per-
formed by detecting the interval between the reference lines on the
white Mylar attached to the paper exit guide (document scanning sec-
tion) by the scanner (CCD) and detecting the varied quantity.

B (Floating)
A
(White Mylar)

Reference line Reference line

(CCD)
B A - B = Varied quantity of pixels
A (pixel)

AL-1556/1566 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 7 - 8


C. Back copy
Document transport:
By switchback operation, the document is sent through the PS roller to
the exposure section, where the back of the document is exposed.
• It is sent to the document exit section by the transport roller and the
paper exit roller.
• R-SPF gate solenoid ON. The document is sent to the intermediate
tray, (but not discharged completely.)
• It is stopped once and switchback operation is performed.
• It is sent through the PS roller and the exposure section (without
exposure operation) to the document exit section.
• R-SPF gate solenoid OFF
• The document is discharged to the document exit tray.
Paper transport:
Switchback operation is performed. Switchback operation is made after back copying in order to discharge
• The paper is sent through the upper side of the gate section and the documents according to the setting.
duplex transport section, and the PS roller, and the images on the Set document Documents after discharge,
back are transferred. 1 4 3
with empty feed without empty feed
• It is sent through the fusing section and discharged to the paper exit 2 3 4
tray. 3 2 1
4 1 2

There are following job modes as well as D-D mode.


S - S (Simplex to Simplex)
S - D (Simplex to Duplex),
Rotation copy mode (The back images are rotated 180°C.)
S - D (Simplex to Duplex), Copy mode without rotation
D - S (Duplex to Simplex)

Rotation copy mode:


The front and the back are in upside down each other.

Copy mode without rotation:


The front and the back are not in upside down.

9. Shifter

Shift width: 2.5cm


The offset function by the shifter is turned ON/OFF by the user pro-
gram.
According to the setting, offset operation is performed for every job.
(Default: ON)

AL-1556/1566 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 7 - 9


[8] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 2) Push up the lock pawls (2 positions) of the side cover, and remove
the transfer charger.

Before disassembly, be sure to disconnect the power cord for Lock pawl rear
safety.
1. Do not disconnect or connect the connector and the har-
ness during the machine is powered. Especially be careful 1)
not to disconnect or connect the harness between the MCU
PWB and the LSU (MCU PWB: CN20) during the machine is
powered. (If it is disconnected or connected during the
machine is powered, the IC inside the LSU will be
destroyed.)
2. To disconnect the harness after turning on the power, be
sure to turn off the power and wait for at least 10 sec before
disconnection. (Note that a voltage still remains immedi-
ately after turning off the power.)

The disassembly and assembly procedures are described for the fol-
lowing sections:
1. High voltage section
2. Operation panel section
3. Optical section 2)
4. Fusing section
5. Tray paper feed/transport section
6. Manual paper feed section
Transfer
7. Rear frame section 1)
charger
8. Power section
9. Duplex motor section
10. Reverse roller section
11. RSPF section

1. High voltage section


Lock pawl rear
A. List
No. Part name Ref.
C. Assembly procedure
1 Transfer charger unit
For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.
2 Charger wire
D. Charger wire cleaning
B. Disassembly procedure
1) Remove the charger cleaner from the manual paper feed unit.
1) Press the side cover open/close button and open the side cover.

1)

1)

2)

AL-1556/1566 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 1


2) Set the charger cleaner to the transfer unit, and move it recipro- 2. Operation panel section
cally a few times in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure
below. A. List
No. Part name Ref.
1 Operation panel unit
4) 2 Operation PWB
3)
B. Disassembly procedure
1) Open the side door, and Open the front cover.

2) 1)

1)

2)

2) Remove the screws (4 pcs.), the harness, and the operation panel
E. Charger wire replacement unit.
1) Remove the TC cover and remove the screw.
1)
2) Remove the spring and remove the charger wire.
3) Install a new charger wire by reversing the procedures (1) and (2).
At that time, be careful of the following items.
• The rest of the charger wire must be within 1.5mm. Refer to Fig.1
• The spring hook section (charger wire winding section) must be in
the range of the projection section. 1)
• Be careful not to twist the charger wire.

3)

3)

1)

2)

Charger wire
1)
1)

2) 1)

1mm
Protrusion

1.5mm

Fig.1

AL-1556/1566 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 2


3) Remove four screws, and remove the operation cabinet. 2) Remove the connector and the clamp, and remove the RSPF unit.
4) Remove four screws, and remove the operation PWB.

1)

2)

1)
3)

3) 1)
4)

6)
1)
6)
7)
5)

4)
3)

2)

1)

Note that there are 9 pawls 3) Remove the four screws, remove the operation unit, and discon-
nect the connector.
4) Remove the right cabinet.
C. Assembly procedure 5) Remove the left cabinet.
For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure 6) Remove the screw, and remove the rear cover.
7) Remove the table glass.
3. Optical section
A. List
NO. Part name Ref. 6)
1)
1 Copy lamp unit
7)
2 Copy lamp
3 Lens unit 5)
8)
B. Disassembly procedure
1) 4)
1) Remove four screws, and remove the rear cabinet and the rear
cabinet cover.
3)
1)

1) 2)
1)
2)
1)

2) 1)
1)

AL-1556/1566 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 3


8) Move the carriage to the position indicated on the figure. C. Assembly procedure
9) Loosen the screw which is fixing the tension plate.
CCD core
10) Move the tension plate in the arrow direction to release the ten-
1) Pass the core through the CCD-MCU harness.
sion, and remove the belt.
2) Insert the CCD-MCU harness into the CCD PWB connector of the
carriage unit.
3) 3) Move the core which was passed through the CCD-MCU harness
near the CCD PWB connector as shown in the figure below, and fix
it with a filament tape (19mm wide, 40mm long). For the attach-
ment reference, refer to the figure below. Clean and remove oil
from the attachment section.
2) 4) 4) Attach the CCD-MCU harness to the duplex tape on the back of
the carriage unit.
5) Attach the PWB holder to the position specified in the figure below.
6) Pass the core through the FFC and the PWB holder, and fix the
1) core.

Note: Attach the FCC to the base


plate securely with duplex tape
to prevent against coming loose.

11) Remove the screw, and remove the rod stopper.


12) Remove the rod.

3)

2)
1) Note: Attach the FCC to
fit with the marking line. Marking line.

13) Lift the rear side of the carriage, remove the belt and the connec-
tor, and remove the carriage.

4) 1)

2)

3)

AL-1556/1566 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 4


4. Fusing section 4) Remove the screw and remove the U-turn guide.

A. List
No. Part name Ref. 1)
1 Thermistor
2 PPD2 sensor
3 Heater lamp
4 Pressure roller 2)
5 Heat roller

B. Disassembly procedure
1) Remove the connectors (3 pcs.) of the rear cabinet.
2) Open the side cover, remove two screws, and remove the fusing
unit.

Pressure roller section disassembly


5) Remove the three screws, remove the fusing cover lower on the
right side, and open the heat roller section.

2)
3) 4)
1)
6)

5) 1)

3)
2)
6)
5)

6) Remove the screw and remove the PPD2 sensor.

2)
1)

3) Cut the binding band, remove the screw, and remove the ther-
mistor.

1)
2)
PPD2 sensor

2)

Thermistor 3)

AL-1556/1566 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 5


7) Remove the plate spring on the right and remove the heater lamp. 10) Remove the pressure release levers on the right and the left sides.

1)

1)

1)
2)

11) Remove the pressure roller, the pressure bearing, and the spring.
Note: Apply grease to the sections specified with an asterisk (*).
Grease: “JFE552” UKOG-0235FCZZ
Heater lamp

Pressure roller

8) Remove the spring and remove the separation pawls (3 pcs.). 1)

3) 3)
2)

1)

2)
2)
3)

Heat roller disassembly


(Continued from procedure (4).)
1) 5) Remove screws, remove the fusing cover, and open the heat roller
section.

3)
9) Remove the E-ring and remove the reverse gate.

3)
2) 1)

1)
3)
2)
2)

AL-1556/1566 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 6


6) Remove the C-ring and the fusing bearing, and remove the heat 5. Tray paper feed/transport section
roller.
A. List
1) No. Part name Ref.
2) 3) Heat roller 1 Paper holding arm
2 PPD1 sensor PWB
3 LSU unit
4 Intermediate frame unit
5 Paper feed roller

B. Disassembly procedure
1) Remove the paper holding arm.
Remove the arm holder from the main unit, and remove the holder
from the arm.

1)

7) Remove the parts from the heat roller. 2)


Note: Apply grease to the sections specified with ∗1.
Grease: “JFE552” UKOG-0235FCZZ
2)
1

1 3)
2)
2 3)
4)
1)

Apply grease "GU-2" (UKOG-0255FCZZ)


to the fusing gear surface ∗2.

8) Remove two screws and remove the thermo unit. 2) Remove the two screws, and remove the hinge guide R.
3) Remove the fan duct and disconnect the connector. (2 positions)
4) Remove the six screws, and remove the scanner unit.
1) 5)
5) 6)
3) 5)
5)
5)

1)

2)

2)
4)

3) 4)

1)

5)

C. Assembly procedure
For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.

AL-1556/1566 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 7


5) Disconnect the connector from the MCU PWB. 9) Disengage the pawl, and remove the roller knob.
6) Disengage the pawls (2 positions), and remove the sensor PWB. 10) Disengage the pawl, and shift the pulley and the bearing.

3) 2)

3)

1)

4)

2)
11) Remove the paper exit roller, and remove the belt, the pulley, and
the bearing.

1)
2)
1)

7) Remove the screw, and open the upper paper guide.

1)
1)

2)

12) Remove the connector and the screw, and remove the speaker
unit.

3)

8) Remove the roller, and remove the belt.


2)

2)

1)

1)

AL-1556/1566 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 8


13) Remove the flat cable and the grounding wire. 18) Remove the three screws, and remove the DUP motor unit and the
14) Remove the four screws, and remove the FAX PWB unit. belt.

2)

2)
2)

1)
2) 3)
1) 1)
3) 2)
19) Remove the harness guide.
2)

15) Disconnect the connectors.


16) Remove the three screws, and remove the MCU PWB.

1)

3)

2)
2)
20) Remove the five screws and the grounding wire, and remove the
2)
main drive unit.
1)
2)

1)

17) Remove two screws and remove the toner motor. 1)

1)

1)

1)

2)

1)

CAUTION:Attach the gears securely

AL-1556/1566 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 9


21) Remove the parts as shown below, and remove the pressure 23) Remove two screws and remove the fusing connector.
release solenoid and the paper feed solenoid. 24) Remove five screws and the connector, and lift the intermediate
frame unit to remove.
3)
3)

3)
3)

3)

4) 4)
2)

1)

1) 2)
4)

2) 3) 2)

1)

22) Remove each pawl, and remove the paper exit tray. 25) Remove the four screws, and remove the lower paper guide unit.
[Note for installation]
Fit the lower paper guide hole (a) with the shifter gear hole (b) so
3)
that the black resin (c) of the shifter unit can be checked.

c b
a

1) 1)
1)
1)

2)

1)
4)
2)

AL-1556/1566 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 10


26) Disengage the pawl, and remove the pulley. 31) Remove the four screws, and remove the LSU.
27) Shift and remove the shifter unit. 1)

1) 1)
3)

2)
4)
2)

3)
1)

28) Remove the screw, and remove the grounding plate and the gear.
29) Remove the E-ring, the gear, and the bearing, and remove the
shifter roller.

1)

Note: When assembling, turn it to the right and attach.


2)

3)

30) Put the lower paper guide unit upside down, remove the two
screws, and remove the shifter motor.
1)

2)

AL-1556/1566 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 11


32) Remove the screw and the E-ring, and remove the PS semi-circu- 36) Remove two E-rings and remove the paper feed roller.
lar earth plate and the PS roller unit. 37) Remove three E-rings and remove the clutch unit.
33) Remove the E-ring and remove the spring clutch from the PS roller
unit.
Back
5)
5)

Clutch unit
4) 4)

PS roller unit
Paper feed
roller
Use grease of
Floil FG40H
only to apply to
this section.
4)
4)

PS semi-circuler
PS semi-circular
earth plate
earth plate 1) 3)
2)
Front

1)

3)

34) Remove three screws and remove the TC front paper guide.
1)

2)

2) 38) Remove the semi-circular roller unit.


39) Remove the semi-circular rubber.

2)

35) Remove the screw and the connector, and remove the PPD1 sen- 1) 1)
sor PWB.

1)

2)

C. Assembly procedure
For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.

AL-1556/1566 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 12


6. Manual paper feed section 3) Remove three screws and remove the multi paper feed upper
frame.
A. List
1)
No. Part name Ref.
1 Manual transport roller
2 Cassette detection switch
3 PPD1 sensor PWB
1)
4 Side door detection unit

B. Disassembly procedure
Multi unit
1) Remove the screw and remove the multi upper cover.

1)

2)

2)

4) Remove two screws and remove the multi feed bracket unit from
the multi paper feed upper frame.

2)

2) Remove the screw and remove the side door detection unit. 1) 1)

2)

2)

1)

Back Wire treatment

AL-1556/1566 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 13


5) Remove three E-rings and remove the manual paper feed roller 7) Cut the binding band and remove the multi paper feed solenoid.
B9.
1)

1)
1)

1)

2)
3)

3) 2)
Multi paper feed
solenoid

L O CK
T O

6) Remove the pick-up roller.

C. Assembly procedure
For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.

D. Pressure plate holder attachment


1) 1) Attach the pressure plate holder so that the resin section is not
covered with the seal M1-N.

Seal M1-N

Pressure plate
2) holder

Attachment
reference

Attachment
reference

AL-1556/1566 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 14


7. Rear frame section 7) Remove two screws and one connector, and remove the exhaust
fan motor.
A. List Note: Be careful of the installing directions of the fan.
Attach it so that the blowing direction faces outside.
No. Part name Ref.
1 FAX PWB
2 Mirror motor
1)
3 Main motor
4 Exhaust fan motor
5 NIC PWB
6 Main PWB

B. Disassembly procedure
1) Remove the rear cabinet.
2) Remove the connector, the flat cable, and the grounding wire. 3)
3) Remove three screws, and remove the FAX PWB.

2)

1)
Blowing direction

8) Disconnect the connector.


9) Remove the two screws, and remove the NIC PWB.
1)

2)

2)
3)
2) 2)

4) Disconnect the connector.


5) Remove two screws, and remove the scanner motor.

2)
1) 3)

1)
2)

3)
10) Disconnect the connector.
11) Remove the two screws, and remove the NIC PWB unit.

2)
2)

6) Remove two screws and one harness, and remove the main 3)
motor.

3)
1)
2)

3)

1)

2)

AL-1556/1566 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 15


12) Disconnect the connectors. 9. Duplex motor section (RSPF model only)
13) Remove the five screws, and remove the MCU PWB.
A. List
2)
No. Part name Ref.
1)
1 Duplex motor

B. Disassembly procedure
1) Remove the rear cabinet.
2) Remove two screws.
3) Remove the Duplex motor cover.
2) 4) Remove the Duplex motor.

3)

1)
2)
2)
1)
2)

C. Assembly procedure
For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.

3 1
8. Power section 2
1
A. List
No. Part name Ref.
1 Power PWB
Note: When reassembling, be sure to engage the Duplex motor gear
with the belt on the main body side.
B. Disassembly procedure
C. Assembly procedure
1) Disconnect each connector.
For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the earth line.
3) Remove two screws, and remove the power PWB unit.
10. Reverse roller section (RSPF model
only)
A. List
4) No. Part name Ref.
1) 1 Reverse roller
1) 1) 1)
B. Disassembly procedure
2) 1) Remove four screws
1) 2) Remove the spring, and the earth wire
3) 3) Remove the reverse unit.

5)
4)

C. Assembly procedure
For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure. 2

AL-1556/1566 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 16


4) Bend the reverse roller and remove it. B. Intermediate tray
1) Remove the intermediate tray.

C. Assembly procedure
For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.
C. Upper cover
11. RSPF section (RSPF model only) 1) Remove four screws from the bottom of the main body.
A. RSPF 2) Remove the upper cover.

(1) Remove the rear cabinet. 2


1) Remove four screws.
2) Remove the rear cabinet.
(2) Remove the RSPF.
1) Remove the connector and the cable.
2) Remove the RSPF.

1
1
1

4)
3)

2)

1)

AL-1556/1566 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 17


D. Pickup unit F. Sensor PWB
1) Remove the belt, the paper feed frame spring, and two harnesses. 1) Remove two screws.
2) Remove the pickup unit. 2) Remove the sensor PWB.
3) Remove the harness.
1
1 1
3

1
G. Pickup solenoid
1) Remove two screws.
1 2) Remove the pickup solenoid.

2
1
Note: When reassembling, be careful of the hole position for the paper
feed frame spring.

E. Upper cover of the pickup unit.


1) Remove two screws from the bottom of the pickup unit.
2) Remove the upper cover.

2
A

Note: When reassembling, hang the iron core on the solenoid arm.

AL-1556/1566 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 18


H. Clutch I. Manual paper feed roller, pickup roller
(1) Remove the clutch unit. (1) Remove the pickup unit.
1) Remove the E-ring. 1) Lift the paper stopper.
2) Remove the pulley and the bush. 2) Slide the take-up roller unit.
3) Slide the bush in the arrow direction. 3) Slide the bushing in the arrow direction.
4) Lift the clutch pawl. 4) Remove the take-up roller.
5) Remove the clutch unit.
A

2 1 1

2
4

3 4

Note: When reassembling, hang the convex portion of the roller unit
(2) Remove the clutch on the solenoid arm.
1) Remove the E-ring. (2) Remove the Manual paper feed roller, pickup roller.
2) Remove the parts. 1) Remove the parts.
2) Remove the manual paper feed roller.
3) Remove the pickup roller.
4) Remove the parts.
1
4

3
1

2
2
1

AL-1556/1566 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 19


J. Transport unit removal L. Belt 2
1) Disconnect the connector, and cut the binding band. 1) Remove three screws.
2) Remove two screws, and remove the document tray unit. 2) Remove the drive unit.
3) Remove five screws, and remove the transport unit. 3) Remove the belt.

2 1

1
3
5
3 5

5
5

3
Note: When reassembling, hang the belt on the boss.

M. SPF motor
1) Remove the harness.
6
2) Remove two screws.
3) Remove the SPF motor.

3
K. Belt 1 1
1) Remove the belt.

N. Solenoid
1) Remove the harness.
2) Remove two screws.
3) Remove the solenoid.

AL-1556/1566 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 20


O. Clutch (2) Remove the paper supply roller.
1) Cut the band with nippers. 1) Loosen the screw.
2) Remove the harness. 2) Open the paper exit paper guide.
3) Remove the clutch. 3) Remove the parts.
4) Remove the paper supply roller.

2 1

1 3

1 Q. Paper entry sensor


1) Loosen the screw.
2) Open the paper exit paper guide.

P. Paper supply roller 3) Remove the paper entry sensor.


4) Remove the harness.
(1) Remove the parts.
1) Remove the two screws.
2) Remove the parts.

1 2

AL-1556/1566 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 21


R. Transport roller 1. (3) Remove the transport roller.
(1) Remove the parts. 1) Remove the paper exit paper guide.

1) Remove the parts. 2) Remove the transport roller.

1
1

(2) Remove the parts.


1) Loosen the screw.
2) Open the paper exit paper guide.
3) Remove the parts.

1
3

S. Paper exit roller


(1) Remove the parts.
1) Remove two screws.
2) Remove the parts.

2 1

1
2 1

AL-1556/1566 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 22


(2) Remove the paper feed paper guide upper. T. Solenoid
1) Remove two screws. (1) Remove the reverse gate
2) Remove the paper feed paper guide upper. 1) Remove the ring
2) Remove the reverse gate

2
1

1
(3) Remove the paper exit roller.
1) Remove the parts. Note: When reassembling, be careful of the groove and the hole
positions of the spring.
2) Remove the paper exit roller.
Note: When reassembling, hang 2) on the solenoid.
(2) Remove the solenoid.
1) Remove the screw.
2) Remove the solenoid.

1
1

AL-1556/1566 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 23


[9] ADJUSTMENTS 5) Calculate the main scanning direction magnification ratio.
Main scanning direction magnification ratio
Copy image dimensions
1. Optical section =
Original dimension
X 100 (%)

A. Copy magnification ratio adjustment


(When a 100mm scale is used as the original.)
The copy magnification ratio must be adjusted in the main scanning Original (Scale)
HARDENED
direction and in the sub scanning direction. To adjust, use TC 48-01. mm
JAPAN
STAINLESS

1/2mm 10 20 100 110 120 130 140 150


(1) Outline Shizuoka

The main scanning (front/rear) direction magnification ratio adjustment


is made manually. JAPAN
HARDENED
STAINLESS
Paper feed mm
The adjustment is made by manual key operations. (The zoom data direction 1/2mm 10 20 100 110 120 130 140 150
Shizuoka

register set value is changed for adjustment.)


Reference Comparison point Copy
The magnification ratio in the sub scanning direction is adjusted by
changing the carriage (scanner) scanning speed. 110

(2) Main scanning/sub scanning direction magnification


ratio adjustment
a. Cases when the adjustment is required 6) Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specified
range. If it is not within the specified range, perform the following
1) When the main PWB is replaced. procedures.
2) When the EEPROM in the main PWB is replaced. 7) Execute TC 48-01 to select the main scanning direction copy
3) When "U2" trouble occurs. magnification ratio adjustment mode.
4) When repairing or replacing the optical section. To select the adjustment mode, use the [←/→] key.
b. Necessary tools Display Default
Mode LED
item value
• Scale
Main scan direction F-R 50 PRINT mode lamp
c. Main scanning direction adjustment procedure magnification ratio
1) Set the scale vertically on the document table. (Use a long scale OC mode sub scan SCAN 50 SCAN mode lamp
for precise adjustment.) direction magnification ratio
8) Enter the new set value of main scanning direction copy
magnification ratio with the copy quantity set key, and press the
[START] key.
9) Change the set value and repeat the adjustment until the ratio is
within the specified range.
When the set value is changed by 1, the magnification ratio is
changed by 0.1%.
d. Sub scanning direction adjustment procedure
1) Set the scale on the document table as shown below. (Use a long
scale for precise adjustment.)

2) Set the copy magnification ratio to 100%.


3) Make a copy on A4 or 81/2" x 11" paper.
4) Measure the length of the copied scale image.

AL-1556/1566 ADJUSTMENTS 9 - 1
2) Set the copy magnification ratio to 100%. Display
Mode Default LED TC
3) Make a copy on A4 or 81/2" x 11" paper. item
4) Measure the length of the copied scale image. Print center offset TRAY1 50 COPY mode lamp
5) Calculate the sub scanning direction copy magnification ratio (Main cassette paper Main cassette lamp
using the formula below. feed)
Copy image dimensions (*) Print center offset TRAY2 50 COPY mode lamp
= X 100 (%) (2nd cassette paper 2nd cassette lamp
Original dimension
feed) 50-10
Print center offset MFT 50 COPY mode lamp
110 (Manual paper feed) Manual feed lamp
2nd print center SIDE2 50 PRINT mode lamp
offset (Main cassette Main cassette lamp
paper feed)
Original (Scale)
HARDDENCD
The modes can be selected by pressing [←/→] key.
STAINLESS
mm
10 20 100 110 120
JAPAN
130 140 150 (*): Support for the installation models. For non-installation models,
1/2mm
Shizuoka skip.
* In the 2nd print center offset adjustment, print is made forcibly as
HARDDENCD Paper feed 1to2/Long Edge from OC regardless of duplex setting.
JAPAN
STAINLESS direction
mm
1/2mm 10 20 100 110 120 130 140 150 (1) Lead edge adjustment
Shizuoka

1) Set a scale to the center of the paper lead edge guide as shown
Reference Comparison point Copy
below, and cover it with B4 or 8 1/2" x 14" paper.
6) Check that the actual copy magnification ratio is within the
specified range. (100 ± 1.0%).
If it is not within the specified range, perform the following
procedures.
7) Execute TC 48-01 to select the sub scanning direction copy
magnification ratio adjustment mode.
To select the adjustment mode, use the [←/→] key. (SCAN mode
lamp ON)
8) Enter the new set value of sub scanning direction copy
magnification ratio with the copy quantity set key, and press the
[START] key.
Repeat procedures 1) - 8) until the sub scanning direction actual copy
magnification ratio in 100% copying is within the specified range.
When the set value is changed by 1, the magnification ration is
changed by 0.1%.

B. Image position adjustment


The employed test commands and the contents are as follows:
2) Execute TC 50 - 01
Display 3) Set the print start position (A: COPY mode lamp ON), the lead
Mode Default LED TC
item edge void amount (B: PRINT mode lamp ON), the scan start posi-
Print start position TRAY1 50 COPY mode lamp tion (C: SCAN mode lamp) to 1, and make a copy of the scale at
(Main cassette paper Main cassette 100%.
feed) lamp
4) Measure the image loss (Rmm) of the scale.
(*) Print start position TRAY2 50 COPY mode lamp
Set C = 10 x R (mm). (Example: Set to 40.)
(2nd cassette paper 2nd cassette lamp
feed) When the value of C is increased by 10, the image loss is
Print start position MFT 50 COPY mode lamp decreased by 1mm. (Default: 50)
(Manual paper feed) Manual feed lamp 50-01 5) Measure the distance (Hmm) from the paper lead edge to the
Image lead edge void DEN-A 50 PRINT mode lamp image print start position.
amount Set A = 10 x H (mm). (Example: Set to 50.)
Image scan start RRC-A 50 SCAN mode lamp When the value of A is increased by 10, the image lead edge is
position moved to the paper lead edge by 1mm. (Default: 50).
Image rear edge void DEN-B 50 COPY mode lamp 6) Set the lead edge void amount to B = 50 (2.5mm). (Default: 50)
amount PRINT mode lamp When the value of B is increased by 10, the void is extended by
SCAN mode lamp about 0.1mm. (For 25 or less, however, the void amount is
regarded as 0.)
* The SFP adjustment is made by adjusting the SPF image scan start
position after OC adjustment.

AL-1556/1566 ADJUSTMENTS 9 - 2
(Example)
Document guide
Distance from the paper lead edge
to the image lead edge, H = 5mm

Image loss, R = 4mm

5mm

10mm

2) Execute TC 50-10 to select the print center offset (cassette paper


feed) adjustment mode.
The set adjustment value is displayed on the copy quantity display.
3) Make a copy and check that the copied center line is properly
positioned.
(2) Image rear edge void amount adjustment The standard value is 0 ±2mm from the paper center.
1) Set a scale to the rear edge section of A4 or 11" x 8 1/2" paper size 2.0mm or less
(Copy A)
as shown in the figure below, and cover it with B4 or 8 1/2" x 14" Copy image
paper.
Copy paper
B4 or 8 1/2″ × 14″ paper Shift folding line

A4 size rear edge 2.0mm or less


(Copy B)
Copy image

Copy paper
Shift folding line

(Paper feed direction)

2) Execute TC 50 - 01 to select the image rear edge void amount 4) If the measured value is out of the specified range, change the set
adjustment mode. value and repeat the adjustment procedure.
The set adjustment value is displayed on the copy quantity display. When the set value is increased by 1, the copy image is shifted by
0.1mm toward the rear frame.
3) Make a copy and measure the void amount of image rear edge.
• For the manual paper feed, change the manual paper feed
Void amount (Standard value: 2 - 3mm) adjustment mode and perform the similar procedures.
• Since the document center offset is automatically adjusted by the
CCD which scan the reference lines (F/R) on the back of document
guide, there is no need to adjust manually.

Scale image
2. Copy density adjustment
Paper rear edge A. Copy density adjustment timing
The copy density adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
• When maintenance is performed.
4) If the measurement value is out of the specified range, change the • When the developing bias/grid bias voltage is adjusted.
set value and repeat the adjustment procedure. • When the optical section is cleaned.
The default value is 50. • When a part in the optical section is replaced.
(3) Center offset adjustment • When the optical section is disassembled.
1) Set the self-made test chart for the center position adjustment so • When the OPC drum is replaced.
that its center line is aligned with the center mark of the document • When the main control PWB is replaced.
guide. • When the EEPROM on the main control PWB is replaced.
• Test chart for the center position adjustment. • When the memory trouble (U2) occurs.
Draw a line at the center of A4 or 8 1/2" x 11" paper in the paper
transport direction. B. Note for copy density adjustment
1) Arrangement before execution of the copy density adjustment
• Clean the optical section.
• Clean or replace the charger wire.
• Check that the voltage at the high voltage section and the
developing bias voltage are in the specified range.

AL-1556/1566 ADJUSTMENTS 9 - 3
C. Necessary tool for copy density adjustment (2) Perform the adjustment in each mode.
• One of the following test charts: 1) Execute TC 46-01 (300dpi). To adjust in 600dpi, execute TC 46-
UKOG-0162FCZZ, UKOG-0089CSZZ, KODAK GRAY SCALE 02.
• B4 (14" x 8 1/2") white paper 2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the exposure mode select key.
• The user program AE setting should be "3." Set the exposure level to 3 (center) for all adjustment. (Except for
the auto mode.)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W
TEXT
| | | | | (1) Exposure mode, level display

Test chart comparison table


UKOG- (2) Mode select key
0162FCZZ
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W
DENSITY
No. Adjustment Display Sharp gray chart
LED
UKOG- mode item adjustment level
0089CSZZ Auto mode AE COPY mode lamp "3" is slightly
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 1.9 0
DENSITY copied.
No. Text mode TEXT PRINT mode lamp "3" is slightly
KODAK copied.
GRAY 1 2 3 4 19 A Photo mode PHOTO SCAN mode lamp "3" is slightly
SCALE copied.

D. Features of copy density adjustment Text T/S mode TSTXT PRINT mode lamp "3" is slightly
SCAN mode lamp copied.
For the copy density adjustment, the image data shift function provided
Auto T/S mode TSAE COPY mode lamp "3" is slightly
in the image process LSI is used.
SCAN mode lamp copied.
List of the adjustment modes
3) Make a copy.
Auto Mode Brightness 1 step only
Check the adjustment level (shown in the above table) of the
Manual Mode Brightness 5 steps. Adjustment of only the center
exposure test chart (Sharp Gray Scale).
brightness is made.
Photo Mode Brightness 5 steps. Adjustment of only the center Sharp Gray Scale adjustment level
brightness is made. Non toner
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W
Manual T/S Brightness 5 steps. Adjustment of only the center save mode
mode brightness is made.
T/S Auto mode Brightness 1 step only
Slightly copied.
E. Copy density adjustment procedure Not copied.
The copy density can be adjusted in 300dpi or in 600dpi.
Main code Sub code Resolution for copy density adjustment Toner save
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W
01 300dpi mode
46
02 600dpi
For selection of modes, use the copy mode select key.
Slightly copied.
(1) Test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) setting Not copied.
1) Place the test chart so that its edge is aligned with the A4 (Letter)
reference line on the document table. Then place a A4 (14" x (When too bright): Decrease the value displayed on the copy quantity
8 1/2") white paper on the test chart and close the document cover. display.
(When too dark): Increase the value displayed on the copy quantity
display.
* The value can be set in the range of 1 - 99.

White paper

Test chart

AL-1556/1566 ADJUSTMENTS 9 - 4
3. High voltage adjustment 4. Duplex adjustment
A. Main charger (Grid bias) A. Adjusting the paper reverse position in memory
Note: for duplex copying
• Use a digital multi meter with internal resistance of 10MΩ or more This step adjusts the front surface printing (odd-number pages of a
measurement. document set) in the S-D mode copying and the leading edge position
• After adjusting the grid LOW output, adjust the HIGH output. Do not of an image on even-number pages in the D-S mode.
reverse the sequence. That is, it covers the adjustment of the second surface printing mode
Procedures (image loss at the front edge of an image) in which image data is once
stored in memory.
1) Set the digital multi meter range to DC700V.
The image data is read, starting from its front end in the document
2) Set the positive side of the test rod to the connector CN11-3
delivery direction (Reference direction of document setting in the OC
(GRID) of high voltage section of the power PWB and set the
mode)and stored in memory.
negative side to the frame ground (power frame).
This stored image data is printed starting at the printing start position,
3) Execute TC 8-02. (The main charger output is supplied for 30 sec
in the order of last-stored data to the first-stored data.
in the grid voltage HIGH output mode.)
In other words, the front edge image loss of the image can be adjusted
4) Adjust the control volume (VRG1) so that the output voltage is 580
by changing the document read end position.
±12V.
(Adjustment procedure)
1) Preparing test chart (Draw a scale at the rear end of one side of a
sheet of A4 white paper or letter paper)

5 10

VRG1

2) Set the test chart so that the scale is positioned as shown below, in
the S-D mode and the D-S mode.

Scale (S-D mode) Scale (D-S mode)


B. DV bias check
Note: • A digital multi meter with internal resistance of 1GΩ must be
use for correct check.
• The adjustment volume is locked, and no adjustment can be
made.

Procedures
3) Execute test command 50-18.
1) Set the digital multi meter range to DC500V.
Display
2) Set the positive side of the test rod to the connector CN-10-1 (DV Mode Default LED
item
BIAS) and set the negative side to the frame ground (power
OC memory reverse OC 50 COPY mode lamp
frame).
output position
3) Execute TC 25-01 to output the developing bias for 30sec, and
SPF memory reverse SPF 50 PRINT mode lamp
check that the output is –400±8V.
output position
Select the SPF memory reverse output position, and press
[START] key to make a copy.
VRDV Adjust the setting so that the front edge image loss is less than 4.0
mm in the R-SPF mode.
An increase of 1 in setting represents an increase of 0.1 mm in
image loss.

Front edge of paper

The front edge of the


scale on test chart Void area

5 10
less than 4 mm

AL-1556/1566 ADJUSTMENTS 9 - 5
2) Set the test chart on the document glass as shown below.

Document guide The trailing edge has a scale

2nd printing surface where scale is printed (lower side)

Table glass
B. Adjusting trailing edge void in duplex copy mode
This is the adjustment of the first surface printing mode (rear end void) 3) Execute test command 50-19 to turn on the PRINT mode lamp and
in duplex copying. make the printing mode in OC-D mode.
Make a copy of the test chart to check the void area of the scale on
In a duplex copying operation, the paper is delivered starting from the
the image.
rear end of the first printing surface. It is therefore necessary to make a
void area at the rear end on the first printing surface to prevent paper Void position to be check
jam at the fusing part.
There are two adjustment modes:
1) Image cut rear end void quantity (R-SPF) 50-19 (SCAN mode Paper
lamp)
The size (length) of a document read from the R-SPF is detected,
the image at the trailing edge of the first printing surface is cut to
make a void area. (The adjustment of void quantity at the time
when the cassette paper size is not recognized.)
2) Paper trailing edge void quantity 50-19 (PRINT mode lamp)
This adjustment is made when the cassette paper size is
recognized. The trailing edge void quantity can be adjusted by
changing the trailing edge image laser OFF timing.
The paper void quantity should be first adjusted before the image cut
The trailing edge void on the first printing surface
trailing edge void quantity (R-SPF) is adjusted.
is shown above.
The adjustment modes can be selected by pressing [←/→] key.
(Adjustment range; 1 – 99) Adjust the setting so that the void area is 4 - 5 mm. An increase in 1 of
Enter the adjustment value and press [START] key to save the set setting represents 0.1 mm in void area.
value and make a copy. (The paper information is cleared for every
copy.)
(2) Image cut trailing edge void quantity (R-SPF)
When the set value is increased by 1, the void amount is increased by 1) Set the test chart so that the scale is positioned as shown below.
about 0.1mm.
Display
Mode Default LED
item
Paper rear edge void DEN-B 50 PRINT mode lamp
amount
Print start position (Duplex RRC-D 50 SCAN mode lamp
back surface)
* The initial value of duplex setting is 2to2. Scale (D-D mode)
(Adjustment procedure) 2) Execute test command 50-19 to turn on the SCAN mode lamp(on
(1) Paper trailing edge void quantity the operation panel) and make the printing mode in the D-D mode.
3) Remove and reinsert the cassette.
1) Preparing test chart (Draw a scale at the rear end of one side of a
sheet of A/4 white paper or letter paper) Note: Make sure to carry out this step before making a copy during
this adjustment.
4) Make a copy and check the void area of the scale on the image.
Adjust the setting so that the void area is 2 - 4 mm. An increase of
1 in setting represents an increase of 0.1 mm in void area.
l Void position to be checked

AL-1556/1566 ADJUSTMENTS 9 - 6
5. SPF (RSPF) scan position automatic The size of the black chart (UKOG-0011QSZZ) is 297 x 420. Divide it
into four for use.
adjustment
Place a black chart so that it covers the SPF scan glass and the OC
glass together, and close the OC cover.
When test command 53-08 is executed, the current adjustment value
is displayed as the initial display.
* Default is 1. Adjustment range is 1 – 99. Adjustment unit 1 = about
0.127mm
* If the values are kept as the default values, SPF scan is not per-
formed properly. The front area of the proper scan position may be 6. RSPF (SPF) mode sub scanning direction
scanned.
In case of AUTO, press [START] key, and the mirror unit scans from magnification ratio adjustment
the home position to the SPF scan position with the adjustment value Note: Before performing this adjustment, be sure to check that the OC
displayed. The SPF glass cover edge position is calculated from the mode adjustment in copying has been completed.
difference between the SPFG glass cover edge and the OC side
1) Put a scale on the original table as shown below, and make a
document glass CCD output level. If the adjustment is normal, the
normal copy (100%) on the front and the back surfaces to make a
adjusted value is displayed. If abnormal, the error LED lights up with
test chart.
the current set value displayed.
During the error LED is lighted, when [START] key is pressed again,
execution is performed again.
Display
Mode Default LED
item
SPF scan position auto AUTO 1 COPY mode lamp
adjustment
SPF scan position manual MANU 1 PRINT mode lamp
adjustment
Operation
The operation is similar to test command 46-01. (In MANUAL)
Note: Since the printed copy is used as a test chart, put the scale in
OK/ERR display in AUTO paralled with the edge lines.
<When OK> <When ERR> 2) Set the test chart on the RSPF and make a duplex copy (D-D or D-
53-08 SPF AUTO 53-08 SPF AUTO S) in the normal ratio (100%).
AUTO 100% ** OK AUTO 100% ** ERR 3) Compare the scale image and the actual image.
If necessary, perform the following adjustment procedures.
4) Execute TC 48-05.
5) The current front surface sub scanning direction magnification ratio
correction value is displayed in two digits on the display section.
To select SIDE1 and SIDE2, use [←/→] keys.
6) Enter the set value and press the start key.
When adjusting the RSPF, use [2-SIDED COPY] key to select
single/duplex after entering the one page print mode, performing 2-
page single copy.
Display
Mode Default LED
item
Sub scan magnification ratio SIDE1 50 COPY
adjustment on the surface of SPF/ mode lamp
RSPF document
Sub scan magnification ratio SIDE2 50 PRINT
adjustment on the surface of mode lamp
RSPF document
* When there is no document in SPF, copy is inhibited.
<Adjustment specification>
Adjustment Setting
Spec value TC Set value
mode range
6cm or more is required. Sub scanning At normal: 48-5 Add 1: 1 – 99
* Use a black chart (UKOG-0011QSZZ) or prepare a chart as shown direction ±1.0% 0.1% increase
below. magnification Reduce 1: 0.1%
Chart size: 300 x 100, prepared with cutting sheet No. 791 (Black) or ratio (SPF/RSPF decrease
an equivalent one. mode)

Reason: To prevent erroneous detection by disturbing light of a


fluorescent lamp, etc.

AL-1556/1566 ADJUSTMENTS 9 - 7
7. Automatic black level correction
a. Cases when the adjustment is required
1) When the main PWB is replaced.
2) When the EEPROM in the main PWB is replaced.
3) When "U2" trouble occurs.
4) When repairing or replacing the optical section.
b. Adjustment procedure
Used to acquire the black level target value used for the black level
adjustment of white balance.
When test command 63-02 is executed, the current correction value is
displayed in 3 digits of 12bit hexadecimal number.
Place the gray gradation chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) used as the
correction document so that the density 10 (black side) comes on the
left side and that the chart is upside down at the center of the plate left
center.

10

Chart back surface

When [OK/START] key is pressed, the mirror base unit scans the chart
and calculates the correction value.
After completion of correction, the corrected value is displayed on the
LCD.
* Default: 0
* If the value is set to the default, operation is made with 0x60.
c. Operation
1) Initial display
63-02 BLACK LEVEL
0
2) [OK/START] Correction start
63-02 BLACK LEVEL
EXECUTING...
<During canceling - When C/CA is pressed->
After canceling, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby
mode.
THE JOB IS BEING
CANCELED.
3) After execution
63-02 BLACK LEVEL
*** OK
3) In case of an error
63-02 BLACK LEVEL
*** ERR

AL-1556/1566 ADJUSTMENTS 9 - 8
[10] TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES
1. Entering the test command mode
To enter the serviceman test command mode, press the keys as
follows:
[#] key → [*] key → [C] key → [*] key
To cancel the test command mode, press the [CA] key.

2. Key rule
[10KEY]: Entry of MAIN CODE/SUB CODE
Selection of an item
Setup of an adjustment value in case of test commands for adjustment
[←/→]: Selection of MAIN CODE/SUB CODE
Selection of an item
[OK/START]: Settlement
<In case of test commands for print>
[OK]: Settlement (Without print)
[START]: Settlement/Print
[C]: (Interrupting operation check) Returns to the upper hierarchy.
In case of test command of operation check, terminates the operations.
[CA]: Exits from the test command mode.
For a test command of adjustment, the display returns to the initial display (00-00).

3. List of test commands


Main Sub Main Sub
Contents
Contents code code
code code
1 01 Mirror scan (SCAN CHK) 9 01 Duplex motor normal rotation check (DPLX ROT.)

02 Mirror home position sensor (MHPS) status display 02 Duplex motor reverse rotation check (DPLX
ROT.REV.)
(MHP-SENSOR)
04 Duplex motor rotating speed adjustment (DPLX
06 Mirror scan aging (SCAN AGING)
ROT.SPEED)
2 01 Single Paper Feeder (SPF) aging (SPF AGING)
10 00 Toner motor operation (TONER MOTOR)
02 SPF sensor status display (SPF SENSOR)
14 00 Cancel of trouble other than U2 (TRBL CANC.)
03 SPF motor operation check (SPF MOTOR CHK)
16 00 U2 trouble cancel (U2 TRBL CANC.)
06 RSPF resist clutch operation check (RSPF RES.CHK)
22 04 JAM total counter display (JAM TTL CNT)
08 SPF paper feed solenoid operation check (SPF SPUS
05 Total counter display (TTL CNT)
CHK)
08 SPF counter display (SPF CNT)
09 RSPF reverse solenoid operation check (RSPF SPFS
CHK) 11 FAX-related counter display (AL-1566)
10 RSPF paper exit gate solenoid operation check 12 Drum counter display (DRUM CNT)
(RSPF SGS CHK) 14 ROM version display (ROM VER.)
3 03 Shifter operation check (SHIFTER CHK) 16 Duplex counter display (DPLX CNT)
5 01 Operation panel display check (LCD/LED CHK) 17 Copy counter display (COPIES CNT)
02 Fusing lamp, cooling fan operation check (HT LAMP 18 Printer counter display (PRT.CNT)
CHK) 19 Scanner mode counter display (S-MODE CNT)
03 Copy lamp ON check 21 Scanner counter display (SCAN CNT)
(C-LAMP CHK)
22 SPF JAM counter display (S JAM CNT)
6 01 Paper feed solenoid (CPFS1, CPFS2, MPFS)
24 01 JAM total counter clear (JAM TTL CLR.)
operation check (PSOL CHK)
04 SPF counter clear (SPF CLR.)
02 Resist roller solenoid (RRS) operation check (RES.R
SOL CHK) 05 Duplex counter clear (DPLX CLR.)

7 01 Check of warm-up display and aging with JAM (W- 07 Drum counter clear (DRUM CLR.)
UP/AGING) 08 Copy counter clear (COPIES CLR.)
06 Interval aging (INTERVAL AGING) 09 Printer counter clear (PRT.CLR.)
08 Shift to copy with warm-up display (W-UP C-MODE) 10 FAX counter clear (FAX CLR.) (AL-1566)
8 01 Developing bias output (DVLP BIAS SET.) 13 Scanner counter clear (SCAN CLR.)
02 Main charger output (Grid HIGH) (MHV(H) SET.) 14 SPF JAM total counter clear (S JAM TTL CLR.)
03 Main charger output (Grid LOW) (MHV(L) SET.) 15 Scanner mode counter clear (S-MODE CLR.)
06 Transfer charger output (THV SET.) 25 01 Main motor operation check (MAIN MOTOR CHK)
10 Polygon motor operation check (LSU CHK)

AL-1556/1566 TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 1


Main Sub Main Sub
Contents Contents
code code code code
26 02 (R)SPF setting (SPF/RSPF) 49 01 Download mode (DOWNLOAD MODE)
03 Second cassette setting (2ND TRAY) 50 01 Lead edge image position (LEAD EDGE)
04 Main unit duplex setting (DPLX) 06 Copy lead edge position adjustment (SPF/RSPF)
(SPF/RSPF EDGE)
06 Destination setting (DESTINATION)
10 Print center offset adjustment (PRT.OFF-CENTER)
07 Machine conditions check (CPM)
12 Document feed off-center adjustment (ORG.OFF-
20 Rear edge void setting (END EDGE) CENTER)
30 CE mark support control ON/OFF (CE MARK) 18 Memory reverse position adjustment in duplex copy
38 Cancel of stop at drum life over (DRUM LIFE END) (DPLX REVERSE)
39 Memory capacity check (MEM.CHK) 19 Duplex copy rear edge void adjustment (DPLX END
40 Polygon motor OFF time setting (Time required from EDGE)
completion of printing to turning OFF the motor) (LSU 51 02 Resist amount adjustment (RESIST ADJ.)
MOTOR OFF) 53 08 SPF scan position automatic adjustment (SPF AUTO)
42 Transfer ON timing control setting (TC ON TIMING) 61 03 HSYNC output check (LSU CHK)
43 Side void amount setting (SIDE VOID) 63 01 Shading check (SHADING CHK)
02 Black level automatic correction (BLACK LEVEL)
62 Energy-save mode copy lamp setting (C-LAMP E-S)
64 01 Self print (1by2 mode) (SELF PRT.)
30 01 Paper sensor status display (P-SENSOR)
66 01 FAX soft SW setting (AL-1566)
41 06 OC cover float detection level (OC FLOAT LEVEL)
02 FAX soft SW initializing (excluding the adjustment
43 01 Fusing temperature setting (Normal copy) (FU TEMP) values) (AL-1566)
04 Fusing temperature setting in multi coy (FU TEMP 03 FAX PWB memory check (AL-1566)
MULTI) 04 Signal send mode (Max. value) (AL-1566)
05 Fusing temperature setting in duplex copy (FU TEMP 05 Signal send mode (Soft SW set value) (AL-1566)
DPLX) 07 Image memory content print (AL-1566)
09 Postcard size paper fusing control setting (FU CTR P- 10 Image memory content clear (AL-1566)
CARD) (Japan model only) 11 300bps signal send (Max. value) (AL-1566)
11 Postcard size paper fusing temperature setting (FU 12 300bps signal send (Soft SW set value) (AL-1566)
TEMP P-CARD) (Japan model only) 13 Dial test (AL-1566)
14 Fusing start temperature setting (FU TEMP START) 17 DTMF signal send (Max. value) (AL-1566)
46 01 Copy density adjustment (300dpi) (EXP.LEVEL 300) 18 DTMF signal send (Soft SW set value) (AL-1566)
02 Copy density adjustment (600dpi) (EXP.LEVEL 600) 21 FAX information print (AL-1566)
12 Density adjustment in the FAX mode (Collective 24 FAST SRAM clear (AL-1566)
adjustment) (AL-1566) 30 TEL/LIU status change check (AL-1566)
13 FAX mode density adjustment (normal text) 32 Receive data check (AL-1566)
(AL-1566) 33 Signal detection check (AL-1566)
14 FAX mode density adjustment (Fine text) (AL-1566) 34 Communication time measurement (AL-1566)
15 FAX mode density adjustment (Super fine) (AL-1566) 37 Speaker sound volume setting (AL-1566)
18 Image contrast adjustment (300dpi) (GAMMA 300) 38 Time setting/check (AL-1566)
41 CI signal check (AL-1566)
19 Exposure mode setting (AE MODE)
20 SPF exposure correction (EXP.LEVEL SPF)
29 Image contrast adjustment (600dpi) (GAMMA 600)
30 AE limit adjustment (AE LIMIT)
31 Image sharpness adjustment (SHARPNESS)
32 Copier color reproduction setting (COLOR
REAPPEAR)
39 FAX mode sharpness adjustment (AL-1566)
48 01 Mains can/sub scan direction magnification ratio
(COPY MAG.)
05 SPF/RSPF mode sub scan direction magnification
ratio in copying (SPF/RSPF MAG.)

AL-1556/1566 TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 2


4. Descriptions of various test commands
Main Sub
Contents Details of function/operation
code code
1 01 Mirror scan (SCAN CHK) [Function]
When [OK/START] key is pressed, the home position is checked and the mirror base performs full
scan at the speed of the set magnification ratio.
During operation, the set magnification ratio is displayed.
The mirror home position sensor status is displayed with the “COPY mode lamp”. (When the mirror is
in the home position, the lamp lights up.)
During operation, the copy lamp lights up.
When [C] key is pressed, if the operation is on the way, it is terminated and the machine goes to the
sub code entry standby mode.
[Operation]
1) Initial display 2) [←] 3) [OK/START]
01-01 SCAN CHK 01-01 SCAN CHK 01-01 SCAN CHK
- 100% + - 99% + EXECUTING... - 78% +
2) [ZOOM] 2) [→]
01-01 SCAN CHK 01-01 SCAN CHK
- 78% + - 101% +
02 Mirror home position sensor [Function]
(MHPS) status display Monitors the mirror home position sensor, and makes the "COPY mode lamp" turn on during the sen-
(MHP-SENSOR) sor ON status.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
01-02 MHP-SENSOR
EXECUTING...

06 Mirror scan aging (SCAN [Function]


AGING) When [OK/START] key is pressed, the mirror base performs full scan at the speed of the set magnifi-
cation ratio.
During operation, the set magnification ratio is displayed.
After 3sec, the mirror base performs full scan again.
∗ When [OK/START] key is pressed once, the ready lamp remains OFF.
The mirror home position sensor status is displayed on the "COPY mode lamp." (The lamp is ON
when the mirror is in the home position.)
During aging, the copy lamp is ON.
[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 1-01.
2 01 Single Paper Feeder (SPF) [Function]
aging (SPF AGING) When [OK/START] key is pressed, the set magnification ratio is acquired and single-face document
transport is performed in the case of SPF or duplex document transport in the case of R-SPF.
However, the operating conditions don't matter and the operation is not stopped even in case of a
jam. Also the magnification ratio is displayed on the LCD.
[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 1-01.
02 SPF sensor status display [Function]
(SPF SENSOR) The ON/OFF status of the SPF sensors can be checked with the LCD.
When a sensor is ON, the sensor name is displayed on the LCD.

Sensor Display item


Document set sensor SPID
SPF document transport sensor SPPD
SPF paper feed cover open/close sensor SDSW

[Operation]
1) Initial display 2) When the sensor is ON:
02-02 SPF SENSOR 02-02 SPF SENSOR
SPID SPPD SDSW

03 SPF motor operation check [Function]


(SPF MOTOR CHK) When [OK/START] key is pressed, the motor rotates for 10sec at the speed corresponding to the set
magnification ratio.
[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 1-01.

AL-1556/1566 TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 3


Main Sub
Contents Details of function/operation
code code
2 06 RSPF resist clutch operation [Function]
check (RSPF RES.CHK) When [OK/START] key is pressed, the RSPF resist clutch (SRRC) repeats ON for 500ms and OFF for
500ms 20 times.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
02-06 RSPF RES.CHK
EXECUTING...

08 SPF paper feed solenoid [Function]


operation check (SPF SPUS The SPF paper feed solenoid (SPUS) repeats ON for 500ms and OFF for 500ms 20 times by the use
CHK) of the solenoid drive control Bios.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
02-08 SPF SPUS CHK
EXECUTING...

09 RSPF reverse solenoid [Function]


operation check (RSPF The SPF reverse solenoid (SPFS) repeats ON for 500ms and OFF for 500ms 20 times by the use of
SPFS CHK) the solenoid drive control Bios.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
02-09 RSPF SPFS CHK
EXECUTING...

10 RSPF paper exit gate [Function]


solenoid operation check The SPF paper exit gate solenoid (SGS) repeats ON for 500ms and OFF for 500ms 20 times by the
(RSPF SGS CHK) use of the solenoid drive control Bios.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
02-10 RSPF SGS CHK
EXECUTING...

3 03 Shifter operation check [Function]


(SHIFTER CHK) The shifter is moved back and forth in four reciprocations.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
03-03 SHIFTER CHK
EXECUTING...

AL-1556/1566 TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 4


Main Sub
Contents Details of function/operation
code code
5 01 Operation panel display
check (LCD/LED CHK) [Function]
<LED check mode (All ON/Individual ON)>
When [OK/START] key is pressed, all the LCD's on the operation panel are turned ON (all pixels ON).
After 5sec of ON, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode.
When [MODE SWITCH] key is pressed under the all ON state, the mode is shifted to the individual
ON mode, where the LED's are turned on one by one from the left upper end to the left lower side
then from the right upper side to the right lower side. (All the pixels of LCD are lighted simultaneously.)
After lighting all the LCD's sequentially, all the LCD's are lighted simultaneously. After 5sec from light-
ing all the LCD's simultaneously, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. (Cycle of
individual ON mode: ON 300ms, OFF 20ms)
When [C] key is pressed in the LED check mode, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby
mode.
When [START] key is pressed, the machine goes into the key input check mode.
<Key input check mode>
When the machine goes into the key input check mode, the LCD displays 0.
When any key is pressed after pressing a key on the operation panel, "+1" is added to the value.
Once a key is pressed, it is not recounted.
When [START] key is pressed, counting is made and the machine goes into the LED ON check mode
(LED all ON status) after 3sec.
When [C] key is pressed for the first time, it is counted. When it is pressed for the second time, the
machine goes into the sub code entry mode.
When [CA] key is pressed for the first time, it is counted. When it is pressed for the second time, the
machine goes out from the test command mode.
(Note in the key input check mode)
• Be sure to press [START] key at the last. (If it is pressed on the way, the machine goes into the LED
ON check mode.) (LED all ON status)
• Multi key input is ignored.
[Operation]
<LED check mode (All ON/Individual ON)>
1) Initial display
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
2) When [MODE SWITCH] key is pressed, the machine goes into the individual ON mode.

<Key input check mode>


1) Initial display 2) [OK/START]
05-01 LCD/LED CHK. 05-01 LCD/LED CHK.
0 **

02 Fusing lamp, cooling fan [Function]


operation check (HT LAMP When [OK/START] key is pressed, the fusing lamp repeats ON for 500ms and OFF for 500ms 5
CHK) times. During this period, the cooling fan motor rotates.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
05-02 HT LAMP CHK
EXECUTING...

03 Copy lamp ON check [Function]


(C-LAMP CHK) When [OK/START] key is pressed, the copy lamp turns ON for 5sec.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
05-03 C-LAMP CHK
EXECUTING...

AL-1556/1566 TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 5


Main Sub
Contents Details of function/operation
code code
6 01 Paper feed solenoid [Function]
(CPFS1, CPFS2, MPFS) When [OK/START] key is pressed, the selected paper feed solenoid repeats ON for 500ms and OF
operation check (PSOL for 500ms 20times.
CHK) When [←/→/10KEY] is pressed, the paper feed solenoid setting is switched.

Code number Setting Remark


0 CPFS1
1 CPFS2 Operation is possible only when No. 2 cassette is installed.
2 MPFS

[Operation]
1) Initial display 2) [←/10KEY]
06-01 PSOL CHK 06-01 PSOL CHK
0:CPFS1 2:MPFS
2) [→/10KEY] 3) [OK/START]
06-01 PSOL CHK 06-01 PSOL CHK
1:CPFS2 EXECUTING...
4) Returns to the initial display.

02 Resist roller solenoid (RRS) [Function]


operation check (RES.R When [OK/START] key is pressed, the resist solenoid repeats ON for 500ms and OFF for 500ms 20
SOL CHK) times.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
06-02 RES.R SOL CHK
EXECUTING...

7 01 Check of warm-up display [Function]


and aging with JAM (W-UP/ Copying is repeated to make the set quantity of copies.
AGING) When the test command is executed, warm-up is started and warm-up time is added for every second
from 0 and displayed.
When warm-up is completed, addition is stopped. When [CA] key is pressed, the ready lamp lights up.
After that, enter the copy quantity with [10KEY] and press [OK/START] key to repeat copying of the
set quantity (interval 0sec).
To cancel the test command, turn off the power or execute a test command which causes hardware
reset.
[Operation]
1) Initial display 2) After 10sec
07-01 W-UP/AGING 07-01 W-UP/AGING
0 10

06 Interval aging (INTERVAL [Function]


AGING) Copying is repeated to make the set quantity of copies.
When the test command is executed, warm-up is performed and the ready lamp is lighted.
Enter the copy quantity with the [10KEY] and press [OK/START] key, and copying is executed to
make the set quantity of copies, and the ready state is kept for 3sec, and copying is executed again to
make the set quantity of copies. These operations are repeated.
To cancel the test command, turn off the power or execute a test command which executes hardware
reset.
[Operation]
1) Initial display (Basic display of copy)
READY TO COPY
100% A4 0

08 Shift to copy with warm-up [Function]


display (W-UP C-MODE) Enter the test command code, and warm-up is started and warm-up time is counted for every second
from 0 and displayed.
When [CA] key is pressed during counting up, "0" is displayed on the display and counting is stopped.
However, warm-up is continued.
After completion of warm-up, counting is terminated. (The aging function is removed from test com-
mand 7-01.)
[Operation]
1) Initial display 2) After 10sec
07-08 W-UP C-MODE 07-08 W-UP C-MODE
0 10

AL-1556/1566 TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 6


Main Sub
Contents Details of function/operation
code code
8 01 Developing bias output [Function]
(DVLP BIAS SET.) When [OK/START] key is pressed, the developing bias signal is turned ON for 30sec.
When, however, an actual output value is measured, use test command 25-01.
After completion of this process, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
08-01 DVLP BIAS SET.
EXECUTING...

02 Main charger output (Grid [Function]


HIGH) (MHV(H) SET.) When [OK/START] key is pressed, the main charger is outputted for 30sec in the grid voltage HIGH
move.
After completion of this process, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
08-02 MHV(H) SET.
EXECUTING...

03 Main charger output (Grid [Function]


LOW) (MHV(L) SET.) When [OK/START] key is pressed, the main charger is outputted for 30sec in the grid voltage LOW
move.
After completion of this process, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
08-03 MHV(L) SET.
EXECUTING...

06 Transfer charger output [Function]


(THV SET.) When [OK/START] key is pressed, the transfer charger is outputted for 30sec.
After completion of this process, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
08-03 THV SET.
EXECUTING...

9 01 Duplex motor normal [Function]


rotation check (DPLX ROT.) Use the duplex motor Bios to drive the duplex motor in the normal direction (paper exit direction) for
30sec.
After completion of this process, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
09-01 DPLX ROT.
EXECUTING...

02 Duplex motor reverse [Function]


rotation check (DPLX Use the duplex motor Bios to drive the duplex motor in the reverse direction for 30sec.
ROT.REV.) After completion of this process, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
09-02 DPLX ROT.REV.
EXECUTING...

04 Duplex motor rotating speed [Function]


adjustment (DPLX When this Test Command is executed, the currently set value is displayed.
ROT.SPEED) Enter the adjustment value with [10KEY] and press [START] key. The entered value is stored and the
machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. The greater the set value is, the higher the
speed is. The smaller the set value is, the lower the speed is. (Setting range: 1 - 13, Default: 6)
1) Initial display 2) [10KEY] 3) [OK/START]
09-04 DPLX ROT.SPEED 09-04 DPLX ROT.SPEED 09-04 DPLX ROT.SPEED
6( 1-13) 7( 1-13) 7( 1-13)

AL-1556/1566 TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 7


Main Sub
Contents Details of function/operation
code code
10 00 Toner motor operation [Function]
(TONER MOTOR) When [OK/START] key is pressed, the toner motor is rotated for 30sec.
After completion of this process, the machine goes into the main code entry standby mode.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
10-00 TONER MOTOR
EXECUTING...

14 00 Cancel of trouble other than [Function]


U2 (TRBL CANC.) Used to cancel troubles other than U2.
∗ Cancel troubles such as H trouble which writes data into EEPROM, and perform hardware reset.

[Operation]
1) Initial display
14-00 TRBL CANC.
CLEARED

16 00 U2 trouble cancel (U2 TRBL [Function]


CANC.) Used to cancel U2 trouble.
When [OK/START] key is pressed, check sum of the total counter in the EEPROM is rewritten and
hardware reset is made.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
16-00 U2 TRBL CANC.
CLEARED

22 04 JAM total counter display [Function]


(JAM TTL CNT) The JAM total counter is displayed.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
22-04 JAM TTL CNT
***,***

05 Total counter display (TTL [Function]


CNT) The total counter value is displayed.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
22-05 TTL CNT
***,***

08 SPF counter display (SPF [Function]


CNT) The SPF counter is displayed.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
22-08 SPF CNT
***,***

11 FAX-related counter display [Function]


(AL-1566) The FAX-related counter is displayed.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
SELECT COUNTER
1:PAGE 2:TIME
∗ [CLEAR] key: FAX control is terminated.

2) Select 1 2) Select 2
SEND PAGE:xxx,xxx TX TIME:xxxx:xx.xx
RECV PAGE:xxx,xxx RX TIME:xxxx:xx.xx
("xxx,xxx" is the current value.) ("xxxx: xxx. xx" is the current value.)
∗ [CLEAR] key: Returns to "1) Initial display". ∗ [CLEAR] key: Returns to "1) Initial display".

AL-1556/1566 TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 8


Main Sub
Contents Details of function/operation
code code
22 12 Drum counter display [Function]
(DRUM CNT) The drum counter is displayed.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
22-12 DRUM CNT
***,***

14 ROM version display (ROM [Function]


VER.) The P-ROM version is displayed.
Press [←/→/10KEY] to switch the display version.

Code number Version Display item


0 Main unit Program MAIN PROG.
1 F-IMC Program F-IMC PROG.
2 LCD DATA LCD DATA

[Operation]
1) Initial display 2) [→/10KEY]
22-14 ROM VER. 22-14 ROM VER.
MAIN PROG. 00.00 F-IMC PROG. 00.00
2) [←/10KEY]
22-14 ROM VER.
LCD DATA 00.00

16 Duplex counter display [Function]


(DPLX CNT) The duplex counter is displayed.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
22-16 DPLX CNT
***,***

17 Copy counter display [Function]


(COPIES CNT) The copy counter is displayed.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
22-17 COPIES CNT
***,***

18 Printer counter display [Function]


(PRT.CNT) The printer counter is displayed.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
22-18 PRT.CNT
***,***

19 Scanner mode counter [Function]


display (S-MODE CNT) The scanner mode counter is displayed.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
22-19 S-MODE CNT
***,***

21 Scanner counter display [Function]


(SCAN CNT) The scanner counter is displayed.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
22-21 SCAN CNT
***,***

AL-1556/1566 TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 9


Main Sub
Contents Details of function/operation
code code
22 22 SPF JAM counter display (S [Function]
JAM CNT) The SPF JAM counter is displayed.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
22-22 S JAM CNT
***,***

24 01 JAM total counter clear (JAM [Function]


TTL CLR.) When [OK/START] key is pressed, the JAM total counter is cleared to 0 and "000,000" is displayed on
the LCD.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
24-01 JAM TTL CLR.
CLEARED 000,000

04 SPF counter clear (SPF [Function]


CLR.) When [OK/START] key is pressed, the SPF counter value is cleared to 0 and "000,000" is displayed
on the LCD.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
24-04 SPF CLR.
CLEARED 000,000

05 Duplex counter clear (DPLX [Function]


CLR.) When [OK/START] key is pressed, the duplex counter value is cleared to 0, and "000,000" is dis-
played on the LCD.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
24-05 DPLX CLR.
CLEARED 000,000

07 Drum counter clear (DRUM [Function]


CLR.) When [OK/START] key is pressed, the drum counter value is cleared to 0, and "000,000" is displayed
on the LCD.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
24-07 DRUM CLR.
CLEARED 000,000

08 Copy counter clear (COPIES [Function]


CLR.) When [OK/START] key is pressed, the copy counter value is cleared to 0, and "000,000" is displayed
on the LCD.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
24-08 COPIES CLR.
CLEARED 000,000

09 Printer counter clear [Function]


(PRT.CLR.) When [OK/START] key is pressed, the printer counter value is cleared to 0, and "000,000" is dis-
played on the LCD.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
24-09 PRT.CLR.
CLEARED 000,000

10 FAX counter clear (FAX [Function]


CLR.) (AL-1566) When PRINT switch is pressed, the FAX count value is set to 0 and "000,000" is displayed on the
LCD.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
24-10 FAX CLR.
CLEARED 000,000

AL-1556/1566 TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 10


Main Sub
Contents Details of function/operation
code code
24 13 Scanner counter clear [Function]
(SCAN CLR.) When [OK/START] key is pressed, the scanner counter value is cleared to 0, and "000,000" is
displayed on the LCD.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
24-13 SCAN CLR.
CLEARED 000,000

14 SPF JAM total counter clear [Function]


(S JAM TTL CLR.) When [OK/START] key is pressed, the SPF JAM total counter value is cleared to 0, and "000,000" is
displayed on the LCD.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
24-14 S JAM TTL CLR.
CLEARED 000,000

15 Scanner mode counter clear [Function]


(S-MODE CLR.) When [OK/START] key is pressed, the scanner mode counter value is cleared to 0, and "000,000" is
displayed on the LCD.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
24-15 S-MODE CLR.
CLEARED 000,000

25 01 Main motor operation check [Function]


(MAIN MOTOR CHK) When [OK/START] key is pressed, the main motor (and the duplex motor in the case of a duplex
model) is operated for 30sec.
To reduce toner consumption, if the developing unit is installed, the developing bias, the main
charger, and the grid are also outputted.
In this case, laser discharge is required when stopping the motor, the polygon motor is also operated
at the same time. Check for installation of the developing unit. If it is not installed, the high voltage
above is not outputted and only the motor is rotated.
To check the developing bias, install the developing unit.
After completion of 30sec operation, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
25-01 MAIN MOTOR CHK
EXECUTING...

10 Polygon motor operation [Function]


check (LSU CHK) When [OK/START] key is pressed, the Bios is called to rotate the polygon motor for 30sec.
After completion of 30sec operation, the operation is turned off with the Bios and the machine goes
into the sub code entry standby mode.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
25-10 LSU CHK
EXECUTING...

26 02 (R)SPF setting (SPF/RSPF) [Function]


When this test command is executed, the current set SPF is displayed. Enter the code number corre-
sponding to the desired SPF and press [OK/START] key to save the setting.

Code number SPF Display item


0 SPF NO SPF OFF
1 SPF YES SPF ON
2 RSPF YES RSPF ON

[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 21-01.

AL-1556/1566 TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 11


Main Sub
Contents Details of function/operation
code code
26 03 Second cassette setting [Function]
(2ND TRAY) When this test command is executed, the current set second cassette is displayed. Enter the code
number corresponding to the desired second cassette and press [OK/START] key to save the setting.

Code number Second cassette Display item


0 Second cassette NO OFF
1 Second cassette YES ON

[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 21-01.
04 Main unit duplex setting [Function]
(DPLX) When this test command is executed, the current set duplex is displayed. Enter the code number cor-
responding to the desired duplex and press [OK/START] key to save the setting.

Code number Duplex Display item


0 Duplex NO OFF
1 Duplex YES ON

[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 21-01.
06 Destination setting [Function]
(DESTINATION) When this test command is executed, the current set destination is displayed. Enter the code number
corresponding to the desired destination and press [OK/START] key to save the setting.
Code number Destination Display item
0 Inch series INCH
1 EX Japan AB series AB
2 Japan AB series –
3 China (EX Japan AB series + China paper support) CHINA
∗ For Japan AB series, there is no schedule for production.

[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 21-01.
07 Machine conditions check [Function]
(CPM) When this test command is executed, the current machine setting is displayed.
CPM Coy quantity Remark
10 CPM 10
12 CPM 12
13 CPM 13
14 CPM 14
15 CPM 15
16 CPM 16

[Operation]
1) The machine setting is displayed.
26-07 CPM
10 CPM

20 Rear edge void setting (END [Function]


EDGE) When this test command is executed, the current set rear edge void is displayed. Enter the code num-
ber corresponding to the desired rear edge void and press [OK/START] key to save the setting.

Code number Setting Display item Remark


0 Rear edge void NO OFF
1 Rear edge void YES ON Default

[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 21-01.
30 CE mark support control ON/ [Function]
OFF (CE MARK) When this test command is executed, the current set CE mark support control is displayed. Enter the
code number corresponding to the desired CE mark support control and press [OK/START] key to
save the setting.

Code number Setting Display item Remark


0 CE mark support control OFF OFF Default (100V series)
1 CE mark support control ON ON

[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 21-01.

AL-1556/1566 TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 12


Main Sub
Contents Details of function/operation
code code
26 38 Cancel of stop at drum life [Function]
over (DRUM LIFE END) When this test command is executed, the current setting is displayed. Enter the code number corre-
sponding to the desired setting and press [OK/START] key to save the setting.

Code number Setting Display item Remark


0 Stop at drum life over STOP Default
1 Cancel of stop at drum life over NONSTOP

[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 21-01.
39 Memory capacity check [Function]
(MEM.CHK) When the test command is executed, the currently installed SDRAM of the main unit is displayed.

Code number Setting Remark


8 8 MBYTE

[Operation]
1) Memory capacity display
26-39 MEM.CHK
8 MBYTE

40 Polygon motor OFF time [Function]


setting (Time required from When this test command is executed, the current setting is displayed. Enter the code number corre-
completion of printing to sponding to the desired setting and press [OK/START] key to save the setting.
turning OFF the motor) (LSU
MOTOR OFF) Code number Setting Display item Remark
0 0sec 0 SEC.
1 30sec 30 SEC. Default
2 60sec 60 SEC.
3 90sec 90 SEC.

[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 21-01.
42 Transfer ON timing control [Function]
setting (TC ON TIMING) When this test command is executed, the currently set value of the transfer ON timing is displayed
(initial display), and the set value is saved. (Setting range: 0 – 9, Default: 5)

Code Setting Remark


0 0 msec
1 –40 msec
2 –30 msec
3 –20 msec
4 –10 msec
5 0 msec Default
6 +10 msec
7 +20 msec
8 +30 msec
9 +40 msec

∗ The default “5” of transfer ON timing is “330ms passed from PS release.”


∗ When set to “0,” it is the same as setting to “5.”

[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 21-01.

AL-1556/1566 TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 13


Main Sub
Contents Details of function/operation
code code
26 43 Side void amount setting [Function]
(SIDE VOID) When this test command is executed, the currently set code of the side void quantity is displayed (ini-
tial display), and the set data are saved. (Setting range: 0 – 10, Default: 4 (= One side 2.0mm))
9

Code Setting Remark


0 0 mm
1 0.5 mm
2 1.0 mm
3 1.5 mm
4 2.0 mm Default
5 2.5 mm
6 3.0 mm
7 3.5 mm
8 4.0 mm
9 4.5 mm
10 5.5 mm

∗ When the adjustment value is increased by 1, the side void is changed as follows:
Side void adjustment: The side void is increased by 0.5mm. (The side void of “Set value x 0.5mm”
is made.)
[Operation]
1) Initial display 2) [10KEY] 3) [OK/START]
26-43 SIDE VOID 26-43 SIDE VOID 26-43 SIDE VOID
4( 0-10) 5( 0-10) 5( 0-10)

62 Energy-save mode copy [Function]


lamp setting (C-LAMP E-S) Used to set half-ON /OFF of the copy lamp in the pre-heat mode.
When this test command is executed, the current set code number is displayed. Enter the desired
code number and press [OK/START] key to save the setting.

Code number Setting Display item Remark


0 Copy lamp OFF OFF
1 Copy lamp half-ON ON Default

[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 21-01.
30 01 Paper sensor status display [Function]
(P-SENSOR) The paper sensor status is displayed on the LCD.

Sensor Display item Remark


Paper exit sensor POD
No. 1 tray paper width sensor PD1
Paper entry sensor PPD1
Duplex sensor PPD2
No. 2 tray paper feed sensor PPD3
New drum cartridge sensor DRST
∗ Since the manual paper feed sensor is a single bypass sensor, its status is not displayed.
∗ The width sensor is available only in the FAX models.

[Operation]
1) Initial display 2) When sensor ON
30-01 P-SENSOR 30-01 POD PD1 PD2
PPD1 PPD2 PPD3 DRST

AL-1556/1566 TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 14


Main Sub
Contents Details of function/operation
code code
41 06 OC cover float detection [Function]
level (OC FLOAT LEVEL) When this test command is executed, the current set value is displayed. When [OK/START] key is
pressed, the mirror base unit moves to the SPF scan position to acquire the OC cover float detection
level.
When the mirror base unit returns to the home position, the acquired value is displayed.
If the detection level is not acquired, ERR display is made. (Default: 0)
Note that, this test command must be executed with the OC cover closed.
∗ If the value is 0, float detection is not performed in normal jobs.

[Operation]
1) Initial display <Canceling - when C/CA key is pressed->
41-06 OC FLOAT LEVEL After canceling, the machine goes into the sub code entry
0 standby mode.
2) [OK/START] THE JOB IS BEING
41-06 OC FLOAT LEVEL CANCELED.
EXECUTING... 3) When the level is acquired:
41-06 OC FLOAT LEVEL
**** OK
3) When the level is not acquired:
41-06 OC FLOAT LEVEL
**** ERR

43 01 Fusing temperature setting [Function]


(Normal copy) (FU TEMP) When this test command is executed, the current set code number is displayed. Press [←/→/10KEY]
key to change the setting and press [OK/START] key to save the setting into the EERPOM. The
machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode.

Code Set temperature (°C) Remark


0 160
1 165
2 170
3 175
4 180
5 185
6 190 Default
7 195
8 200

[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 21-01.
04 Fusing temperature setting [Function]
in multi coy (FU TEMP For 20th sheet or later in multi copy, the fusing temperature is automatically changed from the temper-
MULTI) ature set with test command 43-1 to the temperature set with this test command.
When this test command is executed, the current set code number is displayed. Enter the code num-
ber and press [OK/START] key to change the setting.

Code Set temperature (°C) Remark


0 155
1 160
2 165
3 170 Default
4 175
5 180

[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 21-01.

AL-1556/1566 TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 15


Main Sub
Contents Details of function/operation
code code
43 05 Fusing temperature setting [Function]
in duplex copy (FU TEMP In the case of duplex copy, the shift temperature set with this test command is applied to the fusing
DPLX) temperature.
When this test command is executed, the current set code number is displayed.
Enter the desired code number and press [OK/START] key to save the setting.
Code Shift temperature (°C) Remark
0 ±0 Default
1 -8
2 -6
3 -4
4 -2
5 ±0
6 +2
7 +4
8 +6
9 +8

[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 21-01.
09 Postcard size paper fusing [Function]
control setting (FU CTR P- When this test command is executed, the current set code number is displayed.
CARD) (Japan model only) Enter the desired code number and press [OK/START] key to save the setting.
Code Shift temperature (°C) Display item Remark
0 Cancel OFF Default
1 Setting ON
∗ Setting" is default for Japan. However, there is no schedule for production of the Japan model.

[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 21-01.
11 Postcard size paper fusing [Function]
temperature setting (FU When this test command is executed, the current set code number is displayed.
TEMP P-CARD) (Japan When [←/→/10KEY] key is pressed, setting is changed. When [OK/START] key is pressed, setting is
model only) written into the EEPROM. The machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode.
Code Shift temperature (°C) Remark
0 160
1 165
2 170
3 175
4 180
5 185
6 190
7 195 Default
8 200

∗ Applied only to the Japan model. However, there is no schedule to produce the Japan model. Set-
ting is reflected only when ON with test command 43-09.
[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 21-01.
14 Fusing start temperature [Function]
setting (FU TEMP START) When this test command is started, the currently set code number is displayed.
Press [←/→/10KEY] to switch the setting, and press [OK/START] key to save it to the EEPROM. The
machine goes to the sub code entry standby mode.

Code Set temperature (°C) Remark


0 160
1 165
2 170
3 175
4 180
5 185
6 190
7 195 Default
8 200

[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 21-01.

AL-1556/1566 TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 16


Main Sub
Contents Details of function/operation
code code
46 01 Copy density adjustment [Function]
(300dpi) (EXP.LEVEL 300) Copy density is set for each mode.
When this test command is executed, the current se value is displayed in 2 digits (Default: 50).
Change the set value and press [START] key to make a copy under the set value.
When the set value is increased, the copy becomes darker. When the set value is decreased, the
copy becomes lighter.
In this case, only Exp.3 copy is made. When, however, the setting is made to make darker copy,
Exp.1 and Exp.5 copies also become darker. When made to lighter copy, Exp1. and Exp.5 copies
become lighter, too.
Press [←/→] key to switch the mode. The set value of the selected mode is displayed on the LCD.
(Adjustment value: 1 – 99)
The setting procedure of the magnification ratio is the same as that to copy operation.

Mode Display item Default LED


AE mode (300dpi) AE 50 COPY mode lamp
TEXT mode (300dpi) TEXT 50 PRINT mode lamp
PHOTO mode PHOTO 50 SCAN mode lamp
TS mode (TEXT)(300dpi) TSTXT 50 PRINT mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp
TS mode (AE)(300dpi) TSAE 50 COPY mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp

[Operation]
1) Initial display 4) [START] Fixing and printing value (No
46-01 EXP.LEVEL 300 change on the LCD)
AE 100% 50( 1-99) ∗ Print is started in the set mode.
2) [←] Mode selection 46-01 EXP.LEVEL 300
46-01 EXP.LEVEL 300 AE 100% 62( 1-99)
TSAE 100% 50( 1-99) 4) To fix the set value without printing, press
2) [→] Mode selection [Enter] key.

46-01 EXP.LEVEL 300 46-01 EXP.LEVEL 300


TEXT 100% 50( 1-99) AE 100% 62( 1-99)
3) [10KEY] Value entry ∗ To cancel manual feed paper empty MSG,
press any key.
46-01 EXP.LEVEL 300
∗ When performing the AE mode exposure
AE 100% 62( 1-99)
adjustment, place the test chart on the docu-
ment table so that the center area of 10cm is
not covered.
02 Copy density adjustment [Function]
(600dpi) (EXP.LEVEL 600) Copy density is set for each mode.
When this test command is executed, the current se value is displayed in 2 digits (Default: 50).
Change the set value and press [START] key to make a copy under the set value.
When the set value is increased, the copy becomes darker. When the set value is decreased, the
copy becomes lighter.
In this case, only Exp.3 copy is made. When, however, the setting is made to make darker copy,
Exp.1 and Exp.5 copies also become darker. When made to lighter copy, Exp1. and Exp.5 copies
become lighter, too.
Press [←/→] key to switch the mode. The set value of the selected mode is displayed on the LCD.
(Adjustment value: 1 – 99)

Mode Display item Default LED


AE mode (600dpi) AE 50 COPY mode lamp
TEXT mode (600dpi) TEXT 50 PRINT mode lamp
PHOTO mode PHOTO 50 SCAN mode lamp
TS mode (TEXT) (600dpi) TSTXT 50 PRINT mode lampSCAN mode lamp
TS mode (AE) (600dpi) TSAE 50 COPY mode lampSCAN mode lamp

[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 46-01.

AL-1556/1566 TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 17


Main Sub
Contents Details of function/operation
code code
46 12 Density adjustment in the [Function]
FAX mode (Collective When [START] key is pressed, scan is executed with the entered exposure adjustment value and the
adjustment) (AL-1566) data stored on the FAX side is rewritten into the entered value.
All data of the exposure adjustment values are rewritten into the same value.
For the density adjustment table data, refer to TC46-13 (density adjustment (normal text) in the FAX
mode).
[Operation]
1) Initial display 3) Scan is started (self print), and the LED of
ADJUST EXP. AUTO [START] key is turned off.
XX ADJUST EXP. AUTO
("XX" is the exposure adjustment value of nor- SCAN YY
mal text stored on the FAX side.) 4) Print is started (self print).
2) Enter a 2-digit value as the exposure adjust- ADJUST EXP. AUTO
ment value. PRINT YY
ADJUST EXP. AUTO After completion of printing, returns to “2)” dis-
YY play.
("YY" is the entered exposure adjustment
value.)
13 FAX mode density [Function]
adjustment (normal text) Scan is started with the exposure adjustment value entered with [START] key, and the stored data of
(AL-1566) the selected mode on the FAX side is rewritten into the input value.
Density adjustment value data table
Mode Photo Exposure adjustment value
STD (Normal text) off
Fine (Fine text) on
off
Sfine (Super fine) on
off
When initializing each data: 50

[Operation]
1) Initial display 3) Scan is started (self print), and the LED of
ADJUST EXP. STD [START] key is turned off.
XX ADJUST EXP. STD
("XX" is the corresponding exposure adjustment SCAN YY
value of normal text mode stored on the FAX 4) Print is started (self print).
side.)
ADJUST EXP. STD
2) Enter a 2-digit value as the exposure adjust- PRINT YY
ment value with [10KEY]. After completion of printing, returns to “2)”
ADJUST EXP. STD display.
YY
("YY" is the entered exposure adjustment
value.)

14 FAX mode density [Function]


adjustment (Fine text) When [START] key is pressed, scan is started with the entered exposure adjustment value and the
(AL-1566) data of the selected mode on the FAX side is changed to the entered value.
For the density adjustment value table data, refer to TC46-13 (FAX mode density adjustment (normal
text).)
[Operation]
1) Initial display 3) Scan start (self print)
ADJUST EXP. FINE ADJUST EXP. FINE
XX SCAN YY
("XX" is the corresponding exposure adjustment 4) Print start (self print)
value of the fine text mode stored on the FAX
ADJUST EXP. AUTO
side.)
PRINT YY
2) Enter a 2-digit value as the exposure adjust-
After completion of printing, returns to “2)”
ment value with [10KEY].
display.
ADJUST EXP. FINE
YY
("YY" is the entered exposure adjustment
value.)

AL-1556/1566 TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 18


Main Sub
Contents Details of function/operation
code code
46 15 FAX mode density [Function]
adjustment (Super fine) When [START] key is pressed, scan is started with the entered exposure adjustment value and the
(AL-1566) data of the selected mode on the FAX side is changed to the entered value.
For the density adjustment value table data, refer to TC46-13 (FAX mode density adjustment (normal
text).)
[Operation]
1) Initial display 3) Scan start (self print)
ADJUST EXP. S-FINE ADJUST EXP. S-FINE
XX SCAN YY
("XX" is the corresponding exposure adjustment 4) Print start (self print)
value of the super fine mode stored on the FAX
ADJUST EXP. S-FINE
side.)
PRINT YY
2) Enter a 2-digit value as the exposure adjust-
After completion of printing, returns to “2)”
ment value with [10KEY].
display.
ADJUST EXP. S-FINE
YY
("YY" is the entered exposure adjustment
value.)

18 Image contrast adjustment [Function]


(300dpi) (GAMMA 300) Contrast is set for each mode.
When this test command is executed, the current se value is displayed in 2 digits (Default: 50).
Change the set value and press [START] key to make a copy under the set value.
When the set value is increased, the contrast becomes higher. When the set value is decreased, the
contrast becomes lower.
In this case, only Exp.3 copy is made. When, however, the setting is made to make higher contrast,
Exp.1 and Exp.5 copies also become in higher contrast. When made to a lower contrast, Exp1. and
Exp.5 copies become lower contrast, too.
Press [←/→] key to switch the mode. The set value of the selected mode is displayed on the LCD.
(Adjustment value: 1 – 99)

Mode Display item Default LED


AE mode (300dpi) AE 50 COPY mode lamp
TEXT mode (300dpi) TEXT 50 PRINT mode lamp
PHOTO mode PHOTO 50 SCAN mode lamp
TS mode (TEXT) (300dpi) TSTXT 50 PRINT mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp
TS mode (AE) (300dpi) TSAE 50 COPY mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp

∗ No density display on LCD.

[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 46-01.

AL-1556/1566 TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 19


Main Sub
Contents Details of function/operation
code code
46 19 Exposure mode setting (AE [Function]
MODE) <γ table setting>
When this test command is executed, the code number of the current set gamma table is displayed.
(Default: Japan -1/Ex Japan -2)
Enter the code number corresponding to the desired gamma table, and press [←/→] key to change
the mode and write into the EEPROM.
<AE operation mode>
When setting the γ table, press [→] key to change to the AE operation mode, and the current set code
number of the AE operation mode is displayed. (Default: 0)
Enter the code number corresponding to the desired AE operation mode and press [←/→] key to
change the mode and write into the EEPROM.
<PHOTO image process setting>
When [→] key is pressed in AE operation mode setting, the mode is changed to the PHOTO image
process setting and the code number of the current set PHOTO image process setting is displayed.
(Default: 0)
Enter the code number corresponding to the desired PHOTO image process setting and press [←/→]
key to change the mode and write into the EEPROM.

Mode Display item Code number Setting content Remark


1 Image quality priority mode Japan default
γ GAMMA
2 Toner consumption priority mode EX Japan default
0 Lead edge stop Default
AE AE
1 Real time process
1 Error diffusion process Default
PHOTO PHOTO
2 Dither process

[Operation]
1) Initial display 2) [→] Mode selection 3) [10KEY] Value input
<γ table setting> 46-19 AE MODE 46-19 AE MODE
46-19 AE MODE AE 0( 0-1) AE 1( 0-1)
GAMMA 2( 1-2) 2) [←] Mode selection 4) [OK/START] Save the set
46-19 AE MODE value. The machine goes
PHOTO 1( 1-2) to the sub code entry
standby mode.
20 SPF exposure correction [Function]
(EXP.LEVEL SPF) Used to adjust the exposure correction amount in the SPF mode. The adjustment is made by adjust-
ing Vref voltage variation for the OC mode.
When this test command is executed, the current set value is displayed in 2 digits (Default: 50).
Change the set value and press [START] key to save the setting and make a copy.
When the set value is increased, copy becomes darker. When the set value is decreased, copy
becomes lighter. (Adjustment range: 1 – 99)

Mode Display item Default Remark


SPF SPF 50

[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 46-01.

AL-1556/1566 TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 20


Main Sub
Contents Details of function/operation
code code
46 29 Image contrast adjustment [Function]
(600dpi) (GAMMA 600) Contrast is set for each mode.
When this test command is executed, the current se value is displayed in 2 digits (Default: 50).
Change the set value and press [START] key to make a copy under the set value.
When the set value is increased, the contrast becomes higher. When the set value is decreased, the
contrast becomes lower.
In this case, only Exp.3 copy is made. When, however, the setting is made to make higher contrast,
Exp.1 and Exp.5 copies also become in higher contrast. When made to a lower contrast, Exp1. and
Exp.5 copies become lower contrast, too.
Press [←/→] key to switch the mode. The set value of the selected mode is displayed on the LCD.
(Adjustment value: 1 – 99)

Mode Display item Default LED


AE mode (600dpi) AE 50 COPY mode lamp
TEXT mode (600dpi) TEXT 50 PRINT mode lamp
PHOTO mode PHOTO 50 SCAN mode lamp
TS mode (TEXT)(600dpi) TSTXT 50 PRINT mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp
TS mode (AE)(600dpi) TSAE 50 COPY mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp

∗ No density display on LCD.

[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 46-01.
30 AE limit adjustment (AE [Function]
LIMIT) Used to set the limit value in AE and AE (toner save).
Change the setting and press [OK/START] key to write the setting into the EEPROM. The machine
goes into the sub code entry standby mode.
By pressing [←/→] key, setting is changed. (Setting range: 0 – 31, Default: 0)

Mode Display item Remark


Limit value for AE AE
Limit value for AE (toner save) TSAE

<Remark>
When test command 26-06 (Destination setting) or test command 46-19 Auto Exposure mode is
changed, the setting of this test command is also changed to the default in connection.
[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 46-19.
31 Image sharpness [Function]
adjustment (SHARPNESS) Used to adjust sharpening/blurring of image in each mode.

Image quality Setting No Remark


Blurring 0
Standard 1 Default
Sharpening 2

When this test command is executed, warm-up and shading are performed and the current set value
is displayed. (Default: 1)
Change the set value and press [START] key to make a copy under the set conditions.
To change the mode, press [←/→] key. The code number of the selected mode is dip0slayed on the
LCD.

Mode Display item Default setting LED


AE mode AE 1 COPY mode lamp
TEXT mode TEXT 1 PRINT mode lamp
PHOTO mode PHOTO 1 SCAN mode lamp
TS mode (TEXT) TSTXT 1 PRINT mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp
TS mode (AE) TSAE 1 COPY mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp

[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 46-01.

AL-1556/1566 TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 21


Main Sub
Contents Details of function/operation
code code
46 32 Copier color reproduction [Function]
setting (COLOR Used to set color reproduction in each mode. Colors easy to be copied and colors difficult to be copied
REAPPEAR) can be switched.

Set value Colors easy to be copied Colors difficult to be copied


0 Purple, Blue, Red Yellow, Green, Water blue
1 Water blue, Green, Blue Purple, Red, Yellow
2 Yellow, Red, Green Blue, Water blue, Purple

∗ This setting has virtually no effect on black-and-white documents.


When this test command is executed, warm-up and shading are performed and the current set value
is displayed. (Default: 0)
Press [START] key to make a copy under the set conditions . At that time, color components are
changed for used in copying.
To change the mode, press [←/→] key. The code number of the selected mode is dip0slayed on the
LCD.

Specification component Setting No Remark


Green 0 Default
Red 1
Blue 2
Mode Display item Default setting LED
AE mode (including TS) AE 0 COPY mode lamp
TEXT mode (including TS) TEXT 0 PRINT mode lamp
PHOTO mode PHOTO 0 SCAN mode lamp

[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 46-01.
39 FAX mode sharpness [Function]
adjustment (AL-1566) When [START] key is pressed, scan is started with the entered sharpness adjustment value, and the
data of the selected mode stored on the FAX side is changed to the entered value.
Sharpness adjustment value data table
Mode Sharpness adjustment value
1: STD
2: FINE
3: S-FINE
4: FINE/PHOTO
5: S-FINE/PHOTO
When initializing each data: 1
[Operation]
1) Initial display 4) Enter a one-digit value (0-2) as the sharp-
SHARPNESS SETTING ness adjustment value with [10KEY].
PRESS ←,→ SHARPNESS SETTING
2) [←/→] or after 2sec ZZZZ(0-2) Y
Every time when [→] key is pressed, the ("Y" is the entered sharpness adjustment value.)
second line is changed in the sequence of ∗ [CLEAR] key: Returns to “2)” display.
No. 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 1.
5) Scan start (self print)
When [←] key is pressed, the sequence is
SHARPNESS SETTING
reversed.
SCAN Y
SHARPNESS SET (1-5)
6) Print start (self print)
1:STD
3) Select the arrow key 1-5, and the LED of SHARPNESS SETTING
[START] key is lighted. PRINT Y
After completion of printing, returns to “4)”
SHARPNESS SETTING
display.
ZZZZ(0-2) X
("ZZZZ" is the mode selected among STD,
FINE, S-FINE, FINE/PHOTO, and S-FINE/
PHOTO.)
("X" is the corresponding sharpness adjustment
value of the selected mode stored on the FAX
side.)
∗ [CLEAR] key: Returns to “2)” display.

AL-1556/1566 TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 22


Main Sub
Contents Details of function/operation
code code
48 01 Main scan/sub scan [Function]
direction magnification ratio Used to adjust the magnification ratio in the main scan (front/rear) direction and sub scan direction.
(COPY MAG.) Enter the adjustment value with [10KEY]. Press [START] key to save the set value and make a copy.
(When the adjustment value is increased by 1, the magnification ratio is increased by 0.1%.)
The adjustment mode can be changed by pressing [←/→] key. (Adjustment range: 1 – 99, Default: 50)

Mode Display item Default value LED


Main scan direction magnification ratio F-R 50 PRINT mode lamp
OC mode sub scan direction SCAN 50 SCAN mode lamp
magnification ratio

[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 46-01.
05 SPF/RSPF mode sub scan [Function]
direction magnification ratio Used to display the current SPF/RSPF mode sub scan direction magnification ratio on the LCD.
in copying (SPF/RSPF When [START] key is pressed, the entered data is acquired and saved into the EEPROM, and a copy
MAG.) is made. (When the set value is increased by 1, the magnification ratio is increased by 0.1%.)
(Adjustment range: 1 – 99, Default: 50)
When adjusting the RSPF, use [2-SIDED COPY] key to select single/duplex after entering the one
page print mode, performing 2-page single copy.
For printing, regardless of the density mode and the density level,
Density mode = MANUAL
Density level = 3

Mode Display item Default LED


Sub scan magnification ratio adjustment on the SIDE1 50 COPY mode lamp
surface of SPF/RSPF document
Sub scan magnification ratio adjustment on the SIDE2 50 PRINT mode lamp
surface of RSPF document *1

∗ When there is no document in SPF, copy is inhibited.


*1: Only when RSPF is installed. If installed, skipped.
[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 46-01.

AL-1556/1566 TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 23


Main Sub
Contents Details of function/operation
code code
49 01 Download mode [Function]
(DOWNLOAD MODE) When this test command is executed, "DLOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed on the LCD and the
machine goes into the program writing mode from PC to Flash ROM.
Use the writing tool on the PC and write the program.
During writing, the display shows as follows:
After completion of download, turn OFF/ON the power to reset.

Status Display item


Download data receiving RECEIVING
Loader function transfer LOADER COPYING
Date delete start FLASH ERASE
Data write (Boot section) BOOT WRITING
Data write (Program section) PROGRAM WRITING
Data write (EEPROM) E2PROM WRITING
Data write (LCD) LCD DATE WRITING
During SUM CHECK FLASH ROM SUM CHECK
During BOOT SUM CHECK BOOT SUM CHECK
During EEPROM SUM CHECK EEPROM SUM CHECK
Download complete DOWNLOAD COMPLETE!

In case of an error in download, the following message is displayed on the LCD.

Error status Display item


PC data receiving E-01 PC TRANS
Loader function transfer E-02 LOADER COPY
FLASH ROM delete E-03 FLASH ERASE
Boot section FLASH ROM write E-04 BOOT WRITE
Program section FLASH ROM write E-05 PROGRAM WRITE
Loader section SUM CHECK E-06 LOADER SUM
Boot section SUM CHECK E-07 BOOT SUM
Program section SUM CHECK E-08 PROGRAM SUM
E2PROM SUM CHECK E-09 E2PROM SUM
E2PROM write E-10 E2PROM WRITE
E2PROM read Verify E-11 E2PROM READ
E2PROM collating Verify E-12 E2PROM COLLATE
Boot section lens check E-13 BOOT LENGTH
Program section lens check E-14 PROGRAM LENGTH
E2PROM lens check E-15 E2PROM LENGTH
Total data size check E-16 DATE SIZE
IMC communication error E-17 IMC TRANS
IMC FRASH ROM write E-18 IMC FLASH WRITE
LCD section lens check E-19 LCD DATE LENGTH
LCD section FLASH ROM write E-20 LCD DATE WRITE
LCD section SUM CHECK E-21 LCD DATE SUM
To enter the download mode, there is a method to use key operations as well as to use a test com-
mand. With the power OFF, press and hold [CA] + [←], turn on the power.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
DOWNLOAD MODE

AL-1556/1566 TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 24


Main Sub
Contents Details of function/operation
code code
50 01 Lead edge image position [Function]
(LEAD EDGE) Used to adjust the copy image position and the lead edge void amount on copy paper. The adjust-
ment is made by adjusting the image scan start position at 100% and the print start position (resist
roller ON timing). When this test command is executed, the current set value is displayed in 2 digits.
(Center value: 50)
When [←/→] key is pressed, the setting mode and the display are changed.
Enter the adjustment value and press [START] key to save the set value and make a copy.
When the adjustment is made by the main cassette paper feed, the adjustment values of all the paper
feed ports become the same. (When the set value is increased by 1, shift is made by 0.1mm.)

Mode Display item Default LED


Print start position (Main cassette TRAY1 50 COPY mode lamp
paper feed) Main cassette lamp
(*) Print start position (2nd TRAY2 50 COPY mode lamp
cassette paper feed) 2nd cassette lamp
Print start position (Manual paper MFT 50 COPY mode lamp
feed) Manual feed lamp
Image lead edge void amount DEN-A 50 PRINT mode lamp
Image scan start position RRC-A 50 SCAN mode lamp
Image rear edge void amount DEN-B 50 COPY mode lamp
PRINT mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp

(*): Support for the installation models. For non-installation models, skip.
[Adjustment procedure]
1) Set the print start position (A: COPY mode lamp ON), the lead edge void amount (B: PRINT mode
lamp ON), the scan start position (C: SCAN mode lamp) to zero, and make a copy of the scale at
100%.
2) Measure the image loss (Rmm) of the scale.
Set C = 10 x R (mm). (Example: Set to 40.)
When the value of C is increased by 10, the image loss is decreased by 1mm. (Default: 50)
3) Measure the distance (Hmm) from the paper lead edge to the image print start position.
Set A = 10 x H (mm). (Example: Set to 50.)
When the value of A is increased by 10, the image lead edge is moved to the paper lead edge by
1mm. (Default: 50).
4) Set the lead edge void amount to B = 50 (2.5mm). (Default: 50)
When the value of B is increased by 10, the void is extended by about 0.1mm. (For 25 or less,
however, the void amount is regarded as 0.)
∗ The SFP adjustment is made by adjusting the SPF image scan start position after OC adjustment.
∗ When paper is discharged, the shifter is operated.
(Example)

Distance from the paper lead edge


to the image lead edge, H = 5mm

Image loss, R = 4mm

5mm

10mm

[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 46-01.

AL-1556/1566 TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 25


Main Sub
Contents Details of function/operation
code code
50 06 Copy lead edge position [Function]
adjustment (SPF/RSPF) Used to adjust the SPF copy lead edge.
(SPF/RSPF EDGE) When the adjustment value of the document scan position adjustment is increased by 1, the scan
start timing is advanced by 0.1mm.
The print result is shifted to the opposite direction of the scan start position.
The adjustment mode can be changed by pressing [←/→] key. (Adjustment range: 1 – 99, Default:50)
When scanning a back surface of document, the mode must be changed to operate the RSPF by
pressing [2-SIDED COPY] key.

Mode Display item Default LED


Front surface document scan position SIDE1 50 COPY mode lamp
adjustment
(*) Back surface document scan position SIDE2 50 PRINT mode lamp
adjustment
Rear edge void adjustment (SPF) END 50 SCAN mode lamp

(*) : Support for the installation models. For non-installation models, skip.
∗ When there is no document in the SPF, copy is inhibited.
∗ When paper is discharged, the shifter is operated.

[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 46-01.
10 Print center offset [Function]
adjustment (PRT.OFF- Used to adjust the center offset position of copy images on copy paper and that in scanning docu-
CENTER) ment.
When this test command is executed, the current set value is displayed.
Enter the adjustment value and press [START] key to save the setting and make a copy. (When the
set value is changed by 1, the center is shifted by 0.1mm.)
When the adjustment value is increased, the center is shifted to right. When decreased, the center is
shifted to left.
The modes can be selected by pressing [←/→] key.
When the set value is changed largely, the area outside the shading area may be scanned to cause
black streaks on the edges. When the RSPF is used, select the mode for use of the RSPF by [2-
SIDED COPY] key.

Mode Display item Default LED


Print center offset (Main cassette paper TRAY1 50 COPY mode lamp
feed) Main cassette lamp
(*) Print center offset (2nd cassette paper TRAY2 50 COPY mode lamp
feed) 2nd cassette lamp
Print center offset (Manual paper feed) MFT 50 COPY mode lamp
Manual feed lamp
(*) 2nd print center offset (Main cassette SIDE2 50 PRINT mode lamp
paper feed) Main cassette lamp

(*) : Support for the installation models. For non-installation models, skip.
∗ In the 2nd print center offset adjustment, print is made forcibly as 1to2/Short Edge from OC regard-
less of duplex setting.
∗ When paper is discharged, the shifter is operated.

[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 46-01.
12 Document feed off-center [Function]
adjustment (ORG.OFF- Used to adjust document scan off-center adjustment.
CENTER) The adjustment modes can be selected by pressing [←/→] key. (Adjustment range: 1 – 99, Default:50)
When the adjustment value is increased, the print result is shifted to left.

Mode Display item Default LED


Platen document scan OC 50 COPY mode lamp
(*) SPF document front scan SPF 50 PRINT mode lamp
(*) RSPF document back scan RSPF 50 SCAN mode lamp

(*) : Support for the installation models. For non-installation models, skip.
∗ When paper is discharged, the shifter is operated.

[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 46-01.

AL-1556/1566 TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 26


Main Sub
Contents Details of function/operation
code code
50 18 Memory reverse position [Function]
adjustment in duplex copy When this test command is executed, the current set correction value is displayed.
(DPLX REVERSE) Enter the correction value and press [START] key to save the entered correction value. (Correction
value range; 1 – 99, Default: 50)
For S-D mode front surface print and print of even paged in D-S mode, reverse memory copy opera-
tion is performed from the rear edge of documents.
When, therefore, the print position adjustment of output images is required, adjust as follows:
In the reverse memory coping, when the document scan is made in the arrow direction, the output
image is printed from the rear edge of scan image,
When, therefore, the print lead edge is shifted, set the reference chart so that the reference position is
on the rear edge, and use this test command to adjust the set value so that the print lead edge is
matched.
Since printing is made from the image data most lately stored in memory to the lead edge data from
the print start position, the image lead edge adjustment is made by changing the end data position
stored in memory by the set value of this test command.
Since it is performed by changing the scan end position, the image position adjustment is made by
changing the scan end position and the end data stored in memory.

Mode Display item Default LED


OC memory reverse output position OC 50 COPY mode lamp
SPF memory reverse output position *1 SPF 50 PRINT mode lamp
*1: Only when SPF/RSPF is installed. If installed, skipped.

Document transport direction Document transport direction


Scan lead edge Print lead edge
Lead edge void (1)
Print start position

Scan end position


(Default: Scan cut by void (1)) Rear edge void
Print rear edge
Scan direction Scan rear edge
∗ The initial value of duplex setting is "1to2/Long Edge" for the duplex model, or "2to1" for the simplex
model.
∗ When paper is discharged, the shifter is operated.

[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 46-01.
19 Duplex copy rear edge void [Function]
adjustment (DPLX END Used to adjust the rear edge void amount in duplex copy.
EDGE) When this test command is executed, the current set value is displayed in 2 digits. (Center value: 50.)
The adjustment modes can be selected by pressing [←/→] key. (Adjustment range; 1 – 99)
Enter the adjustment value and press [START] key to save the set value and make a copy. (The
paper information is cleared for every copy.)
When the set value is increased by 1, the void amount is increased by about 0.1mm.

Mode Display item Default LED


Paper rear edge void amount DEN-B 50 PRINT mode lamp
Print start position (Duplex back surface) RRC-D 50 SCAN mode lamp

∗ The initial value for duplex setting is "1to2/Short Edge" for the OC/SPF setting, or "2to2" for the
RSPF setting.
∗ When paper is discharged, the shifter is operated.

[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 46-01.

AL-1556/1566 TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 27


Main Sub
Contents Details of function/operation
code code
51 02 Resist amount adjustment [Function]
(RESIST ADJ.) Used to adjust the contact pressure of the main unit resist roller and the RSPF resist roller onto paper.
When this test command is executed, the current set value is displayed.
The adjustment modes can be selected by pressing [←/→] key.
Enter the adjustment value with [10KEY] and press [START] key to save the set value and make a
copy.

Mode Display item Default LED


Main cassette paper fed TRAY1 50 COPY mode lamp
Main cassette lamp
(*) 2nd cassette paper feed TRAY2 50 COPY mode lamp
2nd cassette lamp
Manual paper feed MFT 50 COPY mode lamp
Manual feed lamp
(*) RSPF document paper feed SIDE1 50 COPY mode lamp
(Front surface) PRINT mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp
(*) RSPF document paper feed SIDE2 50 COPY mode lamp
(Back surface) PRINT mode lamp
(*) Duplex back surface DUP-2 50 PRINT mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp
(*): Support for the installation models. For non-installation models, skip.
[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 46-01.
53 08 SPF scan position automatic [Function]
adjustment (SPF AUTO) Place a black chart so that it covers the SPF scan glass and the OC glass together, and close the OC
cover.
When this test command is executed, the current adjustment value is displayed as the initial display.
∗ Default is 1. Adjustment range is 1 – 99. Adjustment unit 1 = about 0.127mm
∗ If the values are kept as the default values, SPF scan is not performed properly. The front area of
the proper scan position may be scanned.
In case of AUTO, press [START] key, and the mirror unit scans from the home position to the SPF
scan position with the adjustment value displayed. The SPF glass cover edge position is calculated
from the difference between the SPFG glass cover edge and the OC side document glass CCD out-
put level. If the adjustment is normal, the adjusted value is displayed. If abnormal, the error LED lights
up with the current set value displayed.
During the error LED is lighted, when [START] key is pressed again, execution is performed again.

Mode Display item Default LED


SPF scan position auto adjustment AUTO 1 COPY mode lamp
SPF scan position manual adjustment MANU 1 PRINT mode lamp

[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 46-01. (In MANUAL)
OK/ERR display in AUTO
<When OK> <When ERR>
53-08 SPF AUTO 53-08 SPF AUTO
AUTO 100% ** OK AUTO 100% ** ERR

61 03 HSYNC output check (LSU [Function]


CHK) When [OK/START] key is pressed, HSYNC is performed and the polygon motor is rotated for 30sec.
At that time, the COPY mode lamp is lighted for 100msec every time when HSYNC is detected.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
61-03 LSU CHK
EXECUTING...

AL-1556/1566 TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 28


Main Sub
Contents Details of function/operation
code code
63 01 Shading check (SHADING [Function]
CHK) Used to display the detection level of white plate for shading.
When [OK/START] key is pressed, the mirror base unit moves to the white plate for shading and the
copy lamp is lighted.
When the light quantity is stabilized, revision is made for every second, and the level of one pixel at
the center of CCD which is not corrected is detected and the value is displayed in decimal values on
the LCD. (3 digits)
[Operation]
1) Initial display
63-01 SHADING CHK
EXECUTING... 000

02 Black level automatic [Function]


correction (BLACK LEVEL) Used to acquire the black level target value used for the black level adjustment of white balance.
When this test command is executed, the current correction value is displayed in 3 digits of 12bit
hexadecimal number.
Place the gray gradation chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) used as the correction document so that the den-
sity 10 (black side) comes on the left side and that the chart is upside down at the center of the plate
left center.

10

Chart back surface

When [OK/START] key is pressed, the mirror base unit scans the chart and calculates the correction
value.
After completion of correction, the corrected value is displayed on the LCD.
∗ Default: 0
∗ If the value is set to the default, operation is made with 0x60.

[Operation]
1) Initial display <During canceling - When C/CA is pressed->
63-02 BLACK LEVEL After canceling, the machine goes into the sub code entry
000 standby mode.
2) [OK/START] Correction start THE JOB IS BEING
63-02 BLACK LEVEL CANCELED.
EXECUTING... 3) After execution
63-02 BLACK LEVEL
*** OK
3) In case of an error
63-02 BLACK LEVEL
*** ERR

AL-1556/1566 TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 29


Main Sub
Contents Details of function/operation
code code
64 01 Self print (1by2 mode) [Function]
(SELF PRT.) The status of the optical section is ignored and printing of one page is made. Also when the print com-
mand is received from the host, printing is made.
When this test command is executed, warm-up is performed and the ready lamp is lighted. (Since,
however, the scanner is disabled, initializing is not made.)
Enter the code number and press [OK/START] key to start paper feed from the selected cassette and
print in the selected pattern.

Code number Pattern Display item


0 1by2 1 BY 2
1 Grid pattern CHECK
2 White paper WHITE
3 Black background BLACK

∗ For 4 – 99, flip.

[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 21-01.
66 01 FAX soft SW setting [Function]
(AL-1566) Use to check the FAX soft SW setting.
Every time when the key is pressed, the bit on the first line is switched 0 and 1.
[Operation]
1) Initial display 3) Select 1
ENTER FAX SOFT SW. # No.### xxxxxxxx
(3 DIGITS) SW.___ USE # KEY 12345678
∗ [CLEAR] key: FAX control is terminated. 4) Change with 1-8 of [10KEY] and the press
[OK] key.
2) Enter a 3-digit value of soft SW No. (To
enter the fourth digit, shift to the left.), and No.### xxxxxxxx
the press [OK] key. STORED? 1:YES 2:NO
No.### xxxxxxxx "xxxxxxxx" is the set content.
CHANGE? 1:YES 2:NO ∗ Select 2: Returns to the soft SW No. entry dis-
"xxxxxxxx" is the set content. play.
∗ Select 2: Returns to the soft SW No. entry dis- 5) Select 1
play. STORED

After 2sec, returns to "1) Initial display".

02 FAX soft SW initializing [Function]


(excluding the adjustment Use to initializing FAX soft SW.
values) (AL-1566) [Operation]
1) Initial display
INITIALIZED

After 2sec, FAX control is terminated.

AL-1556/1566 TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 30


Main Sub
Contents Details of function/operation
code code
66 03 FAX PWB memory check [Function]
(AL-1566) Use to check the FAX PWB memory.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
SELECT CHECK MEMORY
PRESS ←, →
2) [←/→] or after 2sec
Every time when [→] key is pressed, the second line is changed in the sequence of No. 1 → 2 →
3 → 1.
When [←] key is pressed, the sequence is reversed.
SELECT MEMORY (1-3) SELECT MEMORY (1-3) SELECT MEMORY (1-3)
1:DRAM 2:SRAM 3:FLASH
∗ [CLEAR] key: FAX control is terminated.

3) [OK] key
CHECKING MEMORY

4) After completion of check


• When the result is OK • In case of address bus check • In case of data bus check
error error
MEMORY CHECK RESULT MEMORY CHECK RESULT MEMORY CHECK RESULT
OK XXXXXXXX A-BUS NG XXXXXXXX D-BUS NG
• In case of sum check error • In case of data check error • In case of erase check error
MEMORY CHECK RESULT MEMORY CHECK RESULT MEMORY CHECK RESULT
XXXXXXXX SUM NG XXXXXXXX DATA NG XXXXXXXX ERASE NG

∗ [CLEAR] key: Returns to "1) Initial display".

04 Signal send mode (Max. [Function]


value) (AL-1566) Use to set the signal send mode (Max. value).
Facsimile test command design specifications.

1 NO SIGNAL 13 7200bps(V34) 25 2400bps(V27ter)


2 33600bps(V34) 14 4800bps(V34) 26 300bps(FLAG)
3 31200bps(V34) 15 2400bps(V34) 27 2100Hz(CED)
4 28800bps(V34) 16 14400bps(V33) 28 1100Hz(CNG)
5 26400bps(V34) 17 12000bps(V33) 29 300bps(V21)
6 24000bps(V34) 18 14400bps(V17) 30 2100Hz(ANSam)
7 21600bps(V34) 19 12000bps(V17) 31 DUMMY RING
8 19200bps(V34) 20 9600bps(V17) 32 NO VOICE ANSWER
9 16800bps(V34) 21 7200bps(V17) 33 NO RING BACK TONE
10 14400bps(V34) 22 9600bps(V29) 34 LINE OFF HOOK
11 12000bps(V34) 23 7200bps(V29) 35 LINE ON HOOK
12 9600bps(V34) 24 4800bps(V27ter)

[Operation]
1) Initial display
SELECT OUTPUT SIGNAL
(2 DIGITS) No.___
2) 2-digit (1-35) with [10KEY] / [←/→] / 2sec after
Pressing [→] key or [←] key reverses the sequence.
No. (1-35) ..... No. (1-35)
1:NO SIGNAL 35:LINE ON HOOK
∗ [CLEAR] key: FAX control is terminated.

3) [OK] key
Send after setting
OUTPUTING SIGNAL MAX
PRESS CLEAR TO STOP
∗ [CLEAR] key: Returns to "1) Initial display".

AL-1556/1566 TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 31


Main Sub
Contents Details of function/operation
code code
66 05 Signal send mode (Soft SW [Function]
set value) (AL-1566) Use to set the signal send mode (Soft SW set value).
Facsimile test command design specifications.
1 NO SIGNAL 13 7200bps(V34) 25 2400bps(V27ter)
2 33600bps(V34) 14 4800bps(V34) 26 300bps(FLAG)
3 31200bps(V34) 15 2400bps(V34) 27 2100Hz(CED)
4 28800bps(V34) 16 14400bps(V33) 28 1100Hz(CNG)
5 26400bps(V34) 17 12000bps(V33) 29 300bps(V21)
6 24000bps(V34) 18 14400bps(V17) 30 2100Hz(ANSam)
7 21600bps(V34) 19 12000bps(V17) 31 DUMMY RING
8 19200bps(V34) 20 9600bps(V17) 32 NO VOICE ANSWER
9 16800bps(V34) 21 7200bps(V17) 33 NO RING BACK TONE
10 14400bps(V34) 22 9600bps(V29) 34 LINE OFF HOOK
11 12000bps(V34) 23 7200bps(V29) 35 LINE ON HOOK
12 9600bps(V34) 24 4800bps(V27ter)

[Operation]
1) Initial display
SELECT OUTPUT SIGNAL
(2 DIGITS) No.___
2) 2-digit (1-35) with [10KEY] / [←/→] / 2sec after
Pressing [→] key or [←] key reverses the sequence.
No. (1-35) ..... No. (1-35)
1:NO SIGNAL 35:LINE ON HOOK
∗ [CLEAR] key: FAX control is terminated.
3) [OK] key
Send after setting
OUTPUTING SIGNAL SSW
PRESS CLEAR TO STOP
∗ [CLEAR] key: Returns to "1) Initial display".

07 Image memory content print [Function]


(AL-1566) Use to print the image memory content.
[Operation]
• When print is allowed • When there is no print data • When print is inhibited
PRINT STORED NO DATA CAN NOT PRINT

After completion of printing, After 2 sec, FAX control is After 2 sec, FAX control is
FAX control is terminated. terminated. terminated.
10 Image memory content clear [Function]
(AL-1566) Use to clear the image memory content.
[Operation]
• When there are some print data • When there are no print data
CLEAR IMAGE MEMORY CLEAR IMAGE MEMORY

After completion of memory clear, the buzzer After completion of memory clear
sounds. CLEARED
CLEARED
PLEASE POWER OFF After 2sec, FAX control is terminated.
Remains unchanged until the power is turned
off.

AL-1556/1566 TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 32


Main Sub
Contents Details of function/operation
code code
66 11 300bps signal send (Max. [Function]
value) (AL-1566) Use to set the 300bps signal send (Max. value).
1: NO SIGNAL
2: 11111
3: 11110
4: 00000
5: 010101
6: 00001
[Operation]
1) Initial display
SELECT SIGNAL
PRESS ←, →
2) [←/→] or after 2sec
Every time when [→] key is pressed, the second line is changed in the sequence of No. 1 → 2 →
3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 1.
When [←] key is pressed, the sequence is reversed.
SELECT SIGNAL (1-6) ..... SELECT SIGNAL (1-6)
1:NO SIGNAL 6:00001
∗ [CLEAR] key: FAX control is terminated.
3) [OK] key
OUTPUTING SIGNAL MAX
PRESS CLEAR TO STOP
∗ [CLEAR] key: Returns to "1) Initial display".

12 300bps signal send (Soft [Function]


SW set value) (AL-1566) Use to set the 300bps signal send (Soft SW set value).
1: NO SIGNAL
2: 11111
3: 11110
4: 00000
5: 010101
6: 00001
[Operation]
1) Initial display
SELECT SIGNAL
PRESS ←, →
2) [←/→] or after 2sec
Every time when [→] key is pressed, the second line is changed in the sequence of No. 1 → 2 →
3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 1.
When [←] key is pressed, the sequence is reversed.
SELECT SIGNAL (1-6) ..... SELECT SIGNAL (1-6)
1:NO SIGNAL 6:00001
∗ [CLEAR] key: FAX control is terminated.
3) [OK] key
OUTPUTING SIGNAL SSW
PRESS CLEAR TO STOP
∗ [CLEAR] key: Returns to "1) Initial display".

AL-1556/1566 TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 33


Main Sub
Contents Details of function/operation
code code
66 13 Dial test (AL-1566) [Function]
Use to the dial test.
[Operation]
■ Dial test (PULSE) ■ Dial test (DTMF)
1) Initial display 1) Initial display
SELECT SIGNAL SELECT SIGNAL
1:PULSE 2:DTMF 1:PULSE 2:DTMF
∗ [CLEAR] key: FAX control is termi- ∗ [CLEAR] key: FAX control is terminated.
nated. 2) Select 2
2) Select 1 SELECT HIGH LEVEL
INPUT MAKE TIME 1:DEFAULT 2:SOFT SW.
(0-15) __ ↓ Select 2
3) Enter the make time in 2 digits. INPUT VALUE

INPUT DIAL # (0-15) __
XXXX 3) Select 1 ↓
XXXX: Default SELECT LOW LEVEL
∗ After deleting with [CLEAR] key, 1:DEFAULT 2:SOFT SW.
input can be made.
↓ Select 2
4) [OK] key
INPUT VALUE
SEND yyPPS xxms ↓
(0-15) __
1:YES 2:NO
4) Select 1 ↓
"yy" is the selected pulse 10 or 20.
INPUT DIAL #
"xx" is the input value.
XXXX
∗ Select 2: Returns to “2)” display.
XXXX: Default
5) Select 1
∗ After deleting with [CLEAR] key, input can be made.
Switched to 10/20PPS set with
4) [OK] key
pulse selection inside.
H:xx L:yy
6) After setting
1:YES 2:NO
SENDING yyPPS xxms
"xx" indicates HI, and "yy" indicates Low Soft SW.
∗ Select 2: Returns to “4)” display.
7) After completion of sending
5) Select 1
TERMINATE ?
HI/LO is selected with the signal level inside.
1:YES 2:NO
6) After setting the signal send level
∗ Select 2: Returns to “4)” display.
SENDING DTMF
8) Select 1
TERMINATED
7) After completion of sending
TERMINATE ?
After 2sec, returns to "1) Initial display".
1:YES 2:NO
∗ Select 2: Returns to “4)” display.
8) Select 1
TERMINATED

After 2sec, returns to "1) Initial display".

17 DTMF signal send (Max. [Function]


value) (AL-1566) Use to set the DTMF signal send (Max. value).
[Operation]
1) Initial display 3) Communication is started after setting the
INPUT DIAL # signal send level.
SENDING SIGNAL MAX
∗ [CLEAR] key: FAX control is terminated. PRESS CLEAR TO STOP
2) [10KEY] input ∗ [CLEAR] key: Returns to "1) Initial display".

The content selected with signal send level


selection is set inside.

AL-1556/1566 TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 34


Main Sub
Contents Details of function/operation
code code
66 18 DTMF signal send (Soft SW [Function]
set value) (AL-1566) Use to set the DTMF signal send (Soft SW set value).
[Operation]
1) Initial display 3) Communication is started after setting the
INPUT DIAL # signal send level.
SENDING SIGNAL SSW
∗ [CLEAR] key: FAX control is terminated. PRESS CLEAR TO STOP
2) [10KEY] input ∗ [CLEAR] key: Returns to "1) Initial display".

The content selected with signal send level


selection is set inside.
21 FAX information print [Function]
(AL-1566) Use to print the FAX information.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
SELECT REPORT (1-3)
PRESS ←, →
2) [←/→] or after 2sec
Every time when [→] key is pressed, the second line is changed in the sequence of 1 → 2 → 3 →
1.
When [←] key is pressed, the sequence is reversed.

SELECT REPORT (1-3) SELECT REPORT (1-3) SELECT REPORT (1-3)


1:USER SW. LIST 2:SOFT SW. LIST 3:PROTOCOL
∗ [CLEAR] key: FAX control is terminated.
3) [OK] key
• When print is allowed • When print is inhibited
PRINT STORED CAN NOT PRINT

After completion of printing, After 2sec, FAX control is


FAX control is terminated. terminated.
24 FAST SRAM clear [Function]
(AL-1566) Use to clear the FAST SRAM.
[Operation]
1) Initial display 2) After completion of clearing
CLEAR FAST SRAM CLEARED

After 2sec, FAX control is terminated.


30 TEL/LIU status change [Function]
check (AL-1566) Use to check the TEL/LIU status change.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
HS2 :xxx HS1 :xxx
RHS :xxx EXHS:xxx

The display is switched every 2sec.

CHECKING
PRESS CLEAR TO STOP
∗ [CLEAR] key: FAX control is terminated.

AL-1556/1566 TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 35


Main Sub
Contents Details of function/operation
code code
66 32 Receive data check [Function]
(AL-1566) Use to check the receive data.
[Operation]
1) Initial display 2) After completion of reception
RECEIVING RESULT
xx
"xx" is "OK" or "NG" depending on the check
result.
∗ [CLEAR] key: FAX control is terminated.

33 Signal detection check [Function]


(AL-1566) Use to check the signal detection.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
CHECKING NONE
PRESS CLEAR TO STOP
When a signal is detected, the display is changed from NONE to the following.
CI/CNG/CED/BT/DT/Flag/SDT/DTMF
∗ [CLEAR] key: FAX control is terminated.

34 Communication time [Function]


measurement (AL-1566) Use to measurement the communication time.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
COMM. TIME
xx:xx:xx:xxx msec
"xx:xx:xx:xxx" indicates o'clock, minute, second, millisecond.
∗ [CLEAR] key: FAX control is terminated.

37 Speaker sound volume [Function]


setting (AL-1566) Use to set the speaker sound volume.
1: NO SOUND
2: LOW
3: MID
4: HIGH
[Operation]
1) Initial display
SELECT SPEEKER VOL.
PRESS ←, →
2) [←/→] or after 2sec
Every time when [→] key is pressed, the second line is changed in the sequence of 1 → 2 → 3 →
4 → 1.
When [←] key is pressed, the sequence is reversed.
SELECT (1-4) SELECT (1-4) .....
1:NO SOUND 2:LOW
∗ [CLEAR] key: FAX control is terminated.
3) [OK] key
STORED
xxx
xxx: Set content
After 2sec, FAX control is terminated.

AL-1556/1566 TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 36


Main Sub
Contents Details of function/operation
code code
66 38 Time setting/check [Function]
(AL-1566) Use to check the time setting.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
SELECT TO SET
1:DATE 2:TIME
∗ [CLEAR] key: FAX control is terminated.

2) Select 1 2) Select 2
xxxx.xx.xx(xxx) xx:xx
CHANGE? 1:YES 2:NO CHANGE? 1:YES 2:NO
"xxxx.xx.xx(xxx)" is the current value. (No revi- "xx:xx" is the current value.
sion of display)
3) Select 1 3) Select 1
INPUT YEAR INPUT HOUR
(4 DIGITS)____.__.__ (0-24) __:__
∗ Select 2: Returns to "1) Initial display". ∗ Select 2: Returns to "1) Initial display".
4) Enter the year in 4 digits. 4) Enter o'clock in 2 digits.
INPUT MONTH INPUT MINUTE
(1-12) 1998.__.__ (00-59) 01:__
5) Enter the month in 2 digits. 5) Enter minute in 2 digits.
INPUT DAY xx:xx
(1-31) 1998.01.__ STORED? 1:YES 2:NO
6) Enter the day in 2 digits. "xx:xx" is the current value.
xxxx.xx.xx(xxx) ∗ Select 2: Returns to "1) Initial display".
STORED? 1:YES 2:NO 6) Select 1
"xxxx.xx.xx(xxx) is the entered value.
STORED
∗ Select 2: Returns to "1) Initial display".
7) Select 1 After 2sec, returns to "1) Initial display".
STORED

After 2sec, returns to "1) Initial display".

41 CI signal check (AL-1566) [Function]


Use to check the CI signal.
When CI signal is detected, OFF → ON.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
CHECKING CI:OFF
PRESS CLEAR TO STOP
∗ [CLEAR] key: FAX control is terminated.

AL-1556/1566 TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 37


5. FAX soft switch (AL-1566)
A. FAX soft switch setting change quick reference table
Large item Middle item Switch content Key operator Soft SW No. Usage
Dialing Remote machine call Pause time None SW 5-5 – 8 When dialing disable/when error dialing
disable Dial call signal User program SW 48-1, 2 When dialing disable
DTMF-related item None SW 51-1 – 5 When dialing disable in PBX (private branch
exchange/Fax service, etc.)
None SW 53-5 – 8 When dialing disable in PBX (private branch
exchange/Fax service, etc.)
None SW 39-4 – 8 When dialing disable in PBX (private branch
exchange/Fax service, etc.)
Pulse (10PPS) None SW 67-1 – 4 When pulse dialing disable
Signal detection Busy tone detection None SW 7-3 When busy tone detection disable
Busy tone detection None SW 51-7, 8 When busy tone error is detected
Dial tone detection None SW 7-2
Redial In case of an error Resend interval User program SW 4-1 – 4 When send errors occur frequently
In case of an error Number of times of resend User program SW 40-1 – 8
When busy Resend interval User program SW 4-5 – 8 Whey busy occurs frequently
When busy Number of times of resend User program SW 41-1 – 8
Arrival (Call-in) When CI detection CI detection None SW 12-6, 7 No call-in
disable CI signal OFF detection None SW 55-1 – 7 No call-in
time
External Setting of an external Yes/No None SW 47-2 When an external telephone is connected
telephone telephone connected
Remote switch Entry of a 2-digit number User program SW 2-5 – 8 When remote switch is erroneously detected
number
Remote switch Yes/No User program SW 8-5 When remote switch is erroneously detected
setting
Communication General Send level None SW 15-4 – 8 When the remote machine cannot receive
signals in a proper level.
JBIG mode None SW 17-4, 8 When an error occurs in the JBIG mode
SG3 V34 mode function setup None SW 43-1 When SG3 communication error occurs
frequently
V34 symbol rate None SW43-4 – 6 When SG3 communication error occurs
frequently
Transmission G3/SG3 DIS reception check None SW 6-8 When an error occurs in phase B
Line equalizer None SW 59-5 – 8 Setting is made referring to the distance from the
station when a communication trouble occurs.
SG3 V34 send speed None SW 44-1 – 4 When an error occurs in the SG3 communication.
Manual send V34 None SW 42-8 When an error occurs in the SG3 communication
in FAX service, etc.
G3 Modem send speed None SW 16-1 – 4 To specified/unspecified destination
RTN reception error None SW 52-5 When judged as “OK” though RTN is received
Reception G3/SG3 CSI transmission None SW 6-3
Maximum reception length None SW 7-6 When a document of 1m or longer is received
SG3 V34 reception speed None SW 44-5 – 8 When fall-down occurs frequently in the SG3
communication
G3 Countermeasure against None SW 6-4 When an error occurs in phase B in reception
echo in reception
Modem speed in reception None SW 16-5, 6 When the line quality is poor and a fall-back or an
error occurs
EYE-Q check only None SW 72-1 Change in the detection method of training error
Reception print Paper selection Automatic reduction print User program SW 24-8 When reduction print is not made
Index Index print setup User program SW 32-6 When an index is attached to the reception data

AL-1556/1566 TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 38


B. Soft switch list
∗ When outside the set range, the default value is automatically set.
∗ Never change the soft switch setup which are inhibited to use.

SW Data
Item Switch selection and contents of functions Initial value Remark
NO. No.
1 Image quality priority Bit No. 1 2 Refer to User program
0
selection Normal 0 0 “RESO.PRIORITY”.
2 Fine 0 1 Normal When a value outside
Super fine 1 0 0 the set range is set,
the initial value is set.
3 Inhibited to use 0
4 Auto/Manual default 1: Manual reception 0: Automatic reception Manual reception can
S
setup Automatic be set only when
W 0
reception external telephone is
1
connected.
5 Send request protection 1: Not protected 0: Protected Refer to User program
Protected 0 “SECURITY
SELECTION”.
6 Inhibited to use 0
7 0
8 0
1 Inhibited to use 0
2 0
3 0
4 0
S
5 Remote selection Binary input 0 Refer to User program
W
6 number setup Bit No. 5 6 7 8 1 “REMOTE
2
7 Set range 0 to 9 RECEPTION #”.
5 0 When a value outside

8 the set range is set,


1 the initial value is set.

1 Density default setup Bit No. 1 2 3 4 5 0 When a value outside


2 Light 1 0 0 0 0 0 the set range is set,
3 Medium 0 0 1 0 0 Medium 1 the initial value is set.
4 Dark 0 0 0 0 1 0
5 0
S 6 Inhibited to use 1
W 7 Size specification Bit No. 7 8 When set to
3 Centimeter size 0 0 0 conformity to the
Inch size 1 0 Conforms to the machine information,
8 Conforms to the machine 0 1 machine if machine information
information. information. is uncertain, set to
1 centimeter size.
Conforms to the machine 1 1
information.
1 Recall interval in Binary input 0 Refer to User program
2 communication error Bit No. 1 2 3 4 0 “RECALL INTERVAL
3 Set range 1 to 15min (LINE ERROR)”.
1min 0 When a value outside
0: Recall immediately after
4 cutting the line the set range is set,
S 1 the initial value is set.
W
5 Recall interval in busy Binary input 0 Refer to User program
4
6 Bit No. 5 6 7 8 0 “RECALL INTERVAL
7 Set range 1 to 15min (BUSY)”.
3min 1 When a value outside

8 the set range is set,


1 the initial value is set.

AL-1556/1566 TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 39


SW Data
Item Switch selection and contents of functions Initial value Remark
NO. No.
1 Inhibited to use 0
2 0
3 G3 send data Bit No. 3 4
accumulation wait time 6sec 0 0 0
S 5sec 0 1 6sec
W 4 4sec 1 0
0
5 3sec 1 1
5 Pause time setup Binary input 0 When a value outside
6 Bit No. 5 6 7 8 0 the set range is set,
2sec
7 Set range 1 to 15sec 1 the initial value is set.
8 0
1 ECM 1: Yes 0: No Yes 1
2 CED signal send 1: Yes 0: No Yes 1
3 CSI transmission 1: Yes 0: No Yes 1
4 DIS reception 1: 2 times 0: Once in NFS reception, Once in NFS
confirmation in G3 send 2 time in DIS reception reception, 2 time 0
in DIS reception
5 Inhibited to use 0
S
W 6 EOL detection timer 1: 25sec 0: 13sec 13sec 0
6 7 Countermeasure for 1: 500ms 0: 75ms
echo in reception (CED 75ms 0
tone send interval)
8 Countermeasure for 1: 500ms 0: 200ms
echo in transmission
(After reception of DIS, 200ms 0
hold time up to signal
send is set.)
1 Inhibited to use 0
2 Dial tone detection 1: Yes 0: No No 0
3 Busy tone detection 1: Yes 0: No Yes 1
4 Dial tone monitoring 1: 10sec 0: 5sec
5sec 0
time
S 5 Inhibited to use 0
W
6 Max. length of reception 1: No limit 0: 1.5m 1.5m 0
7
7 Destination display time Bit No. 7 8 When a value outside
when one-touch key is 2sec 0 0 0 the set range is set,
pressed 4sec 0 1 2sec the initial value is set.
8 6sec 1 0
0
1 1
1 Memory transmission/ 1: Direct transmission 0: Memory transmission
Memory
direct transmission 0
transmission
default setup
2 Proxy reception 1: Yes 0: No Yes 1
3 Inhibited to use 0
S 4 Quick online send 1: Yes 0: No Yes 1
W 5 Remote select function 1: Yes 0: No Refer to User program
8 “REMOTE
Yes 1
RECEPTION
SELECT”.
6 Number of times of Binary input 0 When a value outside
7 CNG detection Bit No. 6 7 8 3 times 1 the set range is set,
8 Set range 1 to 4 times 1 the initial value is set.
1 Print of total 1: Yes 0: No
communication time Yes 1
and total pages
2 Inhibited to use 0
S 3 Ringing volume pattern Binary input 0 When a value outside
W number
4 Bit No. 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 the set range is set,
9
5 Set range Pattern No. 1 to 35 0 the initial value is set.
1
6 0
7 0
8 1

AL-1556/1566 TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 40


SW Data
Item Switch selection and contents of functions Initial value Remark
NO. No.
1 Measurement of 1: Yes 0: No
communication time Yes 1
(image)
2 Sender’s telephone 1: Inhibit 0: Allow
Allow 0
S number registration
W 3 Inhibited to use 0
10 4 0
5 0
6 ECM byte/frame 1: 64 [bytes/frame] 0: 256 [bytes/frame] 256 [bytes/frame] 0
7 Inhibited to use 0
8 0
1 Scanner resource Binary input 0
2 holding time out in direct Bit No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0
3 send Set range 1 to 255sec 0
S 0: No time out
4 1
W 26sec
5 1
11
6 0
7 1
8 0
1 Call time setup in Binary input 0 When a value outside
2 automatic transmission Bit No. 1 2 3 4 0 the set range is set,
3 (T0 timer setup) Set range 30 to 75sec 45sec 1 the initial value is set.
4 5sec unit
1
N x 5 + 30sec
S 5 Inhibited to use 0
W
6 CI detection Bit No. 6 7 When a value outside
12
4 sine wave 0 0 0 the set range is set,
3 sine wave 1 0 4 sine wave the initial value is set.
7 2 sine wave 0 1
0
1 1
8 Inhibited to use 1
1 Inhibited to use 0
2 0
3 Ringing volume Bit No. 3 4 Refer to User program
Silent 0 0 1 “RINGER VOLUME”.
Small 0 1 Medium
4 Medium 1 0
S 0
Large 1 1
W
5 Speaker volume in Bit No. 5 6
13
DTMF send Not used 0 0 1
Small 0 1 Medium
6 Medium 1 0
0
Large 1 1
7 Inhibited to use 1
8 1
1 Inhibited to use 0
2 1
3 0
S
4 1
W
5 0
14
6 0
7 0
8 0
1 Busy tone detection 1: 350ms 0: 250ms
250ms 0
time (Lower limit)
2 Busy tone detection 1: 650ms 0: 750ms
750ms 0
time (Upper limit)
S 3 Busy tone detection 1: 150ms 0: Follows SW15-1.
Follows SW15-1. 0
W time (Lower limit 2)
15 4 Signal send level Binary input 0 When a value outside
5 Bit No. 4 5 6 7 8 1 the set range is set,
6 Set range 0 (0dBm) to 26 (–26dBm) –11dBm 0 the initial value is set.
7 1
8 1

AL-1556/1566 TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 41


SW Data
Item Switch selection and contents of functions Initial value Remark
NO. No.
1 Modem speed Bit No. 1 2 3 4
(V.33 mode or less) V.27 2400bps 0 0 0 0 1
V.29 9600bps 0 0 0 1
2 V.27 4800bps 0 0 1 0
V.29 7200bps 0 0 1 1 0
V.33 14.4kbps 0 1 0 0 V.17 14.4kbps
3 V.33 12.0kbps 0 1 1 0
V.17 9600bps 1 0 0 1 0
S
V.17 12.0kbps 1 0 1 0
W
4 V.17 7200bps 1 0 1 1
16 0
V.17 14.4kbps Others
5 Modem speed in Bit No. 5 6
reception fixed No fixing 0 0 0
V.29-9600BPS 0 1 No fixing
6 V.27ter-4800BPS 1 0
0
V.17-14400BPS 1 1
7 Inhibited to use 0
8 0
1 Inhibited to use 0
2 MH fixed (Except for 1: Yes 0: No (depending on the other
No 0
SG3) party’s machine)
3 ECM MMR mode 1: Yes 0: No
Yes 1
(Except for SG3)
4 ECM JBIG mode 1: Yes 0: No
S Yes 1
(Except for SG3)
W
5 Inhibited to use 0
17
6 MH fixed (in SG3) 1: Yes 0: No (depending on the other
No 0
party’s machine)
7 ECM MMR mode (in 1: Yes 0: No
Yes 1
SG3)
8 ECM JBIG mode (in 1: Yes 0: No
Yes 1
SG3)
1 Inhibited to use 1
2 1
3 0
S
4 1
W
5 0
18
6 0
7 0
8 0
1 Inhibited to use 0
2 1
3 0
S 4 0
W 5 0
19 6 Recording table 1: Yes 0: No Refer to User program
No 0
automatic print “AUTO LISTING”.
7 Inhibited to use 0
8 0
1 Line sound monitor Bit No. 1 2 When a value outside
range OFF 0 0 the set range is set,
0 the initial value is set.
Up to NSF signal send/ 0 1
OFF
receive
2 All 1 0
0
S 1 1
W 3 Line monitor display 1: Yes 0: No No 0
20 4 Inhibited to use 0
5 Receivable memory 1: 64Kbyte 0: 128Kbyte
128Kbyte 0
capacity
6 Inhibited to use 0
7 0
8 0

AL-1556/1566 TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 42


SW Data
Item Switch selection and contents of functions Initial value Remark
NO. No.
1 Interval between Binary input 0
2 completion of Bit No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0
3 communication and the Set range 0 to 255sec 0
S next call
4 0
W 6sec
5 0
21
6 1
7 1
8 1
1 Inhibited to use 0
2 0
3 0
S
4 0
W
5 0
22
6 0
7 0
8 0
1 Inhibited to use 0
2 0
3 0
S
4 0
W
5 0
23
6 0
7 0
8 0
1 Inhibited to use 0
2 0
3 Specified number Bit No. 3 4 Refer to Main menu
0
reception (ANTI JUNK Not set. 0 0 “ANTI JUNK FAX”.
4 FAX) Receive inhibit 0 1 Not set. When a value outside
0 the set range is set,
S the initial value is set.
W 5 Inhibited to use 0
24 6 Document output setup 1: Collective output after 0: Output after reception of Collective output
in reception completion of reception every page after completion 1
of reception
7 Inhibited to use 0
8 Automatic reduction 1: Allow 0: Inhibit Refer to User program
print Allow 1 “AUTO RCV
REDUCE”.
1 Automatic reduction Binary input 1
2 rate setup Bit No. 1 2 3 4 0
10%
3 Set range 0 to 15% 1
4 0
5 Transmission end Bit No. 5 6 When a value outside
S 0
sound tone 550Hz 0 0 the set range is set,
W 1000Hz the initial value is set.
6 1000Hz 0 1
25 1
1700Hz 1 0
7 Reception end sound Bit No. 7 8 When a value outside
0
tone 550Hz 0 0 the set range is set,
1000Hz the initial value is set.
8 1000Hz 0 1
1
1700Hz 1 0
1 Read completion sound 1: Mute 0: 1sec 1sec 0
2 Inhibited to use 0
3 Speaker volume setup Bit No. 3 4 Refer to User program
Silent 0 0 0 “BEEPER VOLUME
Small 0 1 (send completion
S 4 Medium 1 0 Small sound / receive
W Large 1 1 completion sound /
1 scan completion
26
sound / alarm sound)”
5 Inhibited to use 0
6 0
7 0
8 0

AL-1556/1566 TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 43


SW Data
Item Switch selection and contents of functions Initial value Remark
NO. No.
1 Inhibited to use 0
2 1
3 1
4 1
S 5 1
W 6 0
27 7 Recording paper tray Bit No. 7 8 Refer to User program
selection AUTO 0 0 0 “TRAY SELECTION”.
TRAY1 0 1 AUTO When a value outside
8 TRAY2 1 0 the set range is set,
0 the initial value is set.
1 1
1 Inhibited to use 1
2 1
3 0
S
4 1
W
5 0
28
6 0
7 0
8 0
1 Number of auto switch Binary input 0 Refer to User program
2 calls of manual Bit No. 1 2 3 4 0 “# OF RINGS
3 reception → auto Set range 0 to 9 MANUAL RX”.
reception 0 time 0 When a value outside
Not switched when 0.
4 the set range is set,
S 0 the initial value is set.
W
5 Setup of number of Binary input 0 Refer to User program
29
6 times of call rings Bit No. 5 6 7 8 0 “# OF RINGS AUTO
7 Set range 0 to 9 times RX”.
2 times 1 When a value outside

8 the set range is set,


0 the initial value is set.

1 Report output when 1: Output 0: Not output


Not output 0
canceling
2 Inhibited to use 0
3 1
S 4 0
W 5 Default data, sender 1: ON 0: OFF
ON 1
30 print
6 Inhibited to use 0
7 Date/sender print 1: Inside of document 0: Outside of document Outside of
0
position setup document
8 Inhibited to use 1

AL-1556/1566 TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 44


∗: A = U.K., Netherlands, Luxembourg, Belgium / B = Germany, Sweden, Spain, Portugal, Italy, Switzerland, Finland, Denmark, Norway / C = France
SW Data ∗
Item Switch selection and contents of functions Initial value Remark
NO. No. A B C
1 Report output Bit No. 1 2 Refer to User program
(in transmission) Print inhibited 0 0 1 1 1 “PRINT
Only when SELECTION”.
All print 0 1
transmission is When a value outside
2 Only when 1 0
failed.
transmission is failed. 0 0 0 the set range is set,
the initial value is set.
1 1
3 Report output Bit No. 3 4 Refer to User program
(In broadcast and Print inhibited 0 0 0 0 0 “PRINT
sequential send All print 0 1 SELECTION”.
4 request) Only the address to 1 0 All print When a value outside
which transmission is the set range is set,
1 1 1 the initial value is set.
failed
S
W 1 1
31 5 Report output Bit No. 5 6 Refer to User program
(in reception) Print inhibited 0 0 0 0 0 “PRINT
All print 0 1 SELECTION”.
Print inhibited
6 Only in error 1 0 When a value outside
1 1 0 0 0 the set range is set,
the initial value is set.
7 Contents of send Bit No. 7 8 Refer to User program
document are printed in Print inhibited 0 0 1 1 1 “PRINT
memory send Only the address SELECTION”.
All print 0 1
to which When a value outside
8 Only the address to 1 0
transmission is the set range is set,
which transmission is
failed 0 0 0 the initial value is set.
failed
1 1
1 Inhibited to use 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
S 4 0 0 0
W 5 0 0 0
32 6 Index print setup 1: Print 0: Not print Refer to User program
Not print 0 0 0
“INDEX PRINT”.
7 Inhibited to use 0 1 1
8 0 0 0
1 Page number print 1: Yes 0: No
Yes 1 1 1
setup
2 Inhibited to use 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
S
4 0 0 0
W
5 0 0 0
33
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
8 Reception data duplex 1: Yes 0: No Refer to User program
No 0 0 0
print “DUPLEX RCV”.
1 Flash send wait time Bit No. 1 2
(U.K., Netherlands, 0sec 0 0 0 1 0
Luxembourg, Belgium, 0.5sec 0 1 1sec
2 France: Inhibited to use) 1sec 1 0
0 0 0
S 2sec 1 1
W 3 Inhibited to use 0 0 0
34 4 0 0 0
5 Signal send level Max. Binary input 1 1 1
6 Bit No. 5 6 7 8 0 0 0
–8dBm
7 Set range 0 (0dBm) to 15 (–15dBm) 0 0 0
8 0 0 0

AL-1556/1566 TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 45


SW Data
Item Switch selection and contents of functions Initial value Remark
NO. No.
1 Cover function default 1: Yes 0: No
No 0
setup
2 Answering telephone 1: Yes 0: No
Yes 1
connection
3 CI delete max. OFF Bit No. 3 4
S time 5sec 0 0 0
W 10sec 0 1 10sec
35 4 15sec 1 0
1
20sec 1 1
5 Answering machine call Binary input 0
6 number setting Bit No. 5 6 7 8 1
6 times
7 Set range 0 to 15 times 1
8 0
1 CNG/mute detection Binary input 0 When a value outside
2 completion time Bit No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 the set range is set,
3 Set range 1 to 255sec 1 the initial value is set.
S
4 0
W 45sec
5 1
36
6 1
7 0
8 1
1 Silence detection start Binary input 0
2 time Bit No. 1 2 3 4 1
5sec
3 Set range 0 to 15sec 0
S 4 1
W 5 Mute judgment time Binary input 0 Refer to User program
37 6 Bit No. 5 6 7 8 1 “AM MODE”.
7 Set range 0 to 15sec 5sec 0
8 (User 0 to 10sec)
0: Mute detection OFF 1

1 Protocol monitor Bit No. 1 2


Not output 0 0 0
Not output 0 1 Not output
2 Output 1 0
0
Output only in an error 1 1
3 Protocol monitor save 1: Yes 0: No Yes 1
S
4 Inhibited to use 0
W
5 Flash send time Bit No. 5 6
38
(U.K., Netherlands, 90ms 0 0 0
Luxembourg, Belgium, 180ms 0 1 90ms
6 France: Inhibited to use) 270ms 1 0
0
360ms 1 1
7 Transfer function 1: Allow 0: Inhibit Inhibit 1
8 Inhibited to use 0
1 Inhibited to use 0
2 0
3 1
S
4 DTMF signal send time Binary input 0 When a value outside
W
5 Bit No. 4 5 6 7 8 1 the set range is set,
39
6 Set range 70 to 310ms 110ms 0 the initial value is set.
7 10ms unit 1
8 1
1 Number of times of Binary input 0 Refer to User program
2 recall in error Bit No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 “RECALL TIMES
3 Set range 0 to 5 times 0 (LINE ERROR)”.
S When a value outside
4 0
W 1 times the set range is set,
5 0
40 the initial value is set.
6 0
7 0
8 1

AL-1556/1566 TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 46


SW Data
Item Switch selection and contents of functions Initial value Remark
NO. No.
1 Number of times of Binary input 0 Refer to User program
2 recall in busy Bit No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 “RECALL TIMES
3 Set range 0 to 10 times 0 (BUSY)”.
S When a value outside
4 0
W 2 times the set range is set,
5 0
41 the initial value is set.
6 0
7 1
8 0
1 Inhibited to use 0
2 FAX receive auto select 1: Allow 0: Inhibit Refer to User program
by CNG detection Allow 1 “FAX SIGNAL AUTO
RECEIVE”.
3 Auto receive select in 1: Allow 0: Inhibit Refer to Main menu
S answering telephone Inhibit 0 “AM MODE”.
W connection mode
42 4 Inhibited to use 1
5 0
6 0
7 0
8 V.34 mode function in 1: ON 0: OFF
ON 1
manual communication
1 V.34 mode function 1: ON 0: OFF ON 1
2 Busy tone detection 1: variable (SRAM) 0: constant (ROM)
constant (ROM) 0
level table
3 V.34 primary channel 1: PPh 0: Sh
PPh 1
return mode
4 V.34 receive symbol Bit No. 4 5 6 When a value outside
speed mask 2400 0 0 0 1 the set range is set,
S 2743 0 0 1 the initial value is set.
W 5 2800 0 1 0 3429
43 0
3000 0 1 1
6 3200 1 0 0
1
3429 1 0 1
7 Silence detection level 1: variable (SRAM) 0: constant (ROM)
constant (ROM) 0
table
8 Control channel retrain 1: Ignore EQM value 0: Judge EQM value
judgment in V.34 Judge EQM value 0
reception
1 V.34 primary channel Binary input 1
2 send speed Bit No. 1 2 3 4 1
33600bps
3 Send speed = When N = 0, 2400bps. 1
S 2400 (bps) x N When N = 15, 33600bps.
4 0
W
5 V.34 primary channel Binary input 1
44
6 receive speed Bit No. 5 6 7 8 1
33600bps
7 Receive speed = When N = 0, 2400bps. 1
8 2400 (bps) x N When N = 15, 33600bps. 0
1 FAST mode 1: Yes 0: No No 0
2 Sequence of year/ Bit No. 2 3 Refer to User program
month/day in LCD, Year/Month/Day 0 0 1 “DATE&TIME
report, and sender Month/Day/Year 0 1 FORMAT SET”.
record Day/Month/Year When a value outside
3 Day/Month/Year 1 0
the set range is set,
1 1 0
S the initial value is set.
W
45 4 Time display format 1: am/pm 0: 24H Refer to User program
24H 0 “DATE&TIME
FORMAT SET”.
5 Scan effective image Binary input 0
6 area main scan right Bit No. 5 6 7 8 1
edge image loss (SPF) 96 dots
7 Set range 0 to ± 360 dots 0
8 24 dot interval 0

AL-1556/1566 TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 47


∗: A = U.K., Netherlands, Luxembourg, Belgium / B = Germany, Sweden, Spain, Portugal, Italy, Switzerland, Finland, Denmark, Norway / C = France
SW Data ∗
Item Switch selection and contents of functions Initial value Remark
NO. No. A B C
1 Specification of print 1: Print order (214365...) 0: Reception order Print order
1 1 1
sequence in duplex print (123456...) (214365...)
2 Specification of rotating 1: 180 degrees rotation 0: No 180 degrees rotation
180 degrees
direction duplex back 1 1 1
rotation
surface print
3 Priority in the day of 1: Yes 0: No No (A)
0 1 1
week Yes (B, C)
4 Center No. in FAST 1: Host-Tel-No. 0: Service-No.
S Service-No. 0 0 0
mode
W
5 Summer time 1: Allow 0: Inhibit Refer to Entry Mode
46
Allow 1 1 1 “DAY LIGHT
SAVING”.
6 PBX setting Bit No. 6 7 8 Refer to User program
0 0 0
(U.K., Netherlands, Setting OFF 0 0 0 “PBX SETTING
7 Luxembourg, Belgium: Flash send 1 0 1 MODE”.
Inhibited to use) Setting OFF 0 0 0 When a value outside
ID send 1 1 0
8 the set range is set,
0 0 0 the initial value is set.

1 Inhibited to use 1 1 1
2 External telephone 1: Yes 0: No
Yes 1 1 1
connection
S 3 Inhibited to use 0 0 0
W 4 0 0 0
47 5 0 0 0
6 1 1 1
7 0 0 0
8 0 0 0
1 Tone/Pulse default Bit No. 1 2 01 (20PPS) is invalid
setup 10PPS 0 0 1 1 1 except for Japan.
20PPS 0 1 Refer to User program
2 TONE 1 0 TONE “DIAL MODE”.
1 1 When a value outside
0 0 0 the set range is set,
S the initial value is set.
W 3 Telephone line menu 1: Inhibit 0: Allow Inhibit 1 1 1
48
4 DP dial pulse number 1: 10-N 0: Normal (N)
Normal (N) 0 0 0
process
5 Scan effective image Binary input 0 0
0
6 area main scan left Bit No. 5 6 7 8 1 1
1
edge image loss (SPF) 96 dots
7 Set range 0 to 360 dots 0 0
0
8 24 dot interval 0 0
0
1 Inhibited to use 0 0
0
2 0 0
0
3 Speaker sound volume Binary input 0 0
0 When a value outside
S pattern number in
4 Bit No. 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 0 the set range is set,
0
W DTMF send
5 Set range Pattern No. 1 to 35 0 0 the initial value is set.
0
49 21
6 0 0
0
7 0 0
0
8 1 1
1
1 Line monitor volume Bit No. 1 2 When SPEAKER key
Silent 0 0 1 1 1 is pressed, user
Small 0 1 Medium setting can be made.
2 Medium 1 0
0 0 0
S Large 1 1
W 3 Line monitor volume Binary input 0 0 0 When a value outside
50 4 pattern number Bit No. 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 1 1 the set range is set,
5 Set range Pattern No. 1 to 35 0 0 0 the initial value is set.
16
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
8 0 0 0

AL-1556/1566 TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 48


SW Data
Item Switch selection and contents of functions Initial value Remark
NO. No.
1 DTMF send level (High Binary input 0 When a value outside
2 group) setup Bit No. 1 2 3 4 5 0 the set range is set,
3 Set range 0 (0.0dBm) to 21 (–21.0dBm) –6dBm 1 the initial value is set.
4 1.0dBm unit 1
S 5 0
W 6 CED detection time 1: 500ms 0: 1000ms 1000ms 0
51 7 Busy tone detection Bit No. 7 8
cycle 2puls 0 0 0
4puls 0 1 2puls
8 6puls 1 0
0
10puls 1 1
1 Busy tone detection Bit No. 1 2
level –43dB 0 0 0
–35dB 0 1 –43dB
2 –33dB 1 0
0
–30dB 1 1
3 Inhibited to use 0
S 4 Super G3 disabled in 1: Super G3 enabled 0: Super G3 disabled
W Super G3
the last call-out of recall 0
disabled
52 in case of an error
5 Error process in RTN 1: Not error 0: Error
Error 0
reception
6 Inhibited to use 0
7 0
8 V.34 control channel 1: 2400bps 0: 1200bps
1200bps 0
communication speed
1 Maximum DTMF send Binary input 0
2 level Bit No. 1 2 3 4 0
0dBm
3 Set range 0 (0.0dBm) to 15 (–15.0dBm) 0
4 0
S
5 DTMF send level Binary input 1
W
6 (difference between Bit No. 5 6 7 8 0
53
7 high and low level) Set range 0 (–2.0dBm) to 15 (+5.5dBm)
+2.0dBm 0
0.5dBm unit
8 When set to 0: Low group =
High group – (–2.0) dBm 0

1 Scan effective image Binary input 0


2 area sub scan lead Bit No. 1 2 3 4 1
edge image loss (SPF) 96 lines
3 Set range 0 to 240 lines 1
S 16 line interval
4 0
W
5 Scan effective image Binary input 1
54
6 area sub scan rear edge Bit No. 5 6 7 8 0
image loss (SPF) 144 lines
7 Set range 0 to 240 lines 0
8 16 line interval 1
1 CI signal OFF detection Binary input 1
2 enable time Bit No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1
3 Set range 0 to 1270ms 1
S 10ms unit
4 1200ms 1
W
5 0
55
6 0
7 0
8 Inhibited to use 0
1 CI signal ON detection Binary input 0
2 enable time Bit No. 1 2 3 155ms 0
3 Set range 0 (155ms) to 7 (225ms) 0
4 Inhibited to use 0
S 5 DT/BT detection Bit No. 5 6
W frequency range Modem fixed (400Hz) 0 0 1
56 420Hz–680Hz 0 1 245Hz–650Hz
6 360Hz–440Hz 1 0
1
245Hz–650Hz 1 1
7 Inhibited to use 0
8 1

AL-1556/1566 TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 49


SW Data
Item Switch selection and contents of functions Initial value Remark
NO. No.
1 Inhibited to use 0
2 Sharp machine mode 1: ON 0: OFF ON 1
3 Inhibited to use 0
S
4 Reception gain Binary input 0
W
5 adjustment Bit No. 4 5 6 7 8 1
57
6 Set range 0 (+6.0dBm) to 24 (–6.0dBm) 0.0dBm 1
7 Step 0.5dBm 0
8 0
1 Dual wait inhibit time Binary input 1
2 after CFR send Bit No. 1 2 3 4 0
1600ms
3 Set range 0 to 3000ms 0
S 200ms unit
4 0
W
5 FSK signal settlement Binary input 0
58
6 time in double wait Bit No. 5 6 7 8 1
550ms
7 Set range Settlement time = 50 (ms) x N 1
8 + 200 (ms) 1
1 Inhibited to use 0
2 0
3 Reception SED ON Bit No. 3 4
level –43dB 0 0 1
–38dB 0 1 –48dB
4 –33dB 1 0
1
–48dB 1 1
S 5 Transmission cable Bit No. 5 6
W amplitude equalizer 0dB 0 0 0
59 4dB 0 1 0dB
6 8dB 1 0
0
12dB 1 1
7 Reception cable Bit No. 7 8
amplitude equalizer 0dB 0 0 0
4dB 0 1 0dB
8 8dB 1 0
0
12dB 1 1
1 Scan effective image Binary input 0
2 area sub scan lead Bit No. 1 2 3 4 1
edge image loss (SPF 96 lines
3 Set range 0 to 240 lines 1
S back surface) 16 line interval
4 0
W
5 Scan effective image Binary input 1
60
6 area sub scan rear edge Bit No. 5 6 7 8 0
image loss (SPF back 144 lines
7 Set range 0 to 240 lines 0
8 surface) 16 line interval 1
1 Inhibited to use 0
2 0
3 0
S
4 0
W
5 0
61
6 0
7 1
8 0
1 Inhibited to use 0
2 CI signal ON time in V.8 1: 18byte (480ms) 0: 9byte (240ms)
9byte (240ms) 0
mode
3 CI signal OFF time in 1: 2sec 0: 1sec
1sec 0
V.8 mode
S 4 V.8 mode ANSam Bit No. 4 5
W signal send time 3sec 0 0 0
62 4sec 0 1 4sec
5 5sec 1 0
1
6sec 1 1
6 Inhibited to use 0
7 0
8 0

AL-1556/1566 TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 50


∗: A = U.K., Netherlands, Luxembourg, Belgium / B = Germany, Sweden, Spain, Portugal, Italy, Switzerland, Finland, Denmark, Norway / C = France
SW Data ∗
Item Switch selection and contents of functions Initial value Remark
NO. No. A B C
1 CI receive number to Bit No. 1 2
shift to non-V.34 Does not shift. 0 0 1 1 1
communication 1 times 0 1 2 times
2 2 times 1 0
0 0 0
3 times 1 1
S 3 CI send number to shift Binary input 0 0 0
W 4 to non-V.34 Bit No. 3 4 5 1 1 1
63 5 communication Set range 0 to 7 times 2
When N=0, retrain is not 0 0 0
made.
6 Inhibited to use 0 0 0
7 1 1 1
8 1 1 1
1 Inhibited to use 0 0 0
2 1 1 1
3 0 0 0
S
4 0 0 0
W
5 0 0 0
64
6 1 1 1
7 1 1 1
8 0 0 0
1 Inhibited to use 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
S
4 0 0 0
W
5 0 0 0
65
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
8 0 0 0
1 Inhibited to use 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
S
4 0 0 0
W
5 0 0 0
66
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
8 0 0 0
1 Make time (10PPS) Binary input 0 1 0
2 setup Bit No. 1 2 3 4 33ms (A, C) 1 1 1
3 Set range 26 to 41ms 41ms (B) 1 1 1
S by increment of 1ms
4 1 1 1
W
5 Inhibited to use 0 0 0
67
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
8 0 0 0
1 Line open delay time in Bit No. 1 2
dial test 2sec 0 0 0 0 0
3sec 0 1 2sec
2 4sec 1 0
0 0 0
S 5sec 1 1
W 3 Inhibited to use 0 0 0
68 4 0 0 0
5 T1 timer setup Binary input 0 0 0
6 Bit No. 5 6 7 8 0 0 0
40sec
7 Set range 30 to 105sec 1 1 1
8 5sec interval 0 0 0

AL-1556/1566 TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 51


SW Data
Item Switch selection and contents of functions Initial value Remark
NO. No.
1 Inhibited to use 0
2 0
3 0
S
4 0
W
5 0
69
6 0
7 0
8 0
1 Inhibited to use 0
2 1
3 0
4 Reception waiting time 1: 4.4sec 0: 3.4sec
3.4sec 0
between frames
5 Preamble send time of Bit No. 5 6
S 300bps 0.5sec 0 0 0
W 1.0sec 0 1 1.0sec
70 6 1.5sec 1 0
1
2.0sec 1 1
7 RCP send times Bit No. 7 8
3 times 0 0 0
6 times 0 1 3 times
8 9 times 1 0
0
12 times 1 1
1 Inhibited to use 0
2 0
3 0
S
4 0
W
5 1
71
6 1
7 0
8 0
1 EYE-Q check 1: EYE-Q check only 0: 0 reception & EYE-Q check 0 reception &
0
EYE-Q check
2 ERR frame reception 1: Continues process. 0: Not continue process. Not continue
0
operation (Error) process. (Error)
3 Waiting time for CED/ Bit No. 3 4 When a value outside
0
ANSam send start 2.25sec 0 0 the set range is set,
S 2.25sec the initial value is set.
4 3sec 0 1
W 0
4sec 1 0
72
5 RTC EOL send times 1: 6 times 0: 7 times 6 times 1
6 Inhibited to use 0
7 CNG send start Bit No. 7 8 When a value outside
0
0.5sec 0 0 the set range is set,
0.5sec the initial value is set.
8 1.0sec 0 1
0
1.5sec 1 0
1 Minimum flags between Bit No. 1 2
frames 2-flag 0 0 0
3-flag 0 1 2-flag
2 4-flag 1 0
0
5-flag 1 1
3 Phase C head dummy Bit No. 3 4
data send time 0.2sec 0 0 0
S 0.3sec 0 1 0.2sec
W 4 0.4sec 1 0
0
73 0.5sec 1 1
5 Inhibited to use 0
6 0
7 Flag-adrs timer setup Bit No. 7 8
(V.21-FSK) 6sec 0 0 0
15sec 0 1 6sec
8 30sec 1 0
0
120sec 1 1

AL-1556/1566 TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 52


SW Data
Item Switch selection and contents of functions Initial value Remark
NO. No.
1 Print effective image Binary input 0
2 area sub scan lead Bit No. 1 2 3 4 0
edge void 32 lines
3 Set range 0 to 240 lines 1
S 16 line interval (600dpi)
4 0
W
5 Inhibited to use 0
74
6 0
7 1
8 1
1 Inhibited to use 0
2 0
3 Communication end Bit No. 3 4 Communication error
sound (Buzzer sound 3sec 0 0 0 sound is generated
length) setting 1sec 0 1 even in silent setup
4 Silent 1 0 Refer to User program
S 3sec
“BEEP LENGTH”.
W
0 When a value outside
75
the set range is set,
the initial value is set.
5 Print effective image Binary input 0
6 area main scan void Bit No. 5 6 7 8 0
48 dots
7 Set range 0 to 240 dots 1
8 16 dots interval 1
1 Scan magnification ratio 1: – 0: + + 0
2 adjustment (SPF main Binary input 0
3 scan) Bit No. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0
S Set range 0 to ±12.7%
4 0
W 0.1% interval
5 0% 0
76
6 0
7 0
8 0
1 Scan magnification ratio 1: – 0: + + 0
2 adjustment (SPF sub Binary input 0
3 scan) Bit No. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0
S Set range 0 to ±12.7%
4 0
W 0.1% interval
5 0% 0
77
6 0
7 0
8 0
1 Print magnification 1: – 0: + + 0
2 ration adjustment (main Binary input 0
3 scan) Bit No. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0
S Set range 0 to ±12.7%
4 0
W 0.1% interval
5 0% 0
78
6 0
7 0
8 0
1 Print magnification 1: – 0: + + 0
2 ration adjustment (sub Binary input 0
3 scan) Bit No. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0
S Set range 0 to ±12.7%
4 0
W 0.1% interval
5 0% 0
79
6 0
7 0
8 0

AL-1556/1566 TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 53


SW Data
Item Switch selection and contents of functions Initial value Remark
NO. No.
1 Destination Binary input 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
information Bit No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 U.K. 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
2 U.K. (10110100) Germany 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
Germany (00000100) France 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1
3 France (00111101) Sweden 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1
Sweden (10100101)
Spain 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
Spain (10100000)
S 4 Portugal 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1
Portugal (10001011)
W Italy 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1
Italy (01011001)
80 5 Switzerland 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0
Switzerland (10100110)
Finland (00111100) Finland 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0
6 Denmark (00110001) Denmark 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1
Norway (10000010) Norway 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
7 Netherlands (01111011) Netherlands 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1
Luxembourg (01101001) Luxembourg 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1
8 Belgium (00001111) Belgium 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
1 Language Binary input 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Only command
information Bit No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 U.K.: 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 receive from the
2 0: Japanese 10: Turkish Germany: 4 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 main unit can be
1: American English 11: Greek France: 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 rewritten.
3 2: English 12: Polish Sweden: 7 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1
3: French 13: Hungarian Spain: 8 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
4: German 14: Czech
S 4 Portugal: 9 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1
5: Italian 15: Russian
W Italy: 5 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1
6: Dutch 16: Finnish
81 5 Switzerland: 4 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
7: Swedish 17: Norwegian
8: Spanish 18: Danish Finland: 16 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
6 9: Portuguese 19: Chinese Denmark: 18 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0
Norway: 17 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1
7 Netherlands: 6 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0
Luxembourg: 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
8 Belgium: 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
1 OC scan size Bit No. 1 2 3 4 Refer to User
0
default setting 0 0 0 0 program “OC SIZE
2 LETTER 0 0 0 1 PRIORITY”.
0 When a value
LEGAL 0 0 1 0 A4
outside the set
S 3 A4 0 0 1 1
1 range is set, the
W
initial value is set.
82 4 1
5 Inhibited to use 0
6 0
7 0
8 1
1 Inhibited to use 0
2 0
3 Speaker sound Binary input 0 When a value
S volume setting
4 Bit No. 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 outside the set
W pattern number
5 Set range Pattern No. 1 to 35 0 range is set, the
83 1
6 0 initial value is set.
7 0
8 1
1 Inhibited to use 0
2 0
3 1
S
4 0
W
5 1
84
6 1
7 0
8 0

AL-1556/1566 TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 54


SW Data
Item Switch selection and contents of functions Initial value Remark
NO. No.
1 Inhibited to use 0
2 0
3 0
S
4 1
W
5 0
85
6 0
7 0
8 0
1 Inhibited to use 0
2 0
3 0
S
4 0
W
5 0
86
6 0
7 0
8 0
1 Inhibited to use 1
2 0
3 0
S
4 0
W
5 1
87
6 1
7 0
8 1
1 Inhibited to use 0
2 0
3 0
S
4 0
W
5 0
88
6 0
7 0
8 0
1 Inhibited to use 0
2 0
3 1
S
4 1
W
5 1
89
6 1
7 1
8 1
1 Inhibited to use 1
2 1
3 1
S
4 1
W
5 1
90
6 1
7 1
8 1

AL-1556/1566 TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 55


SW Data
Item Switch selection and contents of functions Initial value Remark
NO. No.
1 Symbol speed 3429 1: Enable 0: Disable
send enable in V.34 Enable 1
send
2 Symbol speed 3200 1: Enable 0: Disable
high carrier send enable Enable 1
in V.34 send
3 Symbol speed 3200 low 1: Enable 0: Disable
carrier send enable in Enable 1
V.34 send
S 4 Symbol speed 3000 1: Enable 0: Disable
W high carrier send enable Enable 1
91 in V.34 send
5 Symbol speed 3000 low 1: Enable 0: Disable
carrier send enable in Enable 1
V.34 send
6 Symbol speed 3429 1: Enable 0: Disable
Enable 1
enable in V.34 send
7 Symbol speed 2800 1: Enable 0: Disable
Enable 1
enable in V.34 send
8 Symbol speed 2743 1: Enable 0: Disable
Enable 1
enable in V.34 send
1 Inhibited to use 0
2 1
3 0
S
4 1
W
5 1
92
6 0
7 0
8 0
1 Inhibited to use 0
2 1
3 0
S
4 1
W
5 1
93
6 0
7 0
8 0
1 Inhibited to use 0
2 1
3 0
S
4 1
W
5 1
94
6 0
7 0
8 0
1 Inhibited to use 0
2 1
3 1
S
4 1
W
5 0
95
6 0
7 0
8 0
1 Inhibited to use 1
2 1
3 0
S
4 1
W
5 1
96
6 0
7 0
8 0

AL-1556/1566 TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 56


SW Data
Item Switch selection and contents of functions Initial value Remark
NO. No.
1 Inhibited to use 0
2 1
3 1
S
4 1
W
5 1
97
6 1
7 1
8 1
1 Inhibited to use 0
2 1
3 0
S
4 0
W
5 0
98
6 0
7 0
8 0
1 Inhibited to use 0
2 1
3 0
S
4 1
W
5 1
99
6 0
7 0
8 0
1 Inhibited to use 1
2 0
3 0
S
4 0
W
5 0
100
6 0
7 0
8 0
1 Print effective image Binary input 0
2 area sub scan lead Bit No. 1 2 3 4 0
edge void (Back 32 lines
3 Set range 0 to 240 lines 1
S surface) 16 line interval (600dpi)
4 0
W
5 Print effective image Binary input 0
101
6 area sub scan rear edge Bit No. 5 6 7 8 0
void (Back surface) 48 lines
7 Set range 0 to 240 lines 1
8 16 line interval (600dpi) 1
1 Scan effective image Binary input 0
2 area main scan left Bit No. 1 2 3 4 1
edge image loss (OC) 96 dots
3 Set range 0 to 360 dots 0
S 24 dot interval
4 0
W
5 Scan effective image Binary input 0
102
6 area main scan right Bit No. 5 6 7 8 1
edge image loss (OC) 96 dots
7 Set range 0 to 360 dots 0
8 24 dot interval 0
1 Scan effective image Binary input 0
2 area sub scan lead Bit No. 1 2 3 4 1
edge image loss (OC) 96 lines
3 Set range 0 to 240 line 1
S 16 line interval
4 0
W
5 Scan effective image Binary input 1
103
6 area sub scan rear edge Bit No. 5 6 7 8 0
image loss (OC) 144 lines
7 Set range 0 to 240 line 0
8 16 line interval 1

AL-1556/1566 TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 57


SW Data
Item Switch selection and contents of functions Initial value Remark
NO. No.
1 Scan effective image Binary input 0
2 area main scan left Bit No. 1 2 3 4 1
edge image loss (SPF 96 dots
3 Set range 0 to 360 dots 0
S back surface) in the interval of 24 dots
4 0
W
5 Scan effective image Binary input 0
104
6 area main scan right Bit No. 5 6 7 8 1
edge image loss (SPF 96 dots
7 Set range 0 to 360 dots 0
8 back surface) in the interval of 24 dots 0
1 Scan magnification ratio 1: – 0: + + 0
2 adjustment (OC main Binary input 0
3 scan) Bit No. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0
S Set range 0 to ±12.7%
4 0
W 0.1% interval
5 0% 0
105
6 0
7 0
8 0
1 Scan magnification ratio 1: – 0: + + 0
2 adjustment (OC sub Binary input 0
3 scan) Bit No. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0
S Set range 0 to ±12.7%
4 0
W 0.1% interval
5 0% 0
106
6 0
7 0
8 0
1 Scan magnification ratio 1: – 0: + + 0
2 adjustment (SPF back Binary input 0
3 surface main scan) Bit No. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0
S Set range 0 to ±12.7%
4 0
W 0.1% interval
5 0% 0
107
6 0
7 0
8 0
1 Scan magnification ratio 1: – 0: + + 0
2 adjustment (SPF back Binary input 0
3 surface sub scan) Bit No. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0
S Set range 0 to ±12.7%
4 0
W 0.1% interval
5 0% 0
108
6 0
7 0
8 0
1 Print magnification ratio 1: – 0: + + 0
2 adjustment (Main scan Binary input 0
3 back surface) Bit No. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0
S Set range 0 to ±12.7%
4 0
W 0.1% interval
5 0% 0
109
6 0
7 0
8 0
1 Print magnification ratio 1: – 0: + + 0
2 adjustment (Sub scan Binary input 0
3 back surface) Bit No. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0
S Set range 0 to ±12.7%
4 0
W 0.1% interval
5 0% 0
110
6 0
7 0
8 0

AL-1556/1566 TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 58


C. Soft switch descriptions SW6 No.1 ECM
SW1 No.1, No.2 Image quality priority selection Used to set YES/NO of error resend mode.

Used to select the image quality setting when pressing C/A key or dur- When, however, SW43-1 (V.34 mode function) is OFF or when SW34-
1 (V.34 mode function) is ON and send is made other than SG3, ECM
ing auto clear.
setting of "NO" is valid.
Default: 0 0 (Normal)
Since the ECM function is essential in V.34 mode and the remote
SW1 No.3 Inhibited to use machine may perform checking, when SW43-1 (V.34 mode function) is
SW1 No.4 Auto/Manual default setup ON , this function is invalid in reception.
Default: 1 (Yes)
Used to select Auto/Manual reception mode when turning on the
power. SW6 No.2 CED signal send
Default: 0 (Automatic reception) Used to set YES/NO of CED signal send.
SW1 No.5 Send request protection This is valid only when SW52-7 (V.34 mode function) is OFF.
Used to set enable/disable of the confidential function (inhibit to send This is because ANSam signal send is necessary for V.34 mode.
to erroneous destinations) in send request communication (remote When set to 1, CED signal send is performed.
send). When set to 0, CED signal send is not performed.
The confidential function is performed by collating the number regis- Default: 1 (Yes)
tered in this machine and the number registered in the remote
machine. SW6 No.3 CSI transmission
Sender number ↔ Send request allow number Used to set YES/NO of CSI signal send.
Default: 0 (Protected) CSI signal includes the sender's number.
Default: 1 (Yes)
SW1 No.6–No.8 Inhibited to use
SW6 No.4 DIS reception confirmation in G3 send
SW2 No.1–No.4 Inhibited to use
Used to set YES/NO of DIS receive check in G3 mode send.
SW2 No.5–No.8 Remote selection number setup When set to 1, DIS receive twice is checked.
Used to set the number in binary input for remote switch receive from When set to 0, DIS once is checked when "NSF/DIS" is received; and
external telephone. DIS twice is checked when NSF is not received.
However, "∗" in the remote switch number (X∗∗) is fixed. Default: 0 (Once in NFS reception, 2 time in DIS reception)
Default: 5
SW6 No.5 Inhibited to use
SW3 No.1–No.5 Density default setup
SW6 No.6 EOL detection timer
Used to set the density when pressing C/A key or during auto clear.
Used to set detection timer of EOL (EndOfLine) in Phase C receive.
Default: 0 0 1 0 0 (Medium)
Default: 0 (13sec)
SW3 No.6 Inhibited to use
SW6 No.7 Countermeasure for echo in reception (CED
SW3 No.7, No.8 Size specification tone send interval)
Used to set the size specification (AB series, inch series). Used to set the interval from CED send to FSK signal send of DIS.
Under setting of "Follow information from machine," when command Default: 0 (75ms)
information from the machine is uncertain, set this item to AB series.
SW6 No.8 Countermeasure for echo in transmission (After
Default: 0 1 (Conforms to the machine information.)
reception of DIS, hold time up to signal send is set.)
SW4 No.1–No.4 Recall interval in communication error Used to set the interval from DIS receive to DSC signal send.
Used to set the interval for recall when communication is cut off by an Default: 0 (200ms)
error during memory send. (Including no response from the remote
machine.) SW7 No.1 Inhibited to use
Setting is made in binary input. SW7 No.2 Dial tone detection
When set to 0, resend is mad immediately after completion of commu- Used to set whether dial tone is detected or not when calling out.
nication. When set to 1, dial tone is detected before calling out.
However, the time interval set by SW21 "Interval between completion When set to 0, dial tone is not detected and dialing is made after a cer-
of communication and the next call" is valid. tain time (3.5sec).
Default: 1min Default: 0 (No)
SW4 No.5–No.8 Recall interval in busy SW7 No.3 Busy tone detection
Used to set the interval for the next call when busy tone is detected in Used to set YES/NO of busy tone detection when calling out.
communication.
Default: 1 (Yes)
Setting is made in binary input.
Default: 3min
SW7 No.4 Dial tone monitoring time
Used to set the monitoring time when detecting dial tone.
SW5 No.1, No2 Inhibited to use
Default: 0 (5sec)
SW5 No.3, No.4 G3 send data accumulation wait time
SW7 No.5 Inhibited to use
Used to set wait time for accumulation of image data before sending
image data directly. SW7 No.6 Max. length of reception
Default: 0 0 (6sec) Used to set max. length of reception for long document.
Default: 0 (1.5m)
SW5 No.5–No.8 Pause time setup
Used to set pause time when registering dials.
Default: 2sec

AL-1556/1566 TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 59


SW7 No.7, No.8 Destination display time when one-touch SW10 No.6 ECM byte/frame
key is pressed Used to set the frame size of error correction mode to be notified to the
Used to set the time from displaying the destination to the next opera- remote machine.
tion in one-touch dial or reduction dial. Default: 0 (256 [bytes/frame])
Default: 0 0 (2sec) SW10 No.7, No.8 Inhibited to use
SW8 No.1 Memory transmission/direct transmission SW11 No.1–No.8 Scanner resource holding time out in
default setup direct send
Used to set whether memory send is ON or direct send is made (OFF) Used to set time-out time to hold scanner resource in direct send.
in the memory mode when pressing C/A key or auto clear.
Default: 26sec
Default: 0 (Memory transmission)
SW12 No.1–No.4 Call time setup in automatic
SW8 No.2 Proxy reception
transmission (T0 timer setup)
Used to set whether proxy reception is enabled or not.
Used to set call time in automatic send.
When set to 0, under the following error status, auto receive is not
Setting is made by binary input of N into "(5sec x N) + 30sec" in the
made in auto receive mode.
increment of 5sec.
• Cover open
Default: 45sec
• Unit error (Toner, drum, developing-related errors)
• Recording paper JAM
SW12 No.5 Inhibited to use
• Document JAM SW12 No.6, No.7 CI detection
• Recording paper empty Used to set the detection frequency of CI signal (call signal).
When set to 1, proxy reception is allowed. Default: 0 0 (4 sine wave)
Default: 1 (Yes) SW12 No.8 Inhibited to use
SW8 No.3 Inhibited to use SW13 No.1, No.2 Inhibited to use
SW8 No.4 Quick online send SW13 No.3, No.4 Ringing volume
Used to set whether quick online send function is enabled or not. Used to set the ringing volume when call-in.
When set to 0, send in memory mode ON is made in memory send. Default: 1 0 (Medium)
When set to 1, send in memory mode ON is made in quick online send.
SW13 No.5, No.6 Speaker volume in DTMF send
Default: 1 (Yes)
Used to set the volume of transmission and DTMF sound from the
SW8 No.5 Remote select function speaker when SPEAKER key is pressed.
Used to set whether remote select function is enabled or not. Default: 1 0 (Medium)
Default: 1 (Yes) SW13 No.7, No.8 Inhibited to use
SW8 No.6–No.8 Number of times of CNG detection SW14 No.1–No.8 Inhibited to use
Used to set the number of times of CNG detection for judgment of
detection.
SW15 No.1 Busy tone detection time (Lower limit)
Used to set the lower limit of busy tone detection time (ON time).
Default: 3 times
Default: 0 (250ms)
SW9 No.1 Print of total communication time and total
pages SW15 No.2 Busy tone detection time (Upper limit)
Used to set whether the total communication time and total pages are Used to set the upper limit of busy tone detection time (ON time).
printed on the communication report or not. Default: 0 (750ms)
When set to 1, the total communication time and total pages are SW15 No.3 Busy tone detection time (Lower limit 2)
printed on the communication report.
Used to set the lower limit 2 of busy tone detection time (ON time).
When set to 0, the total communication time and total pages are not
Default: 0 (Follows SW15-1.)
printed on the communication report.
Default: 1 (Yes) SW15 No.4–No.8 Signal send level
Used to set signal send level from MODEM.
SW9 No.2 Inhibited to use
Setting is made in binary input in the increment of 1dBm.
SW9 No.3–No.8 Ringing volume pattern number Default: –11dBm
Used to set ringing volume pattern.
SW16 No.1–No.4 Modem speed (V.33 mode or less)
Default: 1
Used to set send start speed in communication other than V.34 mode.
SW10 No.1 Measurement of communication time (image) In an area of poor communication conditions, it is recommended to set
Used to set YES/NO of measurement of communication time in phase communication speed to a lower level in advance.
C. It is the communication time in the latest phase C. (Unit: msec) Default: 1 0 0 0 (V.17 14.4kbps)
Valid only in ECM communication.
SW16 No.5, No.6 Modem speed in reception fixed
Default: 1 (Yes)
Used to set receive procedure start speed in a remote machine other
SW10 No.2 Sender's telephone number registration than V.34.
Used to set whether registered sender's telephone number can be In setting of no fixing, the operations are the same as V.17-14400BPS.
changed or not. Default: 0 0 (No fixing)
Default: 0 (Allow)
SW16 No.7, No.8 Inhibited to use
SW10 No.3–No.5 Inhibited to use
SW17 No.1 Inhibited to use

AL-1556/1566 TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 60


SW17 No.2 MH fixed (Except for SG3) SW24 No.1, No.2 Inhibited to use
Used to set whether coding capacity is fixed to MH or not in communi- SW24 No.3, No4 Specified number reception (ANTI JUNK
cation other than SG3. FAX)
Default: 0 (No)
Used to set whether the FAX receive rejection function is made valid or
SW17 No.3 ECM MMR mode (Except for SG3) not for registered FAX numbers.
Used to set whether MMR coding capacity is allowed or not in commu- Default: 0 0 (Not set.)
nication other than SG3. SW24 No.5 Inhibited to use
Default: 1 (Yes)
SW24 No.6 Document output setup in reception
SW17 No.4 ECM JBIG mode (Except for SG3) Used to set the document output procedure; whether all the received
Used to set whether JBIG coding capacity is allowed or not in commu- documents are collectively outputted after completion of reception or
nication other than SG3. every page is outputted when it is received.
Default: 1 (Yes) Default: 1 (Collective output after completion of reception)
SW17 No.5 Inhibited to use SW24 No.7 Inhibited to use
SW17 No.6 MH fixed (in SG3) SW24 No.8 Automatic reduction print
Used to set whether coding capacity is fixed to MH or not in SG3 com- Used to set whether automatic reduction print is performed or not so
munication. that a document longer than the fixed size and smaller than the auto-
Default: 0 (No) matic reduction line number setting is printed on fixed size paper.
SW17 No.7 ECM MMR mode (in SG3) Default: 1 (Allow)
Used to set whether MMR coding capacity is allowed or not in SG3 SW25 No.1–No.4 Automatic reduction rate setup
communication. Used to set automatic reduction rate when automatic reduction print is
Default: 1 (Yes) valid.
SW17 No.8 ECM JBIG mode (in SG3) Default: 10%
Used to set whether JBIG coding capacity is allowed or not in SG3 SW25 No.5, No.6 Transmission end sound tone
communication. Used to set transmission end sound tone in transmission.
Default: 1 (Yes) Default: 0 1 (1000Hz)
SW18 No.1–No.8 Inhibited to use SW25 No.7, No.8 Reception end sound tone
SW19 No.1–No.5 Inhibited to use Used to set reception end sound tone in reception.
SW19 No.6 Recording table automatic print Default: 0 1 (1000Hz)

Used to set whether communication report is automatically outputted SW26 No.1 Read completion sound
or not when the number of send/receive items which have not output- Used to set whether buzzer sound is made or not when scan is com-
ted yet on communication report reaches 50. pleted.
When set to 1, they are automatically outputted. In manual send or when scan is completed in direct send, buzzer
When set to 0, they are not outputted even the number of items sound is not made.
reaches 50. Default: 0 (1sec)
Default: 0 (No) SW26 No.2 Inhibited to use
SW19 No.7, No.8 Inhibited to use SW26 No.3, No.4 Speaker volume setup
SW20 No.1, No.2 Line sound monitor range Used to set speaker volume.
Used to set line sound monitor range when line sound monitor function The following sounds are the targets of this setting.
is used. • Alarm sound
Default: 0 0 (OFF) • Send end sound
SW20 No.3 Line monitor display • Receive end sound
Used to set whether the communication speed and the receive level • Scan end sound
are displayed on LCD or not. Default: 0 1 (Small)
Default: 0 (No)
SW26 No.5–No.8 Inhibited to use
SW20 No.4 Inhibited to use
SW27 No.1–No.6 Inhibited to use
SW20 No.5 Receivable memory capacity
SW27 No.7, No.8 Recording paper tray selection
Used to set the remained memory capacity for allowing call-in.
Used to select the recording paper tray used by FAX.
Default: 0 (128Kbyte)
Valid only when two cassettes are installed.
SW20 No.6–No.8 Inhibited to use Default: 0 0 (AUTO)
SW21 No.1–No.8 Interval between completion of SW28 No.1–No.8 Inhibited to use
communication and the next call
SW29 No.1–No.4 Number of auto switch calls of manual
Used to set the interval between completion of communication and the
reception → auto reception
next call.
Used to set the number of calls to switch to auto receive in manual
Setting is made in binary input.
receive mode.
Default: 6sec
When set to 0, switch to auto receive is not made.
SW22 No.1–No.8 Inhibited to use Default: 0 time
SW23 No.1–No.8 Inhibited to use

AL-1556/1566 TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 61


SW29 No.5–No.8 Setup of number of times of call rings SW34 No.1, No.2 Flash send wait time (U.K., Netherlands,
Used to set the number of calls before starting reception in auto Luxembourg, Belgium, France: Inhibited to use)
receive mode. Used to set the time from off-hook to Flash send.
Setting is made in binary input. Default: 1 0 (1sec)
Default: 2 times SW34 No.3, No.4 Inhibited to use
SW30 No.1 Report output when canceling SW34 No.5–No.8 Signal send level Max.
Used to set whether the user cancel report is outputted or not when
Used to set the max. signal send level.
send is canceled during document send.
Default: –8dBm
Default: 0 (Not output)
SW35 No.1 Cover function default setup
SW30 No.2–No.4 Inhibited to use
Used to set whether cover is added as default or not.
SW30 No.5 Default data, sender print When auto clear is made by pressing C/A key, the machine returns to
Used to set whether sender information (registered in the sender regis- this setting.
tration), sending date, and time are printed on the upper edge of send Default: 0 (No)
document or not.
Default: 1 (ON)
SW35 No.2 Answering telephone connection
Used to set whether the functions of answering telephone connection
SW30 No.6 Inhibited to use mode are enabled or not.
SW30 No.7 Date/sender print position setup Default: 1 (Yes)
Used to set whether date/sender information is printed inside the docu- SW35 No.3, No.4 CI delete max. OFF time
ment area or outside the document area.
Used to set the max. wait time between detection of CI signal pulse
Default: 0 (Outside of document) (number of times) and detection of the next CI signal pulse.
SW30 No.8 Inhibited to use If CIK signal pulse is not detected within this time, the number of calls
up to that time is cleared.
SW31 No.1, No.2 Report output (in transmission)
Default: 0 1 (10sec)
Used to set whether communication report is outputted or not after
completion of sending (excluding sequential broadcast and sequential SW35 No.5–No.8 Answering machine call number setting
send request). Used to set the number of calls to switch to auto receive when answer-
Default: 1 0 (Only when transmission is failed.) ing telephone is not called in when the receive mode is set to the
answering telephone connection mode.
SW31 No.3, No.4 Report output (In broadcast and
sequential send request) Setting is made in binary input.

Used to set whether communication report is outputted or not after Default: 6 times
completion of sending (sequential broadcast and sequential send SW36 No.1–No.8 CNG/mute detection completion time
request). Used to set the time for completion of CNG signal/mute detection in the
Default: 0 1 (All print) answering telephone connection mode.
SW31 No.5, No.6 Report output (in reception) Count is made from the last call signal.
Used to set whether communication report is outputted or not in recep- Setting is made in binary input.
tion. Default: 45sec
Default: 0 0 (Print inhibited) SW37 No.1–No.4 Silence detection start time
SW31 No.7, No.8 Contents of send document are printed Used to set the time between reception of external telephone and
in memory send detection of mute in the answering telephone connection mode.
Used to set whether part of send document is printed on the communi- Default: 5sec
cation report or not in memory send. SW37 No.5–No.8 Mute judgment time
Default: 1 0 (Only the address to which transmission is failed)
Used set the mute judgment time when mute is continued for several
SW32 No.1–No.5 Inhibited to use seconds.
SW32 No.6 Index print setup Default: 5sec

Used to set whether the index is printed when outputting received doc- SW38 No.1, No.2 Protocol monitor
ument or not. Used to set whether communication protocol result is printed or not
Default: 0 (Not print) after completion of communication.
SW32 No.7, No.8 Inhibited to use Default: 0 0 (Not printed.)

SW33 No.1 Page number print setup SW38 No.3 Protocol monitor save
Used to set whether the protocol monitor of the last communication is
Used to set whether the page number is added to the sender informa-
saved or not. When set to "Saved," the previous protocol monitor can
tion print or not.
be printed with SIM 66-21.
Default: 1 (Yes)
Default: 1 (Yes)
SW33 No.2–No.7 Inhibited to use
SW38 No.4 Inhibited to use
SW33 No.8 Reception data duplex print
SW38 No.5, No.6 Flash send time (U.K., Netherlands,
Used to set whether duplex print of received data is made or not.
Luxembourg, Belgium, France: Inhibited to use)
Default: 0 (No)
Used to set the Flash send time.
Default: 0 0 (90ms)

AL-1556/1566 TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 62


SW38 No.7 Transfer function SW43 No.8 Control channel retrain judgment in V.34
Used to set whether transfer function is enabled or not. reception
Default: 0 (Inhibit) Used to set control channel retrain judgment in V.34 reception.
SW38 No.8 Inhibited to use Default: 0 (Judge EQM value)

SW39 No.1–No.3 Inhibited to use SW44 No.1–No.4 V.34 primary channel send speed
Used to set send start speed in V.34 send.
SW39 No.4–No.8 DTMF signal send time
Setting is made in binary input of N in "2400 (bps) x N" in the range of
Used to set DTMF signal send time. 2400bps – 33600bps.
Setting is made in binary input by the increment of 10ms. N is set in the range of 0 – 15. When set to 0, 2400bps; when set to 15,
Default: 110ms 33600bps.
SW40 No.1–No.8 Number of times of recall in error When set to 2400bps, all of SW91 No. 1 – 8 must be set as "Disable".
Used to set the number of times of recall when a communication error Default: 33600bps
occurs. SW44 No.5–No.8 V.34 primary channel receive speed
Setting is made in binary input. Used to set receive start speed in V.34 receive.
When set to 0, recall is not made. Setting is made in binary input of N in "2400 (bps) x N" in the range of
Default: 1 times 2400bps – 33600bps.
SW41 No.1–No.8 Number of times of recall in busy N is set in the range of 0 – 15. When set to 0, 2400bps; when set to 15,
33600bps.
Used to set the number of times of recall when busy tone is detected
during transmission. When set to 2400bps, all of SW43 No. 4 – 6 must changed to 2400.
Setting is made in binary input. Default: 33600bps
When set to 0, recall is not made. SW45 No.1 FAST mode
Default: 2 times Used to set whether FAST function is enabled or not.
SW42 No.1 Inhibited to use Default: 0 (No)

SW42 No.2 FAX receive auto select by CNG detection SW45 No.2, No.3 Sequence of year/month/day in LCD,
Used to set whether FAX receive auto select is enabled or not when report, and sender record
CNG signal is detected with external telephone used. Used to set the sequence of year/month/day in LCD, report, and
Default: 1 (Allow) sender record.
Default: 1 0 (Day/Month/Year)
SW42 No.3 Auto receive select in answering telephone
connection mode SW45 No.4 Time display format
Used to set whether auto receive select function in answering tele- Used to set time display format in LCD, report, and sender record.
phone connection mode is enabled or not. Default: 0 (24H)
Default: 0 (Inhibit) SW45 No.5–No.8 Scan effective image area main scan
SW42 No.4–No.7 Inhibited to use right edge image loss (SPF)
SW42 No.8 V.34 mode function in manual communication Used to set image loss of scan effective area.

Used to set whether V.34 mode is enabled or not in manual communi- Image loss on the right edge in SPF main scan direction can be
adjusted. When the set value is increased, image loss is increased.
cation.
Setting is made in binary input in the increment of 24 dots.
When, however, SW43-1 is set to "0: OFF," V.34 mode is disabled
even tough this switch is set to "1: ON." Default: 96 dots
Default: 1 (ON) SW46 No.1 Specification of print sequence in duplex print
SW43 No.1 V.34 mode function Used to set the print sequence in duplex print of received data.
Used to set whether V.34 mode is enabled or not as a capacity of own When set to 1, an odd-number page is printed after printing the next
machine in send/receive. even-number page. (214365...)
Default: 1 (ON) When set to 0, print is made in the ordinary reception order. (123456...)
Default: 1 (Print order (214365...))
SW43 No.2 Busy tone detection level table
Used to set the busy tone detection level table. SW46 No.2 Specification of rotating direction duplex back
Default: 0 (constant (ROM)) surface print
Used to set whether the back surface is rotated 180 degrees in duplex
SW43 No.3 V.34 primary channel return mode print or not.
Used to set V.34 primary channel return mode.
When set to 1, the back surface is rotated 180 degrees and printed.
Default: 1 (PPh)
When set to 0, the back surface is not rotated and printed.
SW43 No.4–No.6 Symbol speed mask in V.34 receive Default: 1 (180 degrees rotation)
Used to set symbol speed mask in V.34 receive. SW46 No.3 Priority in the day of week
Default: 1 0 1 (3429)
Used to set which is indicated first, day or day of week, when date for-
SW43 No.7 Silence detection level table mat is in the sequence of day, month, and year.
Used to set the mute detection level table. When set to 1, day of week is indicated first, and then day is indicated.
Default: 0 (constant (ROM)) When set to 0, day is indicated first, and then day of week is indicated.
Default: 0 (No) (U.K., Netherlands, Luxembourg, Belgium) /
1 (Yes) (Other than U.K., Netherlands, Luxembourg, Belgium)

AL-1556/1566 TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 63


SW46 No.4 Center No. in FAST mode SW51 No.7, No.8 Busy tone detection cycle
Used to set which is set as FAST center number, Service-No or Host- Used to set detection cycle of pulses of busy tone for detection of busy
Tel-No. tone.
Default: 0 (Service-No.) Default: 0 0 (2puls)
SW46 No.5 Summer time SW52 No.1, No.2 Busy tone detection level
Used to set whether summer time function is enabled or not. Used to set the mini. Detection level in busy tone detection.
When set to 1, summer time function is enabled. Default: 0 0 (–43dB)
When set to 0, summer time function is disabled. SW52 No.3 Inhibited to use
Default: 1 (Allow)
SW52 No.4 Super G3 disabled in the last call-out of recall
SW46 No.6–No.8 PBX setting (U.K., Netherlands, in case of an error
Luxembourg, Belgium: Inhibited to use) Used to set whether Super G3 is disabled or not in the last call-out of
Used to set Connect/Not Connect to PBX and to set the external line recall in case of a send error.
connection method when connected to PBX. When, however, the number of recall in case of a send error is 0, this
Default: 0 0 0 (Setting OFF) function does not operate.
SW47 No.1 Inhibited to use Default: 0 (Super G3 disabled)

SW47 No.2 External telephone connection SW52 No.5 Error process in RTN reception
Used to set whether external telephone is used or not. Used to set whether RTN reception is judged as an error or not. (Only
in G3 mode)
This switch must be set to YES in order to use external telephone.
When set to 1, RTN reception is not judged as an error.
Default: 1 (Yes)
When set to 0, RTN reception is judged as an error.
SW47 No.3–No.8 Inhibited to use
Default: 0 (Error)
SW48 No.1, No.2 Tone/Pulse default setup
SW52 No.6, No.7 Inhibited to use
Used to set the dial type.
Default: 1 0 (TONE)
SW52 No.8 V.34 control channel communication speed
Used to set control channel communication speed in V.34 mode.
SW48 No.3 Telephone line menu
If the remote machine does not make 2400bps enable, the speed is
Used to set whether tone/pulse setting is displayed on the menu or not. always 1200bps.
Default: 1 (Inhibit) Default: 0 (1200bps)
SW48 No.4 DP dial pulse number process SW53 No.1–No.4 Maximum DTMF send level
Used to set pulse number process in pulse dial. Used to set the max. send level of DTMF signal.
Default: 0 (Normal (N)) Setting is made in binary input in the increment of 1.0dBm.
SW48 No.5–No.8 Scan effective image area main scan left Default: 0dBm
edge image loss (SPF) SW53 No.5–No.8 DTMF send level (difference between
Used to set image loss of scan effective area. high and low level)
Image loss on the left edge in SPF main scan direction can be Used to set DTMF signal send level in low group by the difference from
adjusted. When the set value is increased, image loss is increased. that in high group.
Setting is made in binary input in the increment of 24 dots. Setting is made in binary input in the increment of 0.5dBm.
Default: 96 dots Default: +2.0dBm
SW49 No.1, No.2 Inhibited to use SW54 No.1–No.4 Scan effective image area sub scan lead
SW49 No.3–No.8 Speaker sound volume pattern number edge image loss (SPF)
in DTMF send Used to set image loss in scan image area.
Used to set sound volume pattern in DTMF send. Image loss on the lead edge in SPF sub scan direction can be
Default: 21 adjusted. When the set value is increased, image loss on the lead
edge is increased.
SW50 No.1, No.2 Line monitor volume
Setting is made in binary input in the increment of 16 lines.
Used to set on-hook monitor volume and line volume in FAX communi-
Default: 96 lines
cation.
Default: 1 0 (Medium) SW54 No.5–No.8 Scan effective image area sub scan rear
edge image loss (SPF)
SW50 No.3–No.8 Line monitor volume pattern number
Used to set image loss in scan image area.
Used to set line monitor volume pattern.
Image loss on the rear edge in SPF sub scan direction can be
Default: 16
adjusted. When the set value is increased, image loss on the rear edge
SW51 No.1–No.5 DTMF send level (High group) setup is increased.
Used to set high-group send level in DTMF signal send. Setting is made in binary input in the increment of 16 lines.
Setting is made in binary input in the increment of 1.0dBm. Default: 144 lines
Default: –6dBm SW55 No.1–No.7 CI signal OFF detection enable time
SW51 No.6 CED detection time Used to set the min. OFF time for judgment of 1 pulse (1 call) of CI
Used to set detection time of CED/ANSam signal for judgment of (call-in signal).
detection. If OFF time continues more than the set value, it is judged as 1 pulse.
Default: 1000ms Setting is made in binary input in the increment of 10ms.
Default: 1200ms

AL-1556/1566 TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 64


SW55 No.8 Inhibited to use SW61 No.1–No.8 Inhibited to use
SW56 No.1–No.3 CI signal ON detection enable time SW62 No.1 Inhibited to use
Used to set the min. ON time for judgment of 1 pulse (1 call) of CI (call- SW62 No.2 CI signal ON time in V.8 mode
in signal).
Used to set CI signal ON time in CI signal send in V8 mode.
If ON time continues more than the set value, it is judged as 1 pulse.
Default: 0 (9byte (240ms))
Setting is made in binary input in the increment of 10ms.
Default: 155ms
SW62 No.3 CI signal OFF time in V.8 mode
Used to set CI signal OFF time in CI signal send in V8 mode.
SW56 No.4 Inhibited to use
Default: 0 (1sec)
SW56 No.5, No.6 DT/BT detection frequency range
SW62 No.4, No.5 V.8 mode ANSam signal send time
Used to set DT/BT detection frequency range.
Used to set ANSam/CED signal send time.
Default: 1 1 (245Hz–650Hz)
Default: 0 1 (4sec)
SW56 No.7, No.8 Inhibited to use
SW62 No.6–No.8 Inhibited to use
SW57 No.1 Inhibited to use
SW63 No.1, No.2 CI receive number to shift to non-V.34
SW57 No.2 Sharp machine mode communication
Used to set whether communication is made in Sharp machine mode Used to set CI receive number to shift to non-V.34 communication.
or not. Default: 1 0 (2 times)
Default: 1 (ON)
SW63 No.3–No.5 CI send number to shift to non-V.34
SW57 No.3 Inhibited to use communication
SW57 No.4–No.8 Reception gain adjustment Used to set CI send number to shift to non-V.34 communication.
Used to set reception gain correction. Setting is made in binary input.
Setting is made in binary input in the increment of 0.5dBm. Default: 2
Default: 0.0dBm SW63 No.6–No.8 Inhibited to use
SW58 No.1–No.4 Dual wait inhibit time after CFR send SW64 No.1–No.8 Inhibited to use
Used to set dual wait inhibit time after CFR send.
SW65 No.1–No.8 Inhibited to use
Setting is made in binary input in the increment of 200ms.
Default: 1600ms
SW66 No.1–No.8 Inhibited to use

SW58 No.5–No.8 FSK signal settlement time in double SW67 No.1–No.4 Make time (10PPS) setup
wait Used to set make time in dialing in 10PPS.
Used to set FSK signal settlement time in double (dual) wait. Setting is made in binary input in the increment of 1ms.
Setting is made in binary input in the increment of 50ms. Default: 33ms (U.K., Netherlands, Luxembourg, Belgium, France) /
41ms (Other than U.K., Netherlands, Luxembourg, Belgium,
Default: 550ms (7)
France)
SW59 No.1, No.2 Inhibited to use
SW67 No.5–No.8 Inhibited to use
SW59 No.3, No.4 Reception SED ON level
SW68 No.1, No.2 Line open delay time in dial test
Used to set reception SED ON level.
Used to set time interval between end of dialing and opening the line.
Default: 1 1 (–48dB) Valid only in dial test of simulation.
SW59 No.5, No.6 Transmission cable amplitude equalizer Default: 0 0 (2sec)
Used to set transmission cable amplitude equalizer. SW68 No.3, No.4 Inhibited to use
Default: 0 0 (0dB)
SW68 No.5–No.8 T1 timer setup
SW59 No.7, No.8 Reception cable amplitude equalizer Used to set time for connection of the line when the remote machine
Used to set reception cable amplitude equalizer. does not respond in FAX communication.
Default: 0 0 (0dB) The time of ITU-T standard is 35 ± 5sec.
SW60 No.1–No.4 Scan effective image area sub scan lead Setting is made in binary input in the increment of 5sec.
edge image loss (SPF back surface) Default: 40sec
Used to set image loss in scan image area. SW69 No.1–No.8 Inhibited to use
Image loss on the lead edge in SPF bask surface sub scan direction
SW70 No.1–No.3 Inhibited to use
can be adjusted. When the set value is increased, image loss on the
lead edge is increased. SW70 No.4 Reception waiting time between frames
Setting is made in binary input in the increment of 16 lines. Used to set reception wait time between frames.
Default: 96 lines Default: 0 (3.4sec)
SW60 No.5–No.8 Scan effective image area sub scan rear SW70 No.5, No.6 Preamble send time of 300bps
edge image loss (SPF back surface) Used to set preamble send time of 300bps.
Used to set image loss in scan image area. Default: 0 1 (1.0sec)
Image loss on the rear edge in SPF bask surface sub scan direction SW70 No.7, No.8 RCP send times
can be adjusted. When the set value is increased, image loss on the
Used to set number of times of RCP frame send.
rear edge is increased.
Default: 0 0 (3 times)
Setting is made in binary input in the increment of 16 lines.
Default: 144 lines SW71 No.1–No.8 Inhibited to use

AL-1556/1566 TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 65


SW72 No.1 EYE-Q check SW76 No.1–No.8 Scan magnification ratio adjustment
Used to set TCF check in TCF reception. (SPF main scan)
When set to 1, check is made only with EYE-Q value (EQM value). Used to set main scan magnification ratio in SPF scan.
Therefore, TCF check is loosely made. Setting is made in binary input in the increment of 0.1%.
When set to 0, check is made with received data and EYE-Q value Default: 0%
(EQM value).
SW77 No.1–No.8 Scan magnification ratio adjustment
Default: 0 (0 reception & EYE-Q check)
(SPF sub scan)
SW72 No.2 ERR frame reception operation Used to set sub scan magnification ratio in SPF scan.
Used to set operations when an image with an error frame is received. Setting is made in binary input in the increment of 0.1%.
Default: 0 (Not continue process. (Error)) Default: 0%
SW72 No.3, No.4 Waiting time for CED/ANSam send start SW78 No.1–No.8 Print magnification ration adjustment
Used to set waiting time from when the line is connected and the (main scan)
machine enters FAX receive state to when CED/ANSam signal is send Used to set main scan magnification ratio in print.
to the line.
Setting is made in binary input in the increment of 0.1%.
Default: 0 0 (2.25sec)
Default: 0%
SW72 No.5 RTC EOL send times
SW79 No.1–No.8 Print magnification ration adjustment
Used to set number of times of RTC EOL send. (sub scan)
Default: 1 (6 times) Used to set sub scan magnification ratio in print.
SW72 No.6 Inhibited to use Setting is made in binary input in the increment of 0.1%.
SW72 No.7, No.8 CNG send start Default: 0%
Used to set CNG send time. SW80 No.1–No.8 Destination information
Default: 0 0 (0.5sec) Used to set country code.
SW73 No.1, No.2 Minimum flags between frames SW81 No.1–No.8 Language information
Used to set minimum flag number between frames. Used to set language.
Default: 0 0 (2-flag) SW82 No.1–No.4 OC scan size default setting
SW73 No.3, No.4 Phase C head dummy data send time Used to set OC scan default size.
Used to set phase C head dummy data send time. Default: 0 0 1 1 (A4)
Default: 0 0 (0.2sec) SW82 No.5–No.8 Inhibited to use
SW73 No.5, No.6 Inhibited to use SW83 No.1, No.2 Inhibited to use
SW73 No.7, No.8 Flag-adrs timer setup (V.21-FSK) SW83 No.3–No.8 Speaker sound volume setting pattern
Used to set timer between Flag-adrs in FSK signal receive in commu- number
nication other than V.34 mode.
Used to set sound volume pattern of communication end and scan
FSK signal receive in V.34 mode does not conform to this soft switch. end.
Default: 0 0 (6sec) Default: 1
SW74 No.1–No.4 Print effective image area sub scan lead SW84 No.1–No.8 Inhibited to use
edge void
SW85 No.1–No.8 Inhibited to use
Used to set print image area void.
The void amount on the lead edge in the sub scan direction can be SW86 No.1–No.8 Inhibited to use
adjusted. When the set value is increased, the void amount on the lead SW87 No.1–No.8 Inhibited to use
edge is increased.
Setting is made in binary input in the increment of 16 lines.
SW88 No.1–No.8 Inhibited to use
Default: 32 lines SW89 No.1–No.8 Inhibited to use
SW74 No.5–No.8 Inhibited to use SW90 No.1–No.8 Inhibited to use
SW75 No.1, No.2 Inhibited to use SW91 No.1 Symbol speed 3429 send enable in V.34 send
SW75 No.3, No.4 Communication end sound (Buzzer Used to set whether symbol speed of 3429Hz is allowed or not in V.34
send.
sound length) setting
Default: 1 (Enable)
Used to set the length of communication end buzzer sound in commu-
nication. SW91 No.2 Symbol speed 3200 high carrier send enable in
Default: 0 0 (3sec) V.34 send
SW75 No.5–No.8 Print effective image area main scan Used to set whether use of high carrier is allowed or not when symbol
speed of 3200Hz is selected in V.34 send.
void
When high/low carriers are "disable", 3200Hz cannot be selected.
Used to set void amount in print image area.
Default: 1 (Enable)
The void amount in the main scan direction can be adjusted. When the
set value is increased, the margins on the right and the left are SW91 No.3 Symbol speed 3200 low carrier send enable in
increased. V.34 send
Setting is made in binary input in the increment of 16 dots. Used to set whether use of low carrier is allowed or not when symbol
Default: 48 dots speed of 3200Hz is selected in V.34 send.
When high/low carriers are "disable", 3200Hz cannot be selected.
Default: 1 (Enable)

AL-1556/1566 TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 66


SW91 No.4 Symbol speed 3000 high carrier send enable in SW102 No.5–No.8 Scan effective image area main scan
V.34 send right edge image loss (OC)
Used to set whether use of high carrier is allowed or not when symbol Used to set image loss in scan image area.
speed of 3000Hz is selected in V.34 send. Image loss on the right edge in OC main scan direction can be
When high/low carriers are "disable", 3200Hz cannot be selected. adjusted. When the set value is increased, image loss is increased.
Default: 1 (Enable) Setting is made in binary input in the increment of 24 dots.
SW91 No.5 Symbol speed 3000 low carrier send enable in Default: 96 dots
V.34 send SW103 No.1–No.4 Scan effective image area sub scan
Used to set whether use of low carrier is allowed or not when symbol lead edge image loss (OC)
speed of 3000Hz is selected in V.34 send. Used to set image loss in scan image area.
When high/low carriers are "disable", 3200Hz cannot be selected. Image loss on the lead edge in OC sub scan direction can be adjusted.
Default: 1 (Enable) When the set value is increased, image loss is increased.
SW91 No.6 Symbol speed 3429 enable in V.34 send Setting is made in binary input in the increment of 16 lines.
Used to set whether use of 3429Hz is allowed or not as symbol speed Default: 96 lines
in V.34 send. SW103 No.5–No.8 Scan effective image area sub scan
Default: 1 (Enable) rear edge image loss (OC)
SW91 No.7 Symbol speed 2800 enable in V.34 send Used to set image loss in scan image area.
Used to set whether use of 2800Hz is allowed or not as symbol speed Image loss on the rear edge in OC sub scan direction can be adjusted.
in V.34 send. When the set value is increased, image loss is increased.
Default: 1 (Enable) Setting is made in binary input in the increment of 16 lines.
Default: 144 lines
SW91 No.8 Symbol speed 2743 enable in V.34 send
Used to set whether use of 2743Hz is allowed or not as symbol speed SW104 No.1–No.4 Scan effective image area main scan
in V.34 send. left edge image loss (SPF back surface)
Default: 1 (Enable) Used to set image loss in scan image area.
SW92 No.1–No.8 Inhibited to use Image loss in SPF back surface main scan direction can be adjusted.
When the set value is increased, image loss is increased.
SW93 No.1–No.8 Inhibited to use Setting is made in binary input in the increment of 24 dots.
SW94 No.1–No.8 Inhibited to use Default: 96 dots
SW95 No.1–No.8 Inhibited to use SW104 No.5–No.8 Scan effective image area main scan
SW96 No.1–No.8 Inhibited to use right edge image loss (SPF back surface)
Used to set image loss in scan image area.
SW97 No.1–No.8 Inhibited to use
Image loss on the right edge in SPF back surface main scan direction
SW98 No.1–No.8 Inhibited to use can be adjusted. When the set value is increased, image loss is
increased.
SW99 No.1–No.8 Inhibited to use
Setting is made in binary input in the increment of 24 dots.
SW100 No.1–No.8 Inhibited to use Default: 96 dots
SW101 No.1–No.4 Print effective image area sub scan SW105 No.1–No.8 Scan magnification ratio adjustment
lead edge void (Back surface) (OC main scan)
Used to set void amount in print image area.
Used to set the main san magnification ratio in OC main scan.
Void amount on the lead edge in sub scan direction can be adjusted.
Setting is made in binary input in the increment of 0.1%.
When the set value is increased, the margin on the lead edge is
Default: 0%
increased.
Setting is made in binary input in the increment of 16 lines. SW106 No.1–No.8 Scan magnification ratio adjustment
Default: 32 lines (OC sub scan)
Used to set the sub scan magnification ratio in OC sub scan.
SW101 No.5–No.8 Print effective image area sub scan rear
edge void (Back surface) Setting is made in binary input in the increment of 0.1%.

Void amount on the rear edge in sub scan direction can be adjusted. Default: 0%
When the set value is increased, the margin on the read edge is SW107 No.1–No.8 Scan magnification ratio adjustment
increased. (SPF back surface main scan)
Setting is made in binary input in the increment of 16 lines. Used to set the main scan magnification ratio in SPF back surface
Default: 48 lines scan.
SW102 No.1–No.4 Scan effective image area main scan Setting is made in binary input in the increment of 0.1%.
left edge image loss (OC) Default: 0%
Used to set image loss in scan image area. SW108 No.1–No.8 Scan magnification ratio adjustment
Image loss on the left edge in OC main scan direction can be adjusted. (SPF back surface sub scan)
When the set value is increased, image loss is increased. Used to set the sub scan magnification ratio in SPF back surface scan.
Setting is made in binary input in the increment of 24 dots. Setting is made in binary input in the increment of 0.1%.
Default: 96 dots Default: 0%

AL-1556/1566 TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 67


SW109 No.1–No.8 Print magnification ratio adjustment SW110 No.1–No.8 Print magnification ratio adjustment
(Main scan back surface) (Sub scan back surface)
Used to set the main scan magnification ratio in back surface print. Used to set the sub scan magnification ratio in back surface print.
Setting is made in binary input in the increment of 0.1%. Setting is made in binary input in the increment of 0.1%.
Default: 0% Default: 0%

6. Trouble codes
A. Trouble codes list Main Sub
Details of trouble
Main Sub code code
Details of trouble
code code E1 16 Content IMC DIMM memory read/write check error
E1 00 IMC communication trouble Detail An installation error occurs in the IMC memory
10 IMC trouble module.
13 IMC flash ROM error An error occurs during access to the IMC
memory.
16 IMC DIMM memory read/write check error
81 IMC communication interface error (parity) Cause Improper installation of the IMC memory
module.
82 IMC communication interface error (Overrun)
IMC memory module abnormality
84 IMC communication interface error (Framing)
IMC memory contact abnormality
E7 02 LSU trouble IMC abnormality.
10 Shading trouble (Black correction) Check Check installation of the memory module.
11 Shading trouble (White correction) and Replace the memory module.
16 Abnormal laser output remedy Replace the MCU PWB with a new one.
F5 02 Copy lamp lighting abnormality 81 Content IMC communication interface error (parity)
F6 10 FAX board trouble (AL-1566) Detail A parity error occurs in communication between
H2 00 Thermistor open the CPU and the IMC.
H3 00 Heat roller high temperature detection Cause IMC memory defect/data abnormality
H4 00 Heat roller low temperature detection Check Check the memory of the IMC.
L1 00 Feeding is not completed within the specified time after and Replace the MCU PWB with new one.
starting feeding. (The scan head locking switch is locked) remedy
L3 00 Scanner return trouble 82 Content IMC communication interface error (Overrun)
L4 01 Main motor lock detection Detail An overrun error occurs in communication
L6 10 Polygon motor lock detection between the CPU and the IMC.
U1 03 FAX board battery error (AL-1566) Cause IMC memory defect/data abnormality.
U2 04 EEPROM read/write error (Serial communication error) Check Check the memory of the IMC.
11 Counter check sum error (EEPROM) and Replace the MCU PWB with new one.
U9 99 Operation panel language error remedy
84 Content IMC communication interface error (Framing)
Detail A framing error occurs in communication
B. Details of trouble codes between the CPU and the IMC.
Main Sub Cause IMC memory defect/data abnormality.
Details of trouble Check Check the memory of the IMC.
code code
E1 00 Content IMC communication trouble and
Detail An abnormality occurs in communication remedy
between the CPU and the IMC. E7 02 Content LSU trouble
Cause IMC – CPU signal line abnormality Detail The BD signal from the LSU cannot be detected
IMC Memory defect/data abnormality in a certain cycle. (Always OFF or always ON)
Check Replace the MCU PWB with new one. Cause LSU connector or LSU harness defect or
and disconnection
remedy Polygon motor rotation abnormality
10 Content IMC trouble Laser beams are not generated.
MCU PWB abnormality.
Detail An abnormality occurs in the IMC.
Check Check connection of the LSU connector.
Cause USB chip error/CODEC error on the IMC.
and Execute TC 61-03 to check the LSU operations.
Check Replace the MCU PWB with a new one.
remedy Check that the polygon motor rotates normally.
and
Check that the laser emitting diode generates
remedy
laser beams.
13 Content IMC flash ROM error Replace the LSU unit.
Detail An abnormality occurs in the IMC flash ROM. Replace the MCU PWB.
Cause IMC abnormality 10 Content Shading trouble (Black correction)
Check Replace the MCU PWB with a new one. Detail The CCD black scan level is abnormal when the
and If downloading of the program is abnormally shading.
remedy terminated, it may cause an error. Download Cause Improper connection of the CCD unit flat cable
the program again to avoid this. CCD unit abnormality
MCU PWB abnormality
Check Check connection of the CCD unit flat cable.
and Check the CCD unit.
remedy

AL-1556/1566 TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 68


Main Sub Main Sub
Details of trouble Details of trouble
code code code code
E7 11 Content Shading trouble (White correction) H3 00 Content Heat roller high temperature detection
Detail The CCD white scan level is abnormal when the Detail The fusing temperature exceeds 240°C.
shading. Cause Thermistor abnormality
Cause Improper connection of the CCD unit flat cable Control PWB abnormality
Dirt on the mirror, the lens, and the reference Fusing section connector disconnection.
white plate Check Use TC 5-02 to check the heater lamp blinking
Copy lamp lighting abnormality and operation.
CCD unit abnormality remedy When the lamp blinks normally.
MCU PWB abnormality Check the thermistor and its harness.
(When occurred in the SPF scan position.) Check the thermistor input circuit on the control
Improper installation of the mirror unit PWB.
Check Clean the mirror, lens, and the reference white When the lamp keeps ON.
and plate. Check the power PWB and the lamp control
remedy Check the light quantity and lighting status of circuit on the MCU PWB.
the copy lamp (TC 05-03). Use TC 14 to clear the self diagnostic display.
Check the MCU PWB. H4 00 Content Heat roller low temperature detection
16 Content Abnormal laser output Detail The fusing temperature does not reach 185°C
Detail When the laser output is stopped, HSYNC is within 27 sec of turning on the power, or the
detected. fusing temperature keeps at 140°C.
Cause Laser abnormality Cause Thermistor abnormality
MCU PWB abnormality. Heater lamp abnormality
Check Check the laser emitting diode operation. Thermostat abnormality
and Replace the MCU PWB. Control PWB abnormality
remedy Check Use TC 5-02 to check the heater lamp blinking
F5 02 Content Copy lamp lighting abnormality and operation.
Detail The copy lamp does not turn on. remedy When the lamp blinks normally.
Cause Copy lamp abnormality Check the thermistor and its harness.
Copy lamp harness abnormality Check the thermistor input circuit on the control
CCD PWB harness abnormality. PWB.
Check Use TC 5-3 to check the copy lamp operations. When the lamp does not light up.
Check for disconnection of the heater lamp and
and When the copy lamp lights up.
remedy Check the harness and the connector between the thermostat. Check the interlock switch.
the CCD unit and the MCU PWB. Check the power PWB and the lamp control
circuit on the MCU PWB.
When the copy lamp does not light up.
Check the harness and the connector between Use TC 14 to clear the self diagnostic display.
the copy lamp unit and the MCU PWB. L1 00 Content Feeding is not completed within the specified
Replace the copy lamp unit. time after starting feeding. (The scan head
Replace the MCU PWB. locking switch is locked)
F6 10 Content FAX board trouble (AL-1566) Detail The white area and the black marking on the
Detail Communication trouble between MCU and FAX shading plate are used to obtain the difference
in the CCD level values for judgment of lock.
control PWB
When the difference in the levels of which and
Cause FAX control PWB connector disconnection
black is small, it is judged that the black mark
Defective harness between FAX control PWB
could not be scanned by lock and the trouble
and MCU PWB
code “L1” is displayed.
Motherboard connector pin breakage
Cause The scan head is locked by the lock switch.
FAX control PWB ROM error/Data error
IC on FAX PWB causes abnormality Mirror unit abnormality
The scanner wire is disconnected.
Check Check connector/harness of FAX control PWB
The origin detection sensor abnormality
and and MCU PWB.
Mirror motor harness abnormality
remedy Check the grounding of the copier.
Check Check to confirm that the scan head lock switch
Check FAX control PWB ROM.
Replace the FAX PWB. and is released.
remedy Use TC 1-1 to check the mirror reciprocating
H2 00 Content Thermistor open
operations.
Detail The thermistor is open.
When the mirror does not feed.
The fusing unit is not installed.
Check for disconnection of the scanner wire.
Cause Thermistor abnormality Check the harness and the connector between
Control PWB abnormality the mirror motor and the MCU PWB.
Fusing section connector disconnection Replace the mirror unit.
The fusing unit is not installed. Replace the MCU PWB.
Check Check the harness and the connector between When the mirror does feed.
and the thermistor and the PWB. Use TC 1-2 to check the mirror home position
remedy Use TC 14 to clear the self diagnostic display. sensor.

AL-1556/1566 TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 69


Main Sub Main Sub
Details of trouble Details of trouble
code code code code
L3 00 Content Scanner return trouble U2 04 Content EEPROM read/write error (Serial
Detail When the mirror base is returned for the communication error)
specified time (6 sec) in mirror initializing after Detail EEPROM access process error
turning on the power, the mirror home position Cause EEPROM abnormality
sensor (MHPS) does not turn ON. Or when the Check Check that the EEPROM is properly set.
mirror base is returned for the specified time and Use TC 16 to cancel the trouble.
(about 6 sec) after start of copy return, the remedy Replace the MCU PWB.
mirror home position sensor (MHPS) does not 11 Content Counter check sum error (EEPROM)
turn ON. Detail Check sum error of the counter area in the
Cause Mirror unit abnormality EEPROM
Scanner wire disconnection Cause EEPROM abnormality
Origin detection sensor abnormality
Check Check that the EEPROM is properly set.
Mirror motor harness abnormality
and Use TC 16 to cancel the trouble.
Check Use TC 1-1 to check the mirror reciprocating
remedy Replace the MCU PWB.
and operations.
U9 99 Content Operation panel language error
remedy When the mirror does not return.
Detail There is no language file.
Check for disconnection of the scanner wire.
The language file is destroyed.
Check the harness and the connector between
the mirror motor and the MCU PWB. Cause Language file abnormality
Replace the mirror unit. MCU PWB abnormality
Replace the MCU PWB. Check MCU firmware download
When the mirror does feed. and Replace the MCU PWB.
Use TC 1-2 to check the mirror home position remedy
sensor.
L4 01 Content Main motor lock detection 7. Communication error codes (AL-1566)
Detail When the main motor encoder pulse is not
detected for 100 msec. A. Error code identification
Cause Main motor unit abnormality Communication error xx (xxxx)
Improper connection or disconnection the main
(In print out, the communication error display is made. In FAX status
motor and the harness. check, “NGxxxxxx” is displayed.
MCU PWB abnormality
When transmission or reception is not executed normally due to distur-
Check Use TC 25-01 to check the main motor
bance in protocol signals and image signals by the trouble in the line,
and operations.
the code of 6 digits is displayed on the transmission result check menu
remedy Check connection of the main motor harness/
(reception result check menu).
connector.
Replace the main motor. Upper 2 digits of a communication error code: 00 – 58 (error code) is
Replace the MCU PWB. displayed. (Communication result code)
L6 10 Content Polygon motor lock detection Lower 4 digits of a communication error code: Error code1, Error code
Detail The lock signal (specified rpm signal) does not 2
return within a certain time (about 20 sec) from 1) Refer to the communication result code.
starting the polygon motor rotation. 2) Refer to error code 1.
Cause Polygon motor unit abnormality 3) Refer to error code 2.
Improper connection or disconnection of the
polygon motor and the harness. (Error code 1 other than V.34 mode is “00”.)
MCU PWB abnormality <Communication result code>
Check Use TC 61-1 to check the polygon motor Error code Communication
and operations. Communication interruption
(Communication report result
remedy Check connection of the polygon motor content
result) column
harness/connector. 0 – 31 For details of 0 – Depends on the
Replace the polygon motor. 31, refer to the communication
Replace the MCU PWB. communication disconnection position.
U1 03 Content FAX board battery error (AL-1566) result code. For 16 or later, V.34 mode
Details The SRAM backup battery voltage on FAX communication.
PWB falls. 33 Busy The calling side cannot
Cause The SRAM backup battery voltage on FAX connect the line with the
PWB falls. other party.
Check Check voltage of the SRAM back up battery. 34 Cancel An interruption command is
and Replace the battery. made during transmission or
remedy reception.
A reservation is canceled.
An interruption command is
entered with the interruption
key.
35 Power OFF Power OFF during
transmission or reception
36 (Recording paper
empty)

AL-1556/1566 TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 70


Error code Communication Error code Communication
Communication interruption Communication interruption
(Communication report result (Communication report result
content content
result) column result) column
37 (Recording paper 56 Interface not DCN is received for NSS
jam) accepted when sending an interface
38 Reception Memory over during command.
memory over reception A receiving station number
39 (Discrepancy in which is not registered is
the number of directed when receiving an
sheets) interface command.
40 (Interface not 57 Interface ID Discrepancy in the
accepted) discrepancy interface ID when
41 Transmission The length of transmission receiving an interface
length over data of one page exceeds command.
the range during 58 Reception Transmission is made from
transmission. inhibition number a reception inhibition
42 Reception length The length of reception data number.
over of one page exceeds the <Communication result codes>
range during reception.
Error Final reception signal Final reception signal
43 Communication Communication enable
code (Transmitting side) (Receiving side)
(OK) before transmission
0 Abnormal signal Abnormal signal
44 Document error A document jam during
1 NSF, DIS NSS, DCS
direct transmission
2 CFR NSC, DTC
45 (Image quality
error) 3 FTT EOP
4 MCF EOM
46 No response from The FAX signal from the
the other party other party cannot detect 5 PIP, PIN MPS
within T1 time. 6 RTN, RTP PRI-Q
47 (Communication 7 No signal DCN
error) 8 PPR PPS-EOP
48 OK Communication normal end 9 PPS-EOM
49 No send request The other party has no send 10 PPS-MPS, PPS-NULL
function on the request function when 11 RNR RR
other party receiving a send request. 12 CTR CTC
The other party has no data 13 ERR EOR-Q
to send. 14 PPS-PRI-Q
50 Send request not DCN is received for DTC 15
accepted when sending a send 16 Abnormal signal Abnormal signal
request.
17 NSF, DIS NSS, DCS
There is no data to send
18 CFR NSC, DTC
when sending a send
19 FTT PPS-EOP
request.
20 MCF PPS-EOM
51 Send request Discrepancy in the enable
enable number number when sending a 21 PIP, PIN PPS-MPS, PPS-NULL
discrepancy send request. 22 RTN, RTP PRI-Q
Discrepancy in the system 23 No signal DCN
number when sending a 24 PPR
send request. 25 RNR RR
52 No confidential The other party has no 26 CTR CTC
function on the confidential function when 27 ERR EOR-Q
other party sending a confidential 28 PPS-PRI-Q
message. (Including the 29 V.8 Phase-1 V.8 Phase-1
other company’s machines)
30 V.8 Phase-2 V.8 Phase-2
53 Confidential DCN is received for NSS 31 V.8 Phase-3 V.8 Phase-3
function not when receiving a
accepted confidential message. (Note) For error codes 16 – 31, V.34 mode communication.
54 Confidential box A confidential box number
No. NG which is not registered is
directed when receiving a
confidential message.
55 No interface The other party has no
function on the interface function when
other party sending an interface
command.

AL-1556/1566 TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 71


<Error codes 1>
Error codes 1 are fixed to “00”.
<Error codes 2>
Error Transmission/
Content of communication interruption
codes 2 Reception
01 Transmission length over Transmission
02 EOL time over Reception
03 Carrier detection time up Reception
04 Polarity reversion detection (in phase C) Transmission/
Reception
05 8 min over (in phase C) Transmission
06 Memory image decoding error Reception
07 Memory image decoding error Transmission
08 Time up between frames in phase C Transmission/
Reception
10 Communication request NG Reception
11 Polarity reversion detection Reception
12 Invalid command reception Reception
13 Time over (1min timer/6sec timer) Reception
14 PUT error Reception
15 Time out occurrence during shift from Reception
Primary to Control in V.34 mode
20 Polarity reversion detection Transmission
21 Invalid command reception Transmission
22 Fall back retry number over Transmission
23 Resend over of retry number Transmission
24 Time over (T5 timer) Transmission
25 Time over (T5 timer) in V.34 mode Transmission
26 Time out occurrence during shift from Transmission
Primary to Control in V.34 mode
30 Communication error due to Transmission/
communication abnormality between Reception
FAX_SUB and FAX_MAIN

AL-1556/1566 TEST COMMAND, FAX SOFT SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 72


[11] USER PROGRAM
The user settings consist of the following items.

1. User programs
A. Copy mode
Setting codes
Program
Program name (factory default setting Explanation
number
appears in bold)
1 AUTO CLEAR 1: 10 SEC. • Auto clear time automatically returns the copy settings to the initial settings if no
2: 30 SEC. keys are pressed for a preset period of time following the end of a copy job.
3: 60 SEC. • This program is used to select the period of time. Auto clear time can also be
4: 90 SEC. disabled.
5: 120 SEC.
6: OFF
2 PREHEAT MODE 1: 30 SEC. • This function automatically switches the machine to a low power consumption
2: 1 MIN. state if the set duration of time elapses without the machine being used when the
3: 5 MIN. power is on. The power save indicator lights up, however, the keys on the
4: 30 MIN. operation panel can be used. Normal operation automatically resumes when a key
5: 60 MIN. on the operation panel is pressed, an original is placed, a print job is received.
6: 120 MIN.
7: 240 MIN.
3 AUTO SHUT-OFF 1: ON • Use this setting to enable or disable auto power shut-off mode.
2: OFF
4 AUTO SHUT-OFF 1: 5 MIN. • This function automatically switches the machine to a state that consumes even
TIME 2: 30 MIN. less power than preheat mode if the set duration of time elapses without the
3: 60 MIN. machine being used when the power is on. All lights except the power save
4: 120 MIN. indicator go off. To resume normal operation, press the [START] key. Normal
5: 240 MIN. operation also resumes automatically when a print job is received or scanning is
begun from a computer. While in auto power shut-off mode, no keys (except the
[START] key) can be used.
5 STREAM FEEDING 1: ON • When copying using the RSPF, while "SET ORIGINALS FOR STREAM
2: OFF FEEDING." appears in the display after an original has been scanned (about 5
seconds), a subsequent original can be placed and automatically fed into the
machine.
6 LAYOUT IN 2IN1 1: PATTERN 1 • Use this setting to select the layout pattern when two original pages are copied
2: PATTERN 2 onto a single sheet of paper.
7 OFFSET 1: ON • When enabled, this function offsets the position in the paper output tray of sets of
FUNCTION 2: OFF copies during sort copy or copy job, and print jobs when using the printer function.
8 ROTATE ORIG. 1: ON • When two-sided copying is performed, this function rotates the image on the back
IMAGE 2: OFF of the original. This is convenient when binding the copies at the top (tablet
binding).
9 AE/TEXT 1: 300dpi • The copy resolution in auto and text mode is normally 300 dpi. If high-quality
RESOLUTION 2: 600dpi copies are preferred, use this setting to change the resolution to 600 dpi.
10 2-SIDED COPY 1: HI-SPEED • If the memory fills up when two-sided copying is performed, "NORMAL" can be
MODE 2: NORMAL selected to make copying possible. However, "NORMAL" results in a slower
copying speed. Normally "HI-SPEED" is selected to enable fast two-sided
copying.
11 MARGIN WIDTH 1: 1/4" • Use this setting to set the margin width.
2: 1/2"
3: 3/4"
4: 1"
12 MEM. FOR 1: 30% • Use this to change the proportion of machine memory used for printer mode.
PRINTER 2: 40%
3: 50%
4: 60%
5: 70%
13 AUTO KEY REPEAT 1: ON • Use this setting to select whether or not holding down a key causes repeated input
2: OFF of the key. For keys that normally cause a set value to increase when held down
(for example, holding down the [<] key [v] or [>] key [^]), this program can be used
to have the set value not change when the key is held down.
14 KEY PRESS TIME 1: NORMAL • Use this setting to select how long a key must be pressed for the input to be
2: 0.5 SEC. accepted. By selecting a longer time, you can prevent settings from being
3: 1.0 SEC. changed by the accidental pressing of a key.
4: 1.5 SEC.
5: 2.0 SEC.
15 KEY TOUCH 1: LOW • This sets the volume of beep signals.
SOUND 2: HIGH
3: OFF

AL-1556/1566 USER PROGRAM 11 - 1


Setting codes
Program
Program name (factory default setting Explanation
number
appears in bold)
16 SOUND AT 1: ON • Use this to sound a beep when a base setting is selected.
DEFAULT 2: OFF
17 TONER SAVE 1: ON • This mode reduces toner usage by about 10% when copying. Toner save mode is
MODE 2: OFF effective when the exposure mode is AUTO or TEXT.
18 AE LEVEL ADJUST 1: SPF/RSPF • This is used to adjust the exposure level.
2: DOCUMENT GLASS • The automatic exposure level can be adjusted separately for the document glass
and the RSPF.
19 LANGUAGE 1: AMERICAN ENGLISH This is used to set the language used in the display.
20 RESET FACTORY 1: Yes This is used to return all settings to the factory default settings.
2: No
21 SORT AUTO 1: ON Used to sort SPF/RSPF copies automatically.
SELECT 2: OFF

B. Print mode
Setting codes
Program
Program name (factory default setting Explanation
number
appears in bold)
1 FORCED OUTPUT 1: ON When this function is enabled, printing in printer mode will automatically continue
2: OFF using a different size of paper if the specified size of paper runs out in all trays. This
feature does not function in copy mode.
2 USB 2.0 MODE 1: FULL-SPEED This sets the USB 2.0 data transfer speed. To obtain the fastest speed when using
SWITCH *1 2: HI-SPEED the USB 2.0 port, first verify that your computer meets the system requirements
(operating system and driver), and then use this program to change the USB 2.0
mode to "Hi-Speed". Note that the setting should not be changed while running a
TWAIN driver. (For the system requirements.)
*1: The scanning speed increases when the USB 2.0 mode is set to "HI-SPEED", however, the printing speed does not increase considerably.

2. Selecting a setting for a user program 4) Press the [OK] key.


Your selection appears briefly and then the previous screen
1) Press the [MENU] key and then press the [OK] key. appears.
In printer mode, the user programs are accessed by simply press- NOTE:
ing the [MENU] key. When "AE LEVEL ADJUST" is selected in the user programs and the
MAIN MENU
[OK] key is pressed, the automatic exposure adjustment screen
1:USER PROGRAM appears. Adjust the exposure and press the [OK] key.

OK
Audible signals (key entry beep, invalid key beep, base setting
beep)
1
2
1
2
2
1,2,3,
1,2,3,
AUTO
ZOOM
The machine sounds three different types of beep signals: a key
2 1 1 SP. FUNC
entry beep that sounds when a valid key is pressed, an invalid key
beep that sounds when an invalid key is pressed, and a base setting
2) Press the [<] key [v] or [>] key [^] to select the item that you wish beep that sounds when a setting is the same as the base setting
to configure in the USER PROGRAM items, and then press the (base settings are explained below). The base setting beep is initially
[OK] key. disabled. If you wish to enable the base setting beep, see "SOUND
• You can also select a program by directly entering the program AT DEFAULT". If you wish to change the volume of the beep signals
number with the numeric keys. or disable them, see "KEY TOUCH SOUND".
The beep patterns of each type of beep signal are as follows:
USER PROGRAM
2:PREHEAT MODE Key entry beep: One beep Base setting beep: Three beeps
Invalid key beep: Two beeps
OK Base settings
1 1 2 AUTO
The base settings are preset standard selections for each copy set-
1,2,3,

2
2
1
2
1
1,2,3,
SP. FUNC
ZOOM ting. The base settings are as follows:
Copy ratio: 100% Paper feed location: Paper tray
3) Press the [<] key [v] or [>] key [^] to change the setting of the Light and Dark level: center AUTO/TEXT/PHOTO: AUTO
selected item.

PREHEAT MODE
1:30 SEC.

OK

1 1 2
1,2,3,
AUTO
2 2
2 1 1
1,2,3,
SP. FUNC
ZOOM

NOTE:
• If you mistakenly select the wrong item, press the [CLEAR] key [C]
and repeat the procedure from step 2.
• To cancel a setting for a user program, press the [MENU] key.

AL-1556/1566 USER PROGRAM 11 - 2


Carriage Unit
CCD PWB
12V 12V Reg A5V 3.3V

AFE(AD9826)
CCD R C A M
1. Block diagram

(uPD8861) CCFL x 2 HOME


G D G P AD 8bits (MSB/LSB)
S C X POSITION
B
16bits Lamp SENSOR
SPF Motor
5V Inverter
A. Overall block diagram

FAX Speaker
CCD Driver
Modem / LIU PWB

Mechanical Load

0 - 24V FAX only MPFS,RRS,CPFS1


MCU-PWB
(SPF UNIT SGS, SRRC, SPUS, SPPS,
FAX/I/F
DC-DC 4Mb
Driver
or 8Mb (Counter) MCNT
NIC PCBA PWM MHPS
RJ45 256Mbx1 or 16Mb
(N/W (Internal) 3.3V SDRAM Flash ROM
[12] ELECTRICAL SECTION

con- D[7..0]
nector) Ether Chip
RTL8019AS RD
CS
INT
P-Bus
Image BUS(PI-Bus) 8 Sensor/SW
CPU FPGA Image BUS(PO-Bus) 8 ISP1581 (Electorical detector/SW/Sensor)
uPD703100 KRONOS ASIC UART OA982
USB2.0
High-speed

CPU INTERRUPT
(296pin)
FlashROM SRAM Printer CLK(16.1511MHz) System Reset SPPD
1Mbit 256kbit 3.3V
CPU I/O
Scanner CLK(48MHz) Reset IC 32.3022MHz 12MHz Interlock SW
Cassette detector X 2
Drum Initial detector
CPU PPD1
SDRAM H8S/2321 POD
A[19…1] (19.6608MHz) OPE PWB MFD
16Mbyte
Duplex Motor OP-CLK PPD2
D[15…0] OP-LATCH
OP-DATA SDOD
Driver SRAM 1Mbit LED Driver LED SPOD
PSL PSL LED Copier 11pcs
Flash ROM
Shifter Motor SELIN1,2,3 Note: Energy-saving 1W correspondence)
8Mbit KEYIN 8bit
Driver HC151
KEY Matrix
KEYSCAN1-3 Copier 24pcs
HC238 AL-1566 (FAX Model) Only
SSCG I2C Bus (3 to 8 decode) 8bit
LCX574
2Kbyte PSW FAX OPE PWB
HC151 EEPROM START KEY Buzzer
KEY Matrix
EEPROM

AL-1556/1566 ELECTRICAL SECTION 12 - 1


21 pcs
Fan Motor (1speed) (CRUM)

/MMD
CPU CLK(19.6608MHz) LED
PMCLK LCD

PMD
3 pcs

/MMRDY
Driver (2 x 20)
Driver
LCD E
LCD RS
LCD R/W(TBD)
LCD DB7-4

POWER SUPPLY HVU

Main Motor Toner Motor Mirror Motor /POFF,HL,PR


LSU FW TC, GRID, MC, BIAS
3.3V,5VEN,5V,24V
LASER
Polygon
Motor

AC Code
2. Circuit descriptions PIN
Signal code
Input/
Operating
No. Output
A. Main PWB (MCU) 38 ARB_INT Interruption ASIC interruption
(1) General level input
39 Vcc CPU3.3V
The MCU PWB is composed of:
40 D0 Data I/O Data bus
• CPU peripheral section which performs mechanical sequence 41 D1 Data I/O Data bus
control, U/I, and each function job management. 42 D2 Data I/O Data bus
The CPU connects with the ASIC and memory by use of the system 43 D3 Data I/O Data bus
bus and performs jog management and sequence control of the 44 GND DGND
whole engine. 45 D4 Data I/O Data bus
• Image process ASIC which performs image process, CCD control, 46 D5 Data I/O Data bus
LSU control, and print control. 47 D6 Data I/O Data bus
• OA982 peripheral section which performs E-Sort and FAX control. 48 D7 Data I/O Data bus
The OA982 performs image data input/output with the ASIC, 49 D8 Data I/O Data bus
SDRAM memory management, and communication with USB2.0 50 D9 Data I/O Data bus
devices. 51 D10 Data I/O Data bus
52 D11 Data I/O Data bus
• I/F section for USB2.0 and IEEE1284 control. (For the AL series,
53 GND DGND
IEEE1284 is not available.)
54 D12 Data I/O Data bus
• Motor control circuit 55 D13 Data I/O Data bus
• Mechanical load, sensor I/O circuit 56 D14 Data I/O Data bus
It performs control and management of the process, the transport 57 D15 Data I/O Data bus
loads, the fusing, the optical, and the operation panel sections for exe- 58 Vcc CPU3.3V
cuting a series of copy/print/scan operations. 59 POFF Output Shut off control
60 TxD1 Output For debug
(2) CPU signal table (H8S/2321)
61 SDA Output EEPROM Data bus
PIN Input/ 62 SCL Output EEPROM clock
Signal code Operating
No. Output 63 LCDRS Output LCD control
1 /CS1 Output SRAM chip select 64 LCDE Output LCD control
2 /CS0 Output Flash ROM chip select 65 GND DGND
3 GND DGND 66 CS4 (FAX) Chip select (FAX)
4 GND DGND 67 GND DGND
5 Vcc CPU3.3V 68 GND DGND
6 A0 Output Address bus 69 RY/BY Input Flash Busy signal
7 A1 Output Address bus 70 LCDDB4 Output LCD control
8 A2 Output Address bus 71 LCDDB5 Output LCD control
9 A3 Output Address bus 72 BZR Output Buzzer signal
10 GND DGND 73 LCDDB7 Output LCD control
11 A4 Output Address bus 74 LCDDB6 Output LCD control
12 A5 Output Address bus 75 Reset OUT1 Output Reset signal
13 A6 Output Address bus 76 DMT0 Output Duplex Motor signal
14 A7 Output Address bus 77 DMT1 Output Duplex Motor signal
15 A8 Output Address bus 78 DMT2 Output Duplex Motor signal
16 A9 Output Address bus 79 DMT3 Output Duplex Motor signal
17 A10 Output Address bus 80 WDTOVF Output NC Pull-Up
18 A11 Output Address bus 81 /RES Input Reset
19 GND DGND 82 NMI Output NC Pull-Up
20 A12 Output Address bus 83 STBY Output NC Pull-Up
21 A13 Output Address bus 84 Vcc CPU3.3V
22 A14 Output Address bus 85 XTAL Input Clock
23 A15 Output Address bus 86 EXTAL Output Clock
24 A16 Output Address bus 87 GND DGND
25 A17 Output Address bus 88 CPUCLK Output NC
26 A18 Output Address bus 89 Vcc CPU3.3V
27 A19 Output Address bus 90 PRINTST Output Print start signal
28 GND DGND 91 /RD Output Read signal
29 A20 Pull-Up 92 /HWR Output Write signal (High address)
30 PSW Interruption Print SW 93 /LWR Output Write signal (Low address)
level input 94 SELIN3 Output HC151 select signal
31 SPPD Interruption SPF paper sensor 95 SELIN2 Output HC151 select signal
level input 96 SELIN1 Output HC151 select signal
32 CCD_TG Interruption CCD horizontal sync signal 97 ESSTS Output E-sort control
level input 98 ESCMD Input E-sort control
33 MHPS Interruption Mirror Home Position 99 GND DGND
level input 100 GND DGND
34 /CPUSYNC Interruption Horizontal sync (ASIC) 101 ESSRDY Input E-sort control
level input 102 ESCRDY Output E-sort control
35 GND DGND 103 AVcc CPU3.3V
36 GND DGND 104 Vref CPU3.3V
37 FW Interruption Zero cross signal 105 RTH Analog Fusing thermistor
level input input

AL-1556/1566 ELECTRICAL SECTION 12 - 2


PIN Input/ (3) Image process ASIC (HG73C114HF)
Signal code Operating
No. Output a. General
106 ESPAGE Input E-sort control The ASIC is composed of the three blocks: the image process block,
107 SIN1 Input HC151 select detection the print control block, and the I/F block.
108 SIN2 Input HC151 select detection
Image process section
109 SIN3 Input HC151 select detection
110 Pull up According to the operation mode set by the register set value, the
111 KEY IN Input NC image data from the CCD PWB are placed under shading, AE pro-
112 MSUST1 Input NC cess, input gamma process, area separation, filter process, resolu-
113 Avss DGND tion conversion, zoom process, output gamma process, and binary
114 GND DGND coding.
115 /SCANSP Output Scan STOP signal Print control section
116 /SCANST Output Scan START signal During copying, image-processed data are outputted to the LSU at
117 /TRANSST Output ASIC transfer signal the timing of LSU writing.
118 PMCLK Output Polygon clock I/F section
119 SPMT3 Output SPF motor signal
This section performs DRUM control as image data buffer, image
120 SPMT2 Output SPF motor signal
data send/receive with the OA982, and data send/receive with the
121 SPMT1 Output SPF motor signal
IEEE1284 I/F.
122 SPMT0 Output SPF motor signal
123 GND DGND
124 GND DGND
125 Vcc CPU3.3V
126 PSL Output Power save LED control
127 /CS3 Output Chip select signal
128 /CS2 Output ASIC chip select

nCS2
nRD PORT1OUT[15..0]

nLWR
I/O PORT PORT2OUT[10..0]

CPU BUS
A[9..1]
I/F
D[15..0] OPE-LATCH
OPE-DATA
LED Driver to OPU-PWB
nRESET OPE-CLK
Control

TMCLK,TMEN
JTAG TONER MOTOR to TONER MOTOR DRIVER
TM,TM-
Control

to SDRAM
64Mb or 128Mb CCD-RS,CCD-CK1,CCD-CK2
to CCD(SCAN UNIT)
(Op.400MByte) CCD-CP,CCD-SHR
bsmp,vsmp,mclk,OEB
afesen,afesck,afesdi
to AFE(SCAN UNIT)
AFE-DB[7..0]

to USB I/F
to IEEE1284 I/F

MIRCNT,MTR-Y1,MTR-PH-1,MTR-I01,MTR-I11,MTR-I21
MTR-Y2,MTR-PH-2,MTR-I02,MTR-I12,MTR-I22

to MIRROR MOTOR DRIVER


SYNC
LD
to LSU-PWB to CCFL(Scan UNIT)
LEND CL
CPUSYNC

AL-1556/1566 ELECTRICAL SECTION 12 - 3


b. ASIC (Signal table) PIN
Signal Name IN/OUT Connected to Description
PIN No.
Signal Name IN/OUT Connected to Description
No. 53 mc OUT Tr array IC Main charger control
1 cpudata7 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus signal. "H": ON
2 cpudata6 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus 54 bias OUT I/O HV bias drive
3 cpudata5 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus 55 NC OUT I/O Not used
4 cpudata4 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus 56 vfmcnt OUT Tr array IC Ventilation fan
5 VCC_AC Power rotation speed control
6 cpudata3 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus signal. "H": High
7 cpudata2 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus speed, "L": Low
speed
8 cpudata1 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus
9 cpudata0 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus 57 VCC_core Power
10 GND_AC Power 58 vfm OUT Tr array IC Ventilation fan control
signal. "H": Fan ON
11 mircnt OUT Buffer IC SPF scanner select
signal 59 /FPOFF OUT I/O FAX poff signal
12 cpusync OUT CPU CPU SYNC signal 60 GND_core Power
61 DEV DIR OUT I/O CRUM bus control
13 mem_intr Not used
14 arb_intr OUT CPU INTR signal 62 spfclh OUT Tr array IC SPF/RSPF resist
roller clutch control
15 VCC_core Power
signal "H":ON
16 cpu_ad8 IN CPU CPU address bus
63 spfrsol OUT Tr array IC SPF/RSPF document
17 cpu_ad7 IN CPU CPU address bus
feed solenoid control
18 cpu_ad6 IN CPU CPU address bus signal "H":ON
19 cpu_ad5 IN CPU CPU address bus 64 spfgsol OUT Tr array IC SPF/RSPF gate
20 GND_core Power solenoid control
21 ram_clk_in IN ASIC SDRAM clock on the signal "H":ON
board 65 spfpsol OUT Tr array IC SPF/RSPF document
22 cpu_ad4 IN CPU CPU address bus transport solenoid
23 cpu_ad3 IN CPU CPU address bus control signal "H":ON
24 cpu_ad2 IN CPU CPU address bus 66 VCC_core Power
25 cpu_ad1 IN CPU CPU address bus 67 bias OUT Tr array IC DV bias control
26 cpu_ad0 IN CPU CPU address bus signal. "H":ON
27 xcpucs IN CPU CS signal 68 lden OUT Tr array IC Laser circuit control
28 sfclk IN Oscillator Clock signal. "H": Laser
29 GND_core Power circuit ON
30 xcpuwr IN CPU CPU write signal 69 GND_AC Power
31 xcpurd IN CPU CPU read signal 70 MRPS1 OUT I/O SPF current control
32 nrst IN SYSTEM SYSTEM RESET 71 MRPS2 OUT I/O SPF current control
RESET 72 MRPS3 OUT I/O SPF current control
33 VCC_core Power 73 CPFS1 OUT I/O 1st cassette pick up
34 pfclk2 IN Not used solenoid
35 clock_sw IN Pull up 74 VCC_AC Power
36 GND_core Power 75 CPFS2 OUT I/O 2nd cassette pick up
37 pfclk1_xout OUT X-tal units VIDEO clock solenoid
38 pfclk1 IN X-tal units VIDEO clock 76 pr OUT I/O Power relay control
77 hl OUT Tr array IC Heater lamp control
39 VSSPLL2 Pull up
signal. "H":ON
40 VDDPLL2 Pull up
78 GND_core Power
41 VSS2 Pull up
79 MPFS OUT I/O Multi-bypass solenoid
42 VDDI2 Pull up
80 miron OUT Buffer IC SPF scanner select
43 tm2_15m Pull up
signal
44 xsync IN LSU Horizontal sync
81 spfon OUT Buffer IC SPF ON signal
signal from LSU
82 KEYSC1 OUT I/O Key sense control
(/SYNC)
45 GND_AC Power 83 KEYSC2 OUT I/O Key sense control
46 xld OUT LSU Laser drive signal 84 KEYSC3 OUT I/O Key sense control
85 IMC ready OUT I/O IMC control
47 xlend OUT LSU Laser APC signal
48 VCC_AC Power 86 VCC_core Power
49 mmd OUT Tr array IC Main motor control 87 tmx OUT Buffer IC Toner motor control
signal. "H": Main signal
motor ON 88 tm OUT Buffer IC Toner motor control
50 pmd OUT I/O Polygon motor drive signal
51 tc OUT Tr array IC Transfer charger 89 op_data OUT Tr array IC Operation circuit data
control signal. "H":ON signal
52 gridl OUT Tr array IC Main charger grid 90 ope_latch OUT Tr array IC Operation circuit latch
control signal. "H": L signal. Data take-in at
"L"
output
91 GND_AC Power

AL-1556/1566 ELECTRICAL SECTION 12 - 4


PIN PIN
Signal Name IN/OUT Connected to Description Signal Name IN/OUT Connected to Description
No. No.
92 op_clk OUT Tr array IC Operation circuit 125 vmin IN I/F board VMIN signal (USB
clock signal connector communication port)
93 VCC_AC Power 126 vpin IN I/F board VPIN signal (USB
94 scanstop IN CPU Scan stop signal connector communication port)
95 testpin0 IN TEST TEST 127 rcv IN I/F board RCV signal (USB
96 testmode_on IN TEST TEST connector communication port)
97 ie1284_stb IN I/F board /STB signal 128 scanst IN CPU Scan start signal
connector (IEEE1284 129 printst IN Start signal Start signal
communication port) 130 receptst IN Start signal Start signal
98 ie1284_autofd IN I/F board /AUTOFD signal 131 transst IN CPU Data transfer start
connector (IEEE1284 signal
communication port) 132 VCC_core Power
99 VCC_core Power 133 dci_dat7 IN E-SORT E-SORT data bus
100 ie1284_slctin IN I/F board /SLCTIN signal (OA982)
connector (IEEE1284 134 dci_dat6 IN E-SORT E-SORT data bus
communication port) (OA982)
101 ie1284_init IN I/F board /INIT signal 135 dci_dat5 IN E-SORT E-SORT data bus
connector (IEEE1284 (OA982)
communication port) 136 dci_dat4 IN E-SORT E-SORT data bus
102 ie1284_slct OUT I/F board SLCT signal (OA982)
connector (IEEE1284 137 dci_dat3 IN E-SORT E-SORT data bus
communication port) (OA982)
103 GND_core Power 138 dci_dat2 IN E-SORT E-SORT data bus
104 ie1284_pe OUT I/F board PE signal (IEEE1284 (OA982)
connector communication port) 139 dci_dat1 IN E-SORT E-SORT data bus
105 ie1284_busy OUT I/F board BUSY signal (OA982)
connector (IEEE1284 140 dci_dat0 IN E-SORT E-SORT data bus
communication port) (OA982)
106 ie1284_ack OUT I/F board /ACK signal 141 GND_core Power
connector (IEEE1284 142 out_dc_req IN E-SORT E-SORT control
communication port) (OA982) signal
107 ie1284_fault OUT I/F board /FAULT signal 143 in_dc_req IN E-SORT E-SORTcontrol signal
connector (IEEE1284 (OA982)
communication port) 144 GND_AC Power
108 VCC_core Power 145 out_dc_ack OUT E-SORT E-SORT control
109 ie1284_rev OUT I/F board /REV signal (OA982) signal
connector (IEEE1284 146 out_dc_wt OUT E-SORT E-SORT control
communication port) (OA982) signal
110 ie1284_parad7 IN/OUT I/F board DATA bus (IEEE1284 147 VCC_AC Power
connector communication port)
148 in_dc_ack OUT E-SORT E-SORTcontrol signal
111 ie1284_parad6 IN/OUT I/F board DATA bus (IEEE1284 (OA982)
connector communication port)
149 in_dc_cs OUT E-SORT E-SORTcontrol signal
112 ie1284_parad5 IN/OUT I/F board DATA bus (IEEE1284 (OA982)
connector communication port)
150 dco_dat7 OUT E-SORT E-SORT data bus
113 ie1284_parad4 IN/OUT I/F board DATA bus (IEEE1284 (OA982)
connector communication port)
151 dco_dat6 OUT E-SORT E-SORT data bus
114 ie1284_parad3 IN/OUT I/F board DATA bus (IEEE1284 (OA982)
connector communication port)
152 dco_dat5 OUT E-SORT E-SORT data bus
115 ie1284_parad2 IN/OUT I/F board DATA bus (IEEE1284 (OA982)
connector communication port)
153 dco_dat4 OUT E-SORT E-SORT data bus
116 VCC_AC Power (OA982)
117 ie1284_parad1 IN/OUT I/F board DATA bus (IEEE1284
154 dco_dat3 OUT E-SORT E-SORT data bus
connector communication port) (OA982)
118 ie1284_parad0 IN/OUT I/F board DATA bus (IEEE1284
155 VCC_AC Power
connector communication port)
156 dco_dat2 OUT E-SORT E-SORT data bus
119 suspend OUT I/F board SUSPEND signal
(OA982)
connector (USB communication
157 dco_dat1 OUT E-SORT E-SORT data bus
port)
(OA982)
120 GND_AC Power
158 dco_dat0 OUT E-SORT E-SORT data bus
121 oen OUT I/F board OEN signal (USB
(OA982)
connector communication port)
159 hsync FAX FAX
122 vmout OUT I/F board VMOUT signal (USB
160 GND_core Power
connector communication port)
161 out_req Not used
123 vpout OUT I/F board VPOUT signal (USB
162 in_ack Not used
connector communication port)
163 in_cs Not used
124 GND_core Power
164 GND_AC Power

AL-1556/1566 ELECTRICAL SECTION 12 - 5


PIN PIN
Signal Name IN/OUT Connected to Description Signal Name IN/OUT Connected to Description
No. No.
165 mdat00 Not used 226 mtr_y1 OUT Tr array IC Carriage motor
166 mdat01 Not used current control signal
167 mdat02 Not used 227 VCC_core Power
168 mdat03 Not used 228 mtr_phase2 OUT Motor driver Carriage motor
169 VCC_core Power control signal
170 mdat04 Not used 229 mtr_i02 OUT Motor driver Carriage motor
171 mdat05 Not used control signal
172 mdat06 Not used 230 mtr_i12 OUT Motor driver Carriage motor
control signal
173 GND_core Power
231 mtr_i22 OUT Motor driver Carriage motor
174 mdat07 Not used
control signal
175 mdat08 Not used
232 mtr_phase1 OUT Motor driver Carriage motor
176 mdat09 Not used
control signal
177 VCC_AC Power
233 mtr_i01 OUT Motor driver Carriage motor
178 mdat10 Not used
control signal
179 mdat11 Not used
234 mtr_i11 OUT Motor driver Carriage motor
180 mdat12 Not used control signal
181 VCC_core Power 235 mtr_i21 OUT Motor driver Carriage motor
182 mdat13 Not used control signal
183 mdat14 Not used 236 GND_AC Power
184 mdat15 Not used 237 ram_mad3 OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image
185 GND_AC Power process page
186 pcl_s_print Not used memory) address bus
187 fax_s_print Not used 238 ram_mad2 OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image
188 es_s_print Not used process page
189 out_ack Not used memory) address bus
190 out_cs Not used 239 GND_core Power
191 in_req Not used 240 ram_mad1 OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image
192 VCC_core Power process page
memory) address bus
193 TCK JTAG Not used
194 TMS JTAG Not used 241 ram_mad0 OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image
process page
195 TRSTA JTAG Not used
memory) address bus
196 TDI JTAG Not used
242 ram_mad10 OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image
197 TDO JTAG Not used
process page
198 GND_core Power memory) address bus
199 afp_vsmp OUT CCD PWB AFE control signal 243 VCC_core Power
200 ccd_tg OUT CCD PWB CCD control signal 244 ram_banks1 OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image
201 ccdrs OUT CCD PWB CCD control signal process page
202 afp_bsmp OUT CCD PWB AFE control signal memory) BANK
203 ccdcp OUT CCD PWB CCD control signal signal
204 afe_sdata IN CCD PWB AD's serial data 245 ram_banks0 OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image
205 ccd_ph2 OUT CCD PWB CCD control signal process page
206 ccd_ph1 OUT CCD PWB CCD control signal memory) BANK
207 afp_afesen OUT CCD PWB AFE control signal signal
208 GND_core Power 246 xram_cs OUT SDRAM (Image
209 afp_adcclk OUT CCD PWB AFE control signal process page
memory) CS signal
210 VCC_core Power
247 xram_ras OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image
211 afp_afesck OUT CCD PWB AFE control signal
process page
212 GND_AC Power
memory) RAS signal
213 afp_data7 IN CCD PWB Image scan data
248 xram_cas OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image
214 afp_data6 IN CCD PWB Image scan data process page
215 afp_data5 IN CCD PWB Image scan data memory) CAS signal
216 afp_data4 IN CCD PWB Image scan data 249 VCC_AC Power
217 afp_data3 IN CCD PWB Image scan data 250 xram_wde OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image
218 afp_data2 IN CCD PWB Image scan data process page
219 afp_data1 IN CCD PWB Image scan data memory) WDE signal
220 afp_data0 IN CCD PWB Image scan data 251 ram_dqm0 OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image
221 VCC_AC Power process page
222 cl OUT Logic IC Copy lamp control memory) DQM signal
signal 252 GND_AC Power
223 GND_core Power 253 ram_data7 IN/OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image
224 mtr_y3 OUT I/O Carriage motor process page
current control signal memory) data bus
225 mtr_y2 OUT Tr array IC Carriage motor
current control signal

AL-1556/1566 ELECTRICAL SECTION 12 - 6


PIN PIN
Signal Name IN/OUT Connected to Description Signal Name IN/OUT Connected to Description
No. No.
254 ram_data6 IN/OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image 281 VCC_core Power
process page 282 ram_mad8 OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image
memory) data bus process page
255 ram_data5 IN/OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image memory) address bus
process page 283 ram_mad7 OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image
memory) data bus process page
256 ram_data4 IN/OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image memory) address bus
process page 284 VCC_AC Power
memory) data bus 285 ram_mad6 OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image
257 GND_core Power process page
258 ram_data3 IN/OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image memory) address bus
process page 286 ram_mad5 OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image
memory) data bus process page
259 ram_data2 IN/OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image memory) address bus
process page 287 ram_mad4 OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image
memory) data bus process page
260 ram_data1 IN/OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image memory) address bus
process page 288 GND_AC Power
memory) data bus 289 cpudata15 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus
261 ram_data0 IN/OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image 290 cpudata14 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus
process page 291 cpudata13 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus
memory) data bus
292 cpudata12 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus
262 GND_AC Power 293 cpudata11 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus
263 ram_data15 IN/OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image 294 cpudata10 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus
process page
295 cpudata9 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus
memory) data bus
296 cpudata8 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus
264 ram_data14 IN/OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image
process page (4) Reset circuit
memory) data bus This circuit detects ON/OFF of the power source, and controls start/
265 VCC_AC Power stop of each circuit. The voltage of 3.3V in the MCU PWB is detected
266 ram_data13 IN/OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image by the reset IC to generate the reset signal.
process page When the power voltage reaches the specified level, each circuit is
memory) data bus operated, but stopped before the power voltage falls below the speci-
267 ram_data12 IN/OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image fied level in order to protect against malfunction of the circuit. The
process page CPU/Flash ROM is reset by the power reset circuit, and system reset
memory) data bus of ASIC, OA982, FAX, and NIC is generated from the CPU (general-
268 ram_data11 IN/OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image purpose port output).
process page
Reset IC
memory) data bus
269 ram_data10 IN/OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image
VCC3 VCC3
process page
memory) data bus
1

270 ram_data9 IN/OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image


1

R18
process page 11kF IC4 R19
3.3kJ
memory) data bus 1
NC NC
8
2

2 7
IN VCC
2

271 ram_data8 IN/OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image 3


NC OUT
6 /RESET0 (2-C4)
1

4 5
R20 GND Cd
process page
1

M51957BFP C22 C23


memory) data bus 10kF
0.1u OPEN
272 VCC_core Power
2

273 ram_dqm1 OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image


process page
memory) DQM signal
274 ram_cke OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image
process page
memory) CKE signal
275 GND_AC Power
276 ram_clk_out SDRAM SDRAM's clock
277 GND_core Power
278 ram_mad12 OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image
process page
memory) address bus
279 ram_mad11 OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image
process page
memory) address bus
280 ram_mad9 OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image
process page
memory) address bus

AL-1556/1566 ELECTRICAL SECTION 12 - 7


(5) Heater lamp control circuit
a. Outline The CPU converts the inputted analog voltage into a digital value. The
The heater lamp control circuit detects the heat roller surface tempera- digital conversion value and the set value of the test command are
ture, and converts the temperature into a voltage. The converted volt- compared to control ON/OFF of the heater lamp according to the level,
age is inputted to the CPU. controlling the heat roller surface temperature to be the fixed level.

VCC3 12V VCC3

1
R66 R67 R69
1kF 1MF R68 1kJ
7.5kF IC22A
KIA393F

8
2

2
3 +
D1 1
1 2 2 - FTH (5-B2)

1
R70 MA700 12V

4
10kF R71
4.3kF
C110

1
2

2
0.1u

2
VCC3 VCC3

D2 D3
1 12V 1
3 3
2 2

KDS226 IC24A KDS226


KIA358F

8
R81 R82
3 +
(11-C1) RTH_IN 300J 100J RTH (1-A3)
1 1 2 1 2
2 -
C112

1
C111 12V

4
22000p 0.1u

2
1
C113

INT5V 0.1u

2
1

D4
VCC3 12V 5V
1SS355

Q2
1 2

1
KRA119S R83 R84
1.2kF 10kJ
IC26 IC22B
KIA393F

8
(1-A2) PMCLK 1 16 PMCLK_A (11-B2)

2
2 1B 1C 15 5 +
(2-C1) MRPS1 2B 2C MRPS_1 (6-A1)
3 14 2 7
(2-D1) MRPS2 3B 3C MRPS_2 (6-A1) THOPEN (4-A4)
(2-D1) MRPS3 4 13 (6-A1) 6 -
4B 4C MRPS_3 3
(2-C1) LDEN 5 12 /LDEN (11-B2)
5B 5C
1
(2-D1) HL 6 11 R85

4
6B 6C

1
7 10 10kF C114
(5-E3) FTH 7B 7C
1

8 9 R86 R87
G NC 22000p
240J 240J

2
2

KID65503F
2

HLOUT (10-B3)

[High temperature protection circuit in case of CPU hung up [When the thermistor is open]
(uncontrollable)] The voltage at IC22 6Pin becomes higher than the voltage at 5Pin, and
For IC22 3Pin (reference voltage), +3.3V is divided by the resistor. The the 7Pin output THOPEN becomes LOW. This is inputted to the CPU
thermistor terminal voltage is inputted to IC22 2Pin. When, therefore, to display the trouble code H2.
the voltage at 2Pin falls below the voltage at 3Pin, IC22 1Pin becomes
(6) Driver circuit (Clutch, solenoid)
"H" and the HL signal is pulled to the GND level, suppressing genera-
tion of the lighting signal of the heater lamp. (IC22 output 1Pin is nor- Since a load cannot be directly driven by each load signal from the
mally Low.) CPU or the ASIC, each load is driven through the driver IC (transistor
array).
[When the heat roller surface temperature is lower than the set
level] A large drive current (load current) is ordained from a small input cur-
rent (ASIC output current).
a. When the thermistor terminal voltage is higher than the set level,
the output signal HL from ASIC becomes HIGH level. When the driver input voltage (base resistor input) is HIGH, the transis-
tor turns ON to flow a current through the load, operating the load.
b. This HL signal becomes the HLOUT signal through IC26, and is
inputted to the photo triac coupler in the power PWB. When, there-
+24V
fore, the HL signal is HIGH, the internal triac turns on.
c. When the internal triac turns on, the heater lamp lights up.
[When the heat roller surface temperature is higher than the set
level] ASIC/CPU
OUT PUT
a. When the thermistor terminal voltage falls below the set level, the
output signal HL from ASIC becomes LOW level.
b. The HL signal becomes LOW, the power PWB photo triac coupler LOAD
LOAD
turns OFF, and the heater lamp turns OFF.

AL-1556/1566 ELECTRICAL SECTION 12 - 8


(7) Toner motor control circuit
The IC32 is the motor drive IC, which generates pseudo-AC wave-
forms by the pulse signal from the ASIC to drive the toner supply
motor.

Tonner Motor Driver


24V

1
+

1
C128 C129
10u/35V
0.1u/50V

2
IC32 PGND
R105 17
19 Vcc 16
1kJ PSAVE VM
(4-D3) (TM) 1 2 20 9 TMB_O (11-A1)
18 Rin OUT1 5
(4-D3) (TM_) 1 2 TMA_O (11-A1)
21 Fin OUT2
R106 VREF
1

1kJ 6
R112 R113 RNF
1 8
47kJ 47kJ NC GND
2 FIN
3 NC FIN
4 NC 25
2

7 NC NC 24
10 NC NC 23
11 NC NC 22
12 NC NC 15
13 NC NC 14
PGND NC NC

BA6920FP

PGND

(8) Main motor control circuit/ LSU (Polygon motor) through the driver IC27 to the control circuit in the main motor/LSU,
control circuit rotating each motor.
The motors are driven by the MMD (main motor) signal and the PMD When the motor RPM reaches the specified level, the MMLD signal
(polygon motor) signal from the ASIC. (main) and the PMLD signal (LSU) become LOW. The CPU detects it
The MMD signal and the PMD signal are turned HIGH and sent to start process control.

5V

IC27
1

(2-C1) MMD 1 16 /MMD (11-A4) R88


2 1B 1C 15
(2-A3) MM_Y1 2B 2C MMref0 (6-A3) 10kJ Q3
(2-A3) MM_Y2 3 14 MMref1 (6-A3) KRC106S
4 3B 3C 13
(2-C1) MM_Y3 4B 4C MMref2 (6-A3)
5 12 3
(1-D3) POFF /POFF (10-B4) SHOLD (11-B2)
2

6 5B 5C 11
(2-C1) PMD 6B 6C /PMD (11-B2)
7 10 2
(2-C1) /LEND 7B 7C
8 9
G NC

KID65503F
1

(9) Mirror motor control circuit, SPF motor control circuit,


Duplex motor control circuit, Shifter motor control
circuit.
Stepping motors are employed for the mirror motor, the SPF motor,
and the duplex motor. The driver for IC29 (for the mirror motor) is the
bipolar drive constant current drive IC. The drive for IC31 (for the SPF)
is the uni-polar drive constant current drive IC. The drive for IC28 (for
the duplex) and IC30 (for the shifter) is the constant current drive IC.
Each motor is driven in W1-2 phase excitement, 1-2 phase excitement,
or 2-phase excitement.
The mirror motor/SPF motor related to image scan are driven by a con-
stant current, and each motor current is switched in each magnification
ratio.

AL-1556/1566 ELECTRICAL SECTION 12 - 9


Scanner Motor Driver

(10-D2) OUT_A-
(10-D2) OUT_A+
(10-D2) OUT_B+ 24VM 5V
(10-D2) OUT_B-
R90 R89
1 2
1 2

1
0.68J R91 0.68J

1
1W R92 1.5kJ 1W
1.5kJ
IC29
1 24
2 OUT 1A VS 23

2
3 OUT 2A SENSE 1 22 1 2

2
1 2 4 SENSE 2 COMP 1 21
5 COMP 2 OUT 1B 20 C115
OUT 2B I01 MM_AI0 (2-A3)
C116 6 19 820p
820p 7 GND GND 18 PGND
PGND GND GND
(2-A3) MM_BI0 8 17 MM_AI1 (2-A3)
5V 9 I02 I11 16
(2-A3) MM_BI1 I12 PHASE 1 MM_PH_A (2-A3)
(2-A3) MM_PH_B 10 15
11 PHASE 2 VREF 1 14
VREF 2 RC 1

1
12 13
RC 2 VSS
R93

1
1kJ L6219DS or AMM56219

1
C117 R94 R95 C118
820p 30kJ 30kJ 820p

2
2

2
1

1
5V

1
R96 R97 R98 C119 PGND PGND
2kJ 1kJ 510J 0.1u
PGND

2
PGND
2

1
(5-C1) MMref0 C121
(5-C1) MMref1 0.1u
(5-C1) MMref2

2
PGND

PGND

SPF Motor Driver

C125 2200p
1 2

1 2
R99 7.5kJ

R100 7.5kJ
1 2

1 2
C126 2200p

C127 OPEN
PGND
5V 1 2
1

C130
1

R101 24VM
1kJ OPEN
1

R103 1J 2W
2

R102
2

750J 1 2 IC31
C132
1

23 22
2

20 CrA Vmm
R104 2.4kJ CrB
2200p 25 1 SPMT_2 (11-E1)
2

1 2 3 VsA OUT /A 4
RsA OUT A SPMT_0 (11-D1)
24 14 SPMT_3 (11-D1)
VrefA OUT /B
1

19 11 SPMT_1 (11-E1)
1 2 12 VrefB OUT B
R107 R108 R109 R110 RsB
1

300J 620J 1.2kJ 100J C134 R111 2.4kJ 18


C135 VsB
1

0.1u 26
2

2200p 27 In /A
(5-C2) MRPS_1
2

1 2 17 In A 15
(5-C2) MRPS_2 In /B PG
(5-C2) MRPS_3 R114 1J 2W 16 28
PGND In B PG
1

C136
1

PGND R115
1kJ
OPEN
MTD1361/F
2
2

1 2
C137 OPEN
PGND
PGND

(4-D3) (SPFMT2)
(4-D3) (SPFMT0)
(4-D3) (SPFMT3)
(4-D3) (SPFMT1)

Duplex Motor Driver Shifter Motor Driver

IC28
3 2
IC30
(1-D3) DMT0 I1 O1 /DMT0 (11-B3)
4 R338 1 2 3 2
NC (4-B2) SFTMT0 /SFTMT0 (11-A1)
5 7 0J 4 I1 O1
NC O2 /DMT1 (11-B3)
6 5 NC 7
(1-D3) DMT1 I2 /SFTMT1 (11-A1)
10 9 R339 1 2 6 NC O2
NC O3 /DMT2 (11-B3) (4-B2) SFTMT1
11 0J 10 I2 9
(1-D3) DMT2 I3 /SFTMT2 (11-A1)
12 16 R340 1 2 11 NC O3
NC O4 /DMT3 (11-B3) (4-B2) SFTMT2
13 0J 12 I3 16
NC NC O4 /SFTMT3 (11-A1)
14 13
(1-D3) DMT3 I4
15 24VDup
R341 1 2 14 NC
NC (4-B2) SFTMT3 I4
0J 15 24VSFT
17 1 D5 NC
GND COM
18 8 17 1 D6
GND COM
18 GND COM 8
MTZ J22B
GND COM
TD62064AF
MTZ J22B
TD62064AF
PGND

PGND

AL-1556/1566 ELECTRICAL SECTION 12 - 10


(10) NIC PWB (12) Carriage Unit
The NIC PWB is used to realize 10Base-T network functions (print a. Outline
only). It is provided with the CPU, the Ether chip, FPGA, memory, and The carriage unit is provided with the CCD PWB, the inverter PWB, the
the RJ45LAN connector. Data are converted into IEEE1284 parallel lamps, etc. A document is radiated, and image data read by the CCD
data and sent to the MCU PWB, realizing network functions. are A/D converted to be sent to the ASIC.
(11) OPE PWB b. CCD PWB
a. Outline The color image sensor uPD8861 (5400 pixels x 3 lines) is used as the
The operation circuit is composed of the LCD control circuit, the key CCD on the CCD PWB to scan images in the resolution of 600dpi/US
matrix circuit, the display matrix circuit, and the buzzer circuit, realizing letter size in the main scanning direction.
the U/I functions. Image data scanned by the CCD are inputted to AFE (AD9826), where
b. LCD control circuit they are A/D-converted to output digital data. The output digital data
are sent to the MCU PWB and to the ASIC. The ASIC performs image
The character LCD (COG) in 2 lines and 16 digits is used. The display
process with the digital data.
data are sent from the MCU (CPU) to LCD internal registers, control-
ling the LCD. c. Lamp inverter PWB
c. Key matrix circuit The transformer is controlled by the lamp control signal from the MCU
PWB to turn ON/OFF the cool cathode ray tube by the transformer out-
The SEL signal is sent from the CPU of MCU to the matrix selector IC
put.
(multiplexer) in the operation circuit. The signal detects OFF/ON of the
key, and is sent to the CPU as serial data. B. DC power circuit
d. LED matrix circuit The DC power circuit directly rectifies the AC power and performs
The display is controlled by inputting the serial data signal, the clock switching-conversion with the DC/DC converter circuit, and rectifies
signal, and the latch signal from ASIC to the LED driver in the opera- and smoothes again to generate a DC voltage.
tion circuit. The constant voltage control circuit is of +5VEN. +24V and +12V are of
In the LED driver, data are set to the register (8bit) and latched to con- the non-control system by winding from the +5VEN winding. As shown
trol the IC output port, performing matrix-driving of ON/OFF of the LED. in fig (1), +24V, +12V, and +5V are provided with the ON/OFF function
by external signals. +3.3V is outputted from +5VEN to the regulator IC.
Refer to the block diagram, fig (1).

Rush current
prevention circuit Inverter circuit Rectifying/
Noise filter
Rectifying/ (Ringing choke converter system) smoothing circuit
circuit (Semiconductor switch)
smoothing
circuit

+12V regulator IC
(with ON/OFF function)

Rectifying/
smoothing circuit

(Semiconductor switch)

Overcurrent Control Constant-voltage +3.3V


protection circuit circuit detection circuit regulator IC

fig (1) Block diagram

AL-1556/1566 ELECTRICAL SECTION 12 - 11


(1) Noise filter circuit (3) Inverter and control circuit (Ringing choke converter
The filter circuit is composed of L and C. It reduces common noises system)
and normal mode noises generated from the AC line.
The common noise means that generated in each line for GND. Its
noise component is delivered through C002, C003, and C022 to GND.
The normal noise means that overlapped in the AC line or the output Np
line. It is attenuated by C023, C001, L002, C004, and L003. Refer to fig ID

(2).

Nc

Ns

fig (2) Noise filter circuit


(2) Rush current prevention circuit and rectifying/
smoothing circuit

Fig. (4) Inverter and control circuit


When the power is supplied to this circuit, the DC voltage, Vref, sup-
plied by the rectifying/smoothing circuit is applied through R006 and
R007 to FET (Q001), turning on Q001.
When Q001 is turned on, the drain current, ID, flows as the waveform B
in Fig. (5) to apply VDC to the main winding, NP, on the primary side.
At the same time, a voltage is generated in NC winding and applied
through R005 and C008b to the gate of Q001. As a result, Q001 is
fig (3) Rush current prevention, rectifying/smoothing circuit
turned on rapidly.
Since the AC power is directly rectified, if there were not this rush cur-
At the same time with this, C009 is charged through D001, R001, and
rent prevention resistor (TH001), an extremely large rush current
D012. When the potential of C009 reaches 0.7V (= VBE of Q002), Q002
would flow due to a charging current flowing through the smoothing
turns on to turn off Q001.
capacitor C006 when turning on the power.
To prevent against this, the rush current prevention resistor TH001 is
provided between the rectifying diode D003 and the smoothing diode
C006, suppressing a rush current.
The rectifying/smoothing circuit rectifies a 60Hz AC voltage with the
rectifying circuit, and smoothes it with the smoothing capacitor C006. Q001
VDS waveform

Q001
ID waveform

Secondary output side


D706 D113
ID waveform
Fig. (5) Ringing choke converter operation waveforms

AL-1556/1566 ELECTRICAL SECTION 12 - 12


When Q001 turns off, energy accumulated in the transformer (T001)
flows a current of waveform C in the path indicated with dotted line as
shown in the figure above through D101 and D113 and dissipates to
the secondary output side. When this energy is exhausted, the current
flowing through D101 and D113 turns off. However, the NS winding has
a slight remaining energy, which generates a voltage in the base wind-
ing NC and turns on Q001 again to repeat switching operation, supply-
ing a high frequency power to the secondary side.
(4) Overcurrent protection circuit (Primary side)
The ON period extension due to an increased output load is detected,
and the OFF period of Q001 is extended by the control circuit, and
energy accumulated in the primary winding of the transformer T001 is
reduced, providing protection against an overcurrent. Refer to Fig. (4).
(5) Rectifying/smoothing circuit (+5V)

fig (6) Rectifying/smoothing circuit


The high frequency pulse generated by the inverter circuit is
decreased by the converter transformer, rectified by the high frequency
diode D113, and smoothed by C107 and C108.

Voltage waveform

Voltage waveform

fig (7) +5V rectifying/smoothing circuit voltage waveform

AL-1556/1566 ELECTRICAL SECTION 12 - 13


[13] CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1. MCU PWB
A B C

MCU PWB (CPU section)

VCC3 Spreading Range :


+/- 1.25% C1
*6
When IC1 is, mounted NOT mounted
R1
R4(*3) OPEN 0J OPEN IC1
R2 *2 R3 *1
8 1
OPEN 680J
R3(*1) 7 VDD Xin 2
4 VCC3 6 SR0 Xout 3
22J OPEN
R7(*4) 5 MODOUT FS0 4 X1
C2 SSon Vss HC-49U/S
R2(*2) 0J OPEN 0.1u 19.6608MHz
P2010/PLL701-01
C3(*5) 22pF 15pF R4 *3

C1(*6) 22pF 15pF R5 R6


0J 0J
*R2,R3,C1, and C3 are tentative C3 *5
R7 *4

C4

12p

/PRINTST /PRINTST
(2-E3)

/RESET1
RD R8 33J
(13-B2) (3-A2) (2-C1) /RD R9 33J
(3-A2) (4-A2) /HWR HWR
LWR R10 100J
(2-C1) /LWR

(4-C2) SELIN3
(4-C2) SELIN2

CPUCLK(NC)
(4-C2) SELIN1

/WDTOVF
ESS_TS

/STBY
(8-A3) ESS_TS ES_CMD

NMI
(8-A3) ES_CMD /ESS_RDY
(8-A2) /ESS_RDY /ESC_RDY
(8-A2) /ESC_RDY

VCC3

3
10kJ

10kJ

10kJ

IC2

102
101
100
99
98
97
96
95
94
93
92
91
90
89
88
87
86
85
84
83
82
81
80
79
78
77
76
75
74
73
72
71
70
69
68
67
66
65
NMI
P52/SCK2

P51/RxD2
P50/TxD2

PF2/LCAS/WAIT/BREQO

PF7/0

P24/PO4/TIOCA4
P25/PO5/TIOCB4
P20/PO0/TIOCA3
P21/PO1/YICOB3
P22/PO2/TIOCC3
P23/PO3/TIOCD3

P26/PO6/TIOCA5
P27/PO7/TIOCB5
Vss
Vss

VCC

Vss

VCC

Vss
Vss

Vss
EXTAL
XTAL
P53/ADTRG

PF0/BREQ
PF1/BACK

PF3/LWR
PF4/HWR
PF5/RD
PF6/AS

STBY

RES
WDTOVF

P63/TEND1
P62/DREQ1
P61/TEND0/CS5

P60/DREQ0/CS4
R12

R13
R11

103
104 AVcc P3
105 Vref P34
(5-E3) RTH P40/AN0 P3
106
(8-A2) /ES_PAGE 107 P41/AN1 P32
(4-D4) (SIN1) P42/AN2 P3
(4-D4) (SIN2) 108
109 P43/AN3 P3
(4-D4) (SIN3) P44/AN4
110
111 P45/AN5 PD
(4-D4) (KEYIN) P46/AN6/DA0 PD
(13-B2) MSU_ST1 C386 112
OPEN 113 P47/AN7/DA1 PD
R337 114 AVss PD
/SCANSP 33J 115 Vss
(2-D2) /SCANSP P17/PO15/TIOCB2/TCLKD P
(2-E3) /SCANST
/SCANST
/TRANSST
116
117 P16/PO14/TIOCA2 HD6412321VF25(H8S/2321) PD
(2-E3) /TRANSST 118 P15/PO13/TIOCB1/TCLKC P
(5-B2) PMCLK SPFMT3 119 P14/PO12/TIOCA1 P
(4-C2) SPFMT3 SPFMT2 120 P13/PO11/TIOCD0/TCLKB P
(4-C3) SPFMT2/MIRCNT SPFMT1 121 P12/PO10/TIOCC0/TCLKA P
(4-C3) SPFMT1 SPFMT0 122 P11/PO9/TIOCB0/DACK1 P
(4-C3) SPFMT0 123 P10/PO8/TIOCA0/DACK0 P
124 MD0
125 MD1 P
MD2 P

P67/CS7/IRQ3
P66/CS6/IRQ2
PA4/A20/IRQ4
PA5/A21/IRQ5
PA6/A22/IRQ6
PA7/A23/IRQ7
(4-C3) PSL 126
127 PG0/CAS
PG1/CS3 P

P65/IRQ1
P64/IRQ0
128
PG3/CS1
PG4/CS0

PB2/A10

PB4/A12
PB5/A13
PB6/A14
PB7/A15
PB3/A11

PA0/A16
PA1/A17
PA2/A18
PA3/A19
PG2/CS2
PC0/A0
PC1/A1
PC2/A2
PC3/A3

PC4/A4
PC5/A5
PC6/A6
PC7/A7
PB0/A8
PB1/A9

BR110
5 4 /CS3#
VCC

/CS3
Vss

Vss

Vss

Vss

Vss
Vss
NC

/CS2 6 3 /CS2#
/CS1 7 2 /CS1#
8 1 /CS0#
10

12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
/CS0
11
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

33J
OPEN

2
C381

C383
22pF

OPEN

OPEN
C382

C384

BR20

BR21

BR22

Reset IC
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5

8
7
6
5
33J

33J

33J

VCC3 VCC3 VCC3


1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4

1
2
3
BR24 4

C24
0.1u
BR23

8
7
6
5

8
7
6
5

R18
11kF R19
33J
33J

IC4
3.3kJ
1 8
2 NC NC 7
3 IN VCC 6
1
2
3
4

NC OUT /RESET0 (2-C4)


1
2
3
4

4 5
R20 GND Cd
10kF C22 C23
M51957BFP
A10

A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A11
A1
A2
A3

A5
A6
A7

A9
A0

A4

A8

0.1u OPEN

1
R21 33J
RESETOUT1 /ASIC_RST (2-D1) (8-A1) (9-B2)

R22 C25
10kJ 47p

A B C

AL-1556/1566 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 13 - 1


C D E

1/14
VCC3

BR1 BR4 BR5


/STBY 1 8 D15 1 8 /CS0# 1 8
NMI 2 7 D14 2 7 /CS1# 2 7
/WDTOVF 3 6 D13 3 6 /CS2# 3 6
4 5 D12 4 5 /CS3# 4 5
C5 C6 4
10kJ 10kJ 10kJ
100p 100p
BR3 BR6 BR7
/PRINTST 1 8 D11 1 8 ARB_INT 1 8
2 7 D10 2 7 (FW) 2 7
RY/BY 3 6 D9 3 6 CPU_SYNC 3 6
/CS4# 4 5 D8 4 5 mt_at_home 4 5
10kJ 10kJ 10kJ

BR94 BR8 BR9


/ESC_RDY 1 8 D7 1 8 CCD_TG 1 8
/ESS_RDY 2 7 D6 2 7 (SPPD) 2 7
ES_CMD 3 6 D5 3 6 (PSW) 3 6
ESS_TS 4 5 D4 4 5 A20 4 5
10kJ 10kJ 10kJ

BR2 BR10 BR11


DMT0 DMT0 (6-D4) DMT0 1 8 D3 1 8 CPUCLK(NC) 4 5
DMT1 DMT1 (6-D4) DMT1 2 7 D2 2 7 RD 3 6
DMT2 DMT2 (6-D4) DMT2 3 6 D1 3 6 HWR 2 7
DMT3 DMT3 (6-D4) DMT3 4 5 D0 4 5 LWR 1 8
RESETOUT1
10kJ 10kJ 10kJ
LCDDB6 (4-C1)
LCDDB7 (4-C1)
BZR (4-C3) BR12
LCDDB5 (4-C1) POFF 4 5
LCDDB4 (4-C1) TxD1 3 6
RY/BY RY/BY (3-B2) SDA 2 7
/CS4# R331 /CS4 (13-B2) SCL 1 8
33J
CPU3.3 10kJ
OPEN
C385

BR13
1 8
/TRANSST 2 7
/SCANST 3 6
/SCANSP 4 5
10kJ 3

BR15
65

SPFMT3 4 5
SPFMT2 3 6
Vss

SPFMT1 2 7
SPFMT0 1 8
64 LCDE (4-C1)
P35/SCK1 63 10kJ
P34/SCK0 LCDRS (4-C1)
62 SCL
P33/RxD1 61 SDA
P32/RxD0 BR18
60 TXD1 TxD1 (11-B2) (SIN1) 4 5
P31/TxD1 59 POFF (SIN2) 3 6
P30/TxD0 POFF (5-B1)
58 (SIN3) 2 7
VCC
PD7/D15
57 1 8 BR14 D15 (KEYIN) 1 8
PD6/D14
56 2 7 33J D14
55 3 6 D13 10kJ
PD5/D13 54 D12
PD4/D12 4 5
53
Vss 52 1 8 BR16 D11
PD3/D11 51 2 7 33J D10
PD2/D10 50 3 6 D9
PD1/D9 49 4 5 D8
PD0/D8 48 1 8 BR17 D7
PE7/D7 47 2 7 33J D6
PE6/D6 46 D5
3 6
PE5/D5 45 D4
4 5
PE4/D4 44
Vss 43 1 8 BR19 D3
PE3/D3 42 2 7 33J D2
PE2/D2 41 3 6 D1
PE1/D1 40 4 5 D0
PE0/D0
P64/IRQ0

39
VCC

D[15..0] (2-A1) (3-A1) (4-A2) (13-C2)


38

H8S/2321
2
Serial EE-PROM

VCC3 VCC3 VCC3

ARB_INT ARB_INT (2-B1)


(FW) C7
(FW) (4-D4) (8-A2)
CPU_SYNC 0.1u
CPU_SYNC (2-B1) IC3 R14
MT_HOME mt_at_home (14-C3)
CCD_TG 8 1 10kJ
CCD_TG (2-A4) (14-D3) VCC E0
(SPPD) (SPPD) (7-E1) 7 2
(PSW) SCL 6 WC E1 3
(PSW) (7-E1) SCL E2
A20 SDA 5 4
SDA VSS
R15 1kJ
24WC02 R17
SCL (4-A1) OPEN
SDA1 (4-B1)
R16 1kJ

A[19..0] (2-A1) (3-A3)

VCC3
L1
ZJSR5101-223
CPU3.3
0.1u

0.1u

0.1u

0.1u

0.1u

0.1u

C8
+ 1
10u/16V
C10

C12

C13

C14
C11
C9

C D E

AL-1556/1566 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 13 - 2


A B C

MCU PWB (ASIC section)

R23 33J
(14-A2) VSAMP

(1-D2),(14-D3) CCD_TG R24 33J BR2


/PCLPRO 4
R25 33J /FAXPRO 3
(14-D3) CCD_RS
/OUTACK 2
R26 33J /INREQ 1
(14-A2) BSAMP
R27 33J
(14-D3) CCD_CP
BR9
4 (14-A2) AFE_SDI AFE_SDI JTG_TCK 4
JTG_TMS 3

/RESET0 (1-B1) (3-B2)


R29 33J JTG_TDI 2
(14-D3) CCD_PHI2 JTG_TDO 1
R30 33J
(14-D3) CCD_PHI1

(14-A2) AFE_SEN
R31 33J /OUTCS
(14-A2) ADCLK
(14-A2) AFE_SCK

(14-A3) AFE_DB[7..0]
C47 C48 C49 C50 C51 C52 C53 C54 BR27
VCC3 AFE_DB7 33J 1 8
47p 47p 47p 47p 47p 47p 47p 47p AFE_DB6 2 7
AFE_DB5 3 6
1 8 AFE_DB7 AFE_DB4 4 5
2 7 AFE_DB6 BR30

JTG _TMS
JTG _TDO

/FA XPRO
/OU TACK
JTG_TCK

/PCLPRO
JTG_ TDI
3 6 AFE_DB5 AFE_DB3 33J 1 8

/OU TCS
/ESPRD
/IN REQ
4 5 AFE_DB4 AFE_DB2 2 7
BR29 10kJ AFE_DB1 3 6
1 8 AFE_DB3 AFE_DB0 4 5
2 7 AFE_DB2
3 6 AFE_DB1
(14-A4) CL
4 5 AFE_DB0
BR31 10kJ
R32 10kJ AFE_SDI

IC5

222
221
220
219
218
217
216
215
214
213
212
211
210
209
208
207
206
205
204
203
202
201
200
199
198
197
196
195
194
193
192
191
190
189
188
187
186
185
184
183
182
181
180
179
178
177
176
175
174
CCD_PH1
CCD_PH2

CCD_CP
CCD_RS
VCC(AC)

VCC(CORE)
ADCLK

AFE_SDI

VCC(CORE)

/PCLPRD

VCC(CORE)

VCC(AC)
AFE_DB0
AFE_DB1
AFE_DB2
AFE_DB3
AFE_DB4
AFE_DB5
AFE_DB6
AFE_DB7
GND(AC)

MDAT11
MDAT10

MDAT09
MDAT08
GND(CORE)

CCD_TG
GND(CORE)

TDI

GND(AC)
MDAT15
MDAT14
MDAT13

MDAT12
CLPWM

AFE_SEN

TD0

/ESPRD
AFESCK

BSAMP

VSAMP

TRSK

TCK

/FAXPRD
TMS

/INREQ
/OUTCS
/OUTACK

MD T0
VCC3

BR33 10kJ
1 8 MM_BI0 223
2 7 MM_BI1 224 GND(CORE)
3 6 MM_BI2 (5-B1) MM_Y3 225 MM_Y3
3 MM_AI0 (5-B1) MM_Y2 MM_Y2
4 5 (5-B1) MM_Y1 226
227 MM_Y1
R33 10kJ MM_AI1 228 VCC(CORE)
R34 10kJ MM_AI2 (6-B3) MM_PH_B MM_BI0 MM_PH_B
(6-B3) MM_BI0 229
MM_BI1 230 MM_BI0
(6-B3) MM_BI1
MM_BI2 231 MM_BI1
232 MM_BI2
(6-B3) MM_PH_A MM_AI0 MM_PH_A
233
(6-B3) MM_AI0
MM_AI1 234 MM_AI0
(3-E1) MAD[12..0] (6-B3) MM_AI1
MM_AI2 235 MM_AI1
236 MM_AI2
MAD3 1 8 237 GND(AC)
MAD2 2 7 238 RAM_MAD3
MAD1 RAM_MAD2
3 6 239
MAD0 4 5 240 GND(CORE)
BR39 33J 241 RAM_MAD1
MAD10 1 8 242 RAM_MAD0
RAM_MAD10
2 7 243
(3-D2) BANK1 3 6 244 VCC(CORE)
(3-D2) BANK0
4 5 245 RAM_BANKS1
(3-D2) /SDCS
BR41 33J RAM_BANKS0
246
1 8 247 RAM_CS
(3-D2) /SDRAS 2 7 248 RAM_RAS
(3-D2) /SDCAS RAM_CAS
(3-D2) /SDWDE 3 6 249
4 5 250 VCC(AC)
(3-E3) RAMDB[15..0] (3-D2) DQM0 BR43 33J 251 RAM_WDE
252 RAM_DQM0
RAMDB7 1 8 253 GND(AC)
RAMDB6 2 7 254 RAM_DATA7
VCC3 RAMDB5 3 6 255 RAM_DATA6
RAMDB4 RAM_DATA5
4 5 256
BR48 10kJ BR45 33J 257 RAM_DATA4 ASIC
1 8 RAMDB7 RAMDB3 1 8 258 GND(CORE)
RAMDB6 RAMDB2 RAM_DATA3 HG73C138HFV
2 7 2 7 259
3 6 RAMDB5 RAMDB1 3 6 260 RAM_DATA2
4 5 RAMDB4 RAMDB0 4 5 261 RAM_DATA1
BR49 33J 262 RAM_DATA0
BR53 10kJ RAMDB15 GND(AC)
1 8 263
1 8 RAMDB3 RAMDB14 2 7 264 RAM_DATA15
2 7 RAMDB2 RAMDB13 3 6 265 RAM_DATA14
RAMDB1 RAMDB12 VCC(CORE)
3 6 4 5 266
2 4 5 RAMDB0 BR52 33J 267 RAM_DATA13
RAMDB11 1 8 268 RAM_DATA12
BR57 10kJ RAMDB10 2 7 269 RAM_DATA11
1 8 RAMDB15 RAMDB9 3 6 270 RAM_DATA10
2 7 RAMDB14 RAMDB8 4 5 271 RAM_DATA9
3 6 RAMDB13 BR56 33J 272 RAM_DATA8
4 5 RAMDB12 1 8 273 VCC(CORE)
(3-E2) DQM1 2 7 274 RAM_DQM1
BR61 10kJ (3-E2) SDCKE 3 6 275 RAM_CKE
1 8 RAMDB11 4 5 276 GND(AC)
2 7 RAMDB10 BR60 82J 277 RAM_CLK_OUT
3 6 RAMDB9 MAD12 1 8 278 GND(CORE)
4 5 RAMDB8 MAD11 2 7 279 RAM_MAD12
MAD9 3 6 280 RAM_MAD11
MAD8 4 5 281 RAM_MAD9
BR62 33J 282 VCC(CORE)
MAD7 1 8 283 RAM_MAD8
MAD6 2 7 284 RAM_MAD7
MAD5 3 6 285 VCC(AC)
MAD4 4 5 286 RAM_MAD6
BR63 33J 287 RAM_MAD5
RAM_CLK_OUT 288 RAM_MAD4
(3-E2) SDCLK R351 GND(AC)
289
33J 290 CPUDATA15
291 CPUDATA14
C397 292 CPUDATA13
0.1u 293 CPUDATA12
294 CPUDATA11
295 CPUDATA10
296 CPUDATA9
RAM_CLK_IN

CPUDATA8
CPU_DATA7
CPU_DATA6
CPU_DATA5
CPU_DATA4

CPU_DATA3
CPU_DATA2
CPU_DATA1
CPU_DATA0

GND(CORE)

GND(CORE)

GND(CORE)
VCC(CORE)

VCC(CORE)

PFCLKOUT
/CPUSYNC

VCC3
GND(PLL)

GND(PLL)
CPU_AD8
CPU_AD7
CPU_AD6
CPU_AD5

CPU_AD4
CPU_AD3
CPU_AD2
CPU_AD1
CPU_AD0

VCC(PLL)
VCC(PLL)
MEM_INT

TM2_15M
SFCLK48
GND(AC)

GND(AC)
ARB_INT

PFCLKIN
VCC(AC)

VCC(AC)
/CPUWR
MIRCNT

OUTP00
/CPURD
/CPUCS

L3
/RESET

CLKSW

/VIDEO
PFCLK

/SYNC

/LEND

ZJSR5101-223 X2
8 5 SFCLK48
VCC OUTPUT R43
C67 33J
22000p

10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

0.1u C68
C66

1 4 12p
N.C. GND

1 OSC-31
RAM_CLK_OUT

48MHz
PFCLKOUT
MEM_INT

PFC LKIN
SFCLK48
D7
D6
D5
D4

D3
D2
D1
D0

PFC LK
CLKSW

SYNC#

C69 12p HC-49U/S (16.1511MHz)


D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8

(13-C2)(4-A2)
A9
A8
A7
A6

A5
A4
A3
A2
A1

(3-A1) (1-D2) D[15..0]


R44 0J
(8-A1) (1-B1) (/ASI C_RST)

PFCLKIN
(1-B3) /LWR
(1-A2) /CS2

(13-B2) (3-A2) (1-B3) /RD

(3-A3) (1-C1) A[19..0]


X3 PFCLKOUT
ARB_INT
MIRCNT
(1-D2) CPU_SYNC

VIDEO#

MMD

R45 0J
/LEND

C70 12p
(4-C1)
(5-B1)
(5 B1)
(9-B2)
(4-C3)

(1-D2)

A B C

AL-1556/1566 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 13 - 3


C D E

2/14

VCC3 VCC3
L2
BR25 10KJ ZJSR5101-102TA
4 5 G3.3V
3 6

0.1 u

0.1 u

0.1 u
0.1 u

0.1 u
0.1 u

0.1 u

0.1 u

0.1 u

0.1 u
2 7
1 8
C36 +

BR93 10KJ 47u/16V

C26

C27

C28
C29

C30
C31

C32

C33

C34

C35
4 5 4
3 6
2 7
1 8 PIDATA[7..0] (8-A4)

0.1 u

0.1 u

0.1 u
0.1 u

0.1 u
0.1 u

0.1 u

0.1 u

0.1 u

0.1 u
1 8 PIDATA0
2 7 PIDATA1
R28 3 6 PIDATA2
4 5 PIDATA3
BR26 33J

C37

C38

C39
C40

C41
C42

C43

C44

C45

C46
10KJ 1 8 PIDATA4
2 7 PIDATA5
3 6 PIDATA6
4 5 PIDATA7
BR28 33J

0.1 u

0.1 u

0.1 u
0.1 u

0.1 u
0.1 u

0.1 u

0.1 u

0.1 u

0.1 u
C55

C56

C57
C58

C59
C60

C61

C62

C63

C64
/H_SYNC (8-A2)

0.1 u
G3.3V

C65
177
176
175
174
173
172
171
170
169
168
167
166
165
164
163
162
161
160
159
158
157
156
155
154
153
152
151
150
149
VCC(AC)

VCC(CORE)

VCC(AC)
MDAT09
MDAT08
MDAT07
GND(CORE)
MDAT06
MDAT05
MDAT04

MDAT03
MDAT02
MDAT01
MDAT00
GND(AC)

GND(CORE)
/HSYNC
/INCS
/INACK

PIDATA0
PIDATA1
PIDATA2

PIDATA3
PIDATA4
PIDATA5
PIDATA6
PIDATA7
/POCS
/OUTREQ

1 8
2 7
3 6
148 4 5 /POREQ (8-A2)
/POREQ 147 BR32 33J
VCC(AC) 146 1 8
/PIWT /PIW R (8-A4)
145 2 7 /PIACK (8-A4) 3
/PIACK 144 3 6
GND(AC) 143 4 5 /POACK (8-A2) PODATA[7..0] (8-A2)
/POACK BR34 33J /PIREQ (8-A4)
142
/PIREQ 141
GND(CORE) 140 PODATA0
PODATA0 139 PODATA1 VCC3
PODATA1 138 PODATA2
PODATA2 137 PODATA3
PODATA3 136 PODATA4
PODATA4 135 PODATA5 R35 R310 10J
PODATA5 /PR_LINE (8-A2)
134 PODATA6 10kJ
PODATA6 133 PODATA7 R311 10J
PODATA7 /SC_LINE (8-A2)
132
VCC(CORE) 131
/TRANSST 130 /TRANSST (1-A2)
/RECEPTST 129
/PRINTST /PRINTST (1-B3)
128
/SCANST 127 /SCANST (1-A2)
RCV
RCV 126 VPIN
VPIN VMIN
125
VMIN 124
GND(CORE) 123
VPOUT
122
VMOUT 121
OEN 120 1 8
GND(AC) 119 2 7
SUSPEND 118 3 6 PARAD0 VCC3
IE1284_PARAD0 117 4 5 PARAD1
IE1284_PARAD1 116 BR44 33J
VCC(AC) PARAD2 BR35 10kJ
115 1 8
IE1284_PARAD2 114 2 7 PARAD3 MEM_INT 1 8
IE1284_PARAD3 113 3 6 PARAD4 CLKSW 2 7
IE1284_PARAD4 PARAD5 /POREQ
112 4 5 3 6
IE1284_PARAD5 111 BR47 33J PARAD6 /PIREQ 4 5
IE1284_PARAD6 110 1 8 PARAD7
IE1284_PARAD7 109 2 7
IE1284_REV /REV BR37 10kJ
108 3 6 /REV (12-A3)
VCC(CORE) 107 4 5 /FAULT PODATA0 1 8
IE1284_FAULT 106 BR51 33J /FAULT (12-A3) PODATA1 2 7
IE1284_ACK /ACK PODATA2
105 1 8 /ACK (12-A3) PARAD[7..0] (12-A3) 3 6
IE1284_BUSY 104 2 7 BUSY PODATA3 4 5 2
IE1284_PE BUSY (12-A3)
103 3 6 PE
GND(CORE) PE (12-A3)
102 4 5 SLCT SLCT (12-A3)
IE1284_SLCT 101 BR55 33J BR40 10kJ
IE1284_INIT 100 1 8 /INIT PODATA4 1 8
IE1284_SLCTIN /INIT (12-A3) PODATA5
99 2 7 /SLCTIN 2 7
VCC(CORE) /SLCTIN (12-A3)
98 3 6 /AUTOF D PODATA6 3 6
IE1284_AUTOFD /AUTOF D (12-A3) PODATA7
97 4 5 /STB /ST B (12-A3) 4 5
IE1284_STB 96 BR58 33J
TSP_MODE 95
TSO0 94 VCC3 VCC3 VCC3
/SCANSP /SCANSP (4-C3)
93
VCC(AC) 92
OPE_CLK OP_CLK (4-C3)
91 VCC3
GND(AC) 90
OPE_LATCH OP_LATCH (4-C3)
89 OP_DATA (4-C3) R37 R38 R39
OPE_DATA 88 10kJ OPEN OPEN BR46 10kJ
TM 87 TM (4-C2)
TM_ (4-C2) RCV 1 8
/TM 86 VPIN 2 7
VCC(CORE) 85 VMIN 3 6
OUTP14B 84 /IMC_READY (8-A2)
KEYSC3 (4-C2) PFCLK 4 5
OUTP13B 83
OUTP12B 82 KEYSC2 (4-C2) BR50 10kJ
OUTP11B 81 KEYSC1 (4-C2)
SPFO N (4-C2) PARAD0 1 8
OUTP10B 80 R40 R41 R42 PARAD1 2 7
OUTP09B 79 MIRON (4-C2) OPEN 10kJ 10kJ PARAD2 3 6
OUTP08B MPFS (5-B3)
78 PARAD3 4 5
GND(CORE) 77
OUTP07B 76 HL (5-B2) BR54 10kJ
OUTP06B PR (5-B3)
75 (5-B3) PARAD4 1 8
OUTP05B CPFS2
GND(CORE)

PARAD5 2 7
VCC(CORE)

VCC(CORE)

PARAD6 3 6
OUTP00A
OUTP01A
OUTP02A
OUTP03A
OUTP04A
OUTP05A
OUTP06A
OUTP15A
OUTP07A
OUTP08A

OUTP09A
OUTP10A
OUTP11A
OUTP12A
OUTP13A

OUTP14A
OUTP00B

OUTP01B
OUTP02B
OUTP03B
OUTP04B
GND(AC)
VCC(AC)

VCC(AC)

PARAD7 4 5
/VIDEO
/LEND

BR59 10kJ
/INIT 1 8
/SLCTIN 2 7
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74

/AUTOF D 3 6
/STB 4 5
VCC3

R352 33J 1
(/ASIC_RST)
R353 N.M.
R358 /RESET1
10kJ R354 N.M.
/OA_RST (9-B2) R46
SYNC# (/SYNC) (4-D4)
10J
VFMCNT
GRID L

R355 C398 C71


DEVDIR
SRRC

/FWREN
VIDEO#

SPUS
SPFS
MMD

LDEN
PMD

MRPS1
MRPS2
MRPS3
BIAS

CPFS1
VFM

SGS

RRS
/FPOFF

N.M. 47p 47p


/LEND

MC
TC
(4-C1)
(5-B1)

(5-B3)
(5-B1)
(5-B1)
(5-B4)
(5-B4)
(5-B4)
(5-B4)
(5-B3)

(5-B3)

(4-A1)

(5-B2)

(5-B2)
(5-B2)
(5-B2)
(5-B3)

C D E

AL-1556/1566 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 13 - 4


A B C

MCU PWB (Memory section)

(1-C1) (2-A1) A[19..0]

VCC3

10kJ
V

0J
R47

R48
R49
10kJ
IC7

IC8 A16 1 48
A0 1 6 D8 A15 2 A15 A16 47
A1 2 A0 I/O0 7 D9 A14 3 A14 BYTE 46
A2 3 A1 I/O1 10 D10 A13 4 A13 GND 45
A3 4 A2 I/O2 11 D11 A12 5 A12 DQ15 44
A4 13 A3 I/O3 22 D12 A11 6 A11 DQ7 43
A5 14 A4 I/O4 23 D13 A10 7 A10 DQ14 42
A6 15 A5 I/O5 26 D14 A9 8 A9 DQ6 41
A7 16 A6 I/O6 27 D15 9 A8 DQ13 40
A8 17 A7 I/O7 10 NC DQ5 39
A9 18 A8 HWRZ 11 NC DQ12 38
A10 19 A9 12 WE DQ4 37
A11 20 A10 VCC3 VCC3 /RESET0 13 RP VCC 36
A12 21 A11 14 VPP DQ11 35
A13 29 A12 (1-D3) RY/BY 15 WP DQ3 34
A14 30 A13 A19 16 RY/BY DQ10 33
A15 31 A14 8 A18 R51 0J 17 NC DQ2 32
A16 32 A15 VDD 24 A8 18 A17 DQ9 31
A16 VDD A7 19 A7 DQ1 30
C73 C74 A6 20 A6 DQ8 29
5 A5 21 A5 DQ0 28
(1-A2) /CS1 CS1Z CS1 A4 OE
RDZ 28 0.1u 0.1u A4 22 27
2 (15-B2) (2-C1) (1-B3) /RD OE A3 GND
(1-B3) /HWR HWRZ 12 9 A3 23 26
WE GND 25 A2 24 A2 CE 25
GND A1 A0
OPEN

OPEN

IS63LV1024L-12J-TR A17
Flash ROM
A1
R52

R53

(15-C2) (4-A2) (2-A1) (1-D2) D[15..0]

Flash ROM

IC7 LH28F400BVE-BL85

R51 OPEN

A B C

AL-1556/1566 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 13 - 5


C D E

3/14

RAMDB[15..0] (2-A2)

VCC3 VCC3

IC6

1 54
VCC3 RAMDB0 2 VCC VSS 53 RAMDB15
3 DQ0 DQ15 52
RAMDB1 4 VCCQ VSSQ 51 RAMDB14
RAMDB2 5 DQ1 DQ14 50 RAMDB13
6 DQ2 DQ13 49
R49 RAMDB3 7 VSSQ VCCQ 48 RAMDB12
10kJ RAMDB4 8 DQ3 DQ12 47 RAMDB11
9 DQ4 DQ11 46
RAMDB5 10 VCCQ VSSQ 45 RAMDB10
A17 RAMDB6 11 DQ5 DQ10 44 RAMDB9
12 DQ6 DQ9 43
RAMDB7 13 VSSQ VCCQ 42 RAMDB8
D15 14 DQ7 DQ8 41
D7 15 VCC VSS 40
D14 (2-A2) DQM0 16 LDQM NC 39
(2-A2) /SDWDE WE UDQM DQM1 (2-A2)
D6 17 38
(2-A2) /SDCAS CAS CLK SDCLK (2-A2)
D13 18 37 R50 0J
(2-A2) /SDRAS RAS CLKE SDCKE (2-A2)
D5 19 36 MAD12
D12 (2-A3) /SDCS 20 CS NC 35 MAD11
D4 (2-A3) BANK0 21 BA0 A11 34 MAD9
(2-A3) BANK1 BA1 A9
MAD10 22 33 MAD8
D11 MAD0 23 A10 A8 32 MAD7
D3 MAD1 24 A0 A7 31 MAD6
D10 MAD2 25 A1 A6 30 MAD5
D2 MAD3 26 A2 A5 29 MAD4
D9 27 A3 A4 28
D1 VCC VSS
D8 C399
D0 N.M.
SDRAM (16bit x 4bank)
RDZ

/CS0 (1-A2) 2
A1

VCC3

C75
0.1u
C76 C77 C78 C79 C80 C81 C82
0.1u 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u

MAD[12..0] (2-A3)

IC6

5 LH28F800BJE-PBTL90 SDRAM Vendor/Type

0J 128Mb(2Mx16bitx4bank)
MT48LC8M16A2TG-75(Micron)
HY57V281620HCT(Hyndai)
K4S281632E-TC75(Samsung)
W981216BH-75(Winbond)

64Mb(1Mx16bitx4bank) HY57V641620HGT-P Hyndai)


MT48LC4M16A2TG-75 Micron)
K4S641632F-TC75(Samsung)
K4S641632E-TC1H(Samsung)
W986416DH-7(Winbond)

C D E

AL-1556/1566 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 13 - 6


A B C

MCU PWB (Driver section 1)


Digital Input Multiplexer
5V
5V/3
IC9
(7-E2) (PPD1) 4 16
3 D0 VCC
(7-E4) (POD) D1
(7-E3) (MFD) 2
1 D2 R56
(7-E1) (CED1) D3
(7-E3) (TCS) 15 5 SIN1 (4-C4) (10-C4) KEYIN
14 D4 Y
(7-E4) (PMRDY) D5 SIN1
13 6 10J
(7-E3) DVS1 D6 W SIN2
4 (7-E1) (DRST) 12 SIN3
D7
SPFS
11 C83 C84
(10-E3)(4-E2) (SELIN1) A SRRC
(10-E3)(4-E2) (SELIN2) 10 SGS
9 B 0.1u 33p
(10-E3)(4-E2) (SELIN3) C SPUS
7 8
G GND
74HC151

5V

IC11
4 16
(7-E2) (PPD2) D0 VCC VCC3
3
(7-E4) (PPD3) D1
2
(5-E2) THOPEN D2 R57
1
(7-E1) (CED2) D3 R55
15 5 SIN2 (4-C4)
(7-C4) DSWS D4 Y 10kJ
14
(7-E3) (MMLD) D5 10J
13 6
12 D6 W
D7
(2-D2) OP_CLK
11 C87 C88
A (2-D2) OP_DATA
10 (2-D2) OP_LATCH
9 B 0.1u 33p
C (1-A2) PSL
7 8
G GND
FW
74HC151 (1-D3) BZR
/ASIC_RST

R317

47pF
5V
5V

C389
IC13
3

10kJ
4 16 R59
(7-E4) (SDSW) D0 VCC 10kJ
(7-E4) (SPID) 3
2 D1
(7-E4) (SB4D) D2 R60
(11-D3) (SDOD) 1
15 D3 5
(7-E4) (PD1) D4 Y SIN3 (4-C4)
(7-E4) (PD2) 14
13 D5 6 10J
12 D6 W
D7
11 C90 C91
10 A
9 B 0.1u 33p
7 C 8
G GND (4-C3) MIRCNT

74HC151
(1-A2) SPFMT0
(1-A2) SPFMT1
(1-A2) SPFMT2/MIRCNT
(1-A2) SPFMT3
(2-D1) MIRON
(2-D1) SPFON

Extension Digital Output Port


4
3
2
1

BR68
10kJ
(15-C2) (3-A1) (2-A1) (1-D2) D[15..0]
VCC3

IC15
5
6
7
8

VCC3 20
D8 2 VCC 19
VCC3 D1 Q1 SFTMT0 (6-D3)
D9 3 18 SFTMT1 (6-D3)
2 C93 D10 4 D2 Q2 17
D3 Q3 SFTMT2 (6-D3) R344
D11 5 16 SFTMT3 (6-D3) (1-B3) SELIN1
0.1u D12 6 D4 Q4 15 33J
D5 Q5 (1-B3) SELIN2
D13 7 14 R346
D6 Q6 (1-B3) SELIN3
D14 8 13 33J
D7 Q7 (2-D1) KEYSC1
IC17
5

D15 9 12 MCNT (2-D1) KEYSC2


1 D8 Q8
(1-A2) /CS3 (2-D1) KEYSC3
4 11 (2-D2) TM
2 1 CLK
(3-A2) (1-B3) /HWR OC (2-D2) TM_
10 C94
GND
NC7S32M5X
3

0.1u
74LCX574

VCC3

R336 EN5V
10kJ
IC18
3.3V 5 5V
Vcc
SDA1 1 2 (SDA1)
A B
3.3V

R347
(2-C1) (1-D3) LCDDB7 0J R348
DEVDIR 4 3 (1-D3) LCDDB6
OE GND R349 0J
(1-D3) LCDDB5 0J R350
TC7SBD385AFU (1-D3) LCDDB4 0J
C103 (1-D3) LCDE
0.1u (1-D3) LCDRS
/RESET0
/RESET#
OPEN

OPEN

1
R308 R309
10kJ 10kJ
3.3V EN5V 5V
C393

C394

IC20

1
(1-E2) SCL 4 (SCL1) (11-D3)
2
EN5V

NC7ST08M5X
C109

0.1u

For CRUM Model Only


A B C

AL-1556/1566 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 13 - 7


C D E

4/14

5V
VCC3
5V/3.3V 3.3V VCC3

R54
IC10 10kJ
20 IC45
2 VCC 18 5
1A1 1Y1 (KEYIN) (1-A3) Vcc
4 16 (SIN1)
6 1A2 1Y2 14 1 6
1A3 1Y3 (SIN2) (11-B2) /SYNC A1 Y1 (/SYNC) (2-E1)
8 12 (SIN3) 4
11 1A4 1Y4 9 3 4 C379
2A1 2Y1 SPFS# A2 Y2
13 7 SRRC#
15 2A2 2Y2 5 C85 0.1u
2A3 2Y3 SGS#
17 3 SPUS# 2
1 2A4 2Y4 47p GND
19 1G
10 2G C86 NC7WZ17
GND
74LCX244 0.1u

3.3V VCC3 3.3V


IC12 BR88 33J
20 1 8
2 VCC 18 2 7
1A1 1Y1 16 (OP_CLK) (10-E3)
4 3 6 (OP_DATA) (10-E3)
6 1A2 1Y2 14 4 5
1A3 1Y3 12 (OP_LATCH) (10-E3)
8 (PSL) (10-E4)
11 1A4 1Y4 9
13 2A1 2Y1 7
2A2 2Y2 5 (FW)
15 (BZR) (10-E3)
17 2A3 2Y3 3 R342
2A4 2Y4 (/ASIC_RST)
1 100J
19 1G
R315
47pF

2G
R58

10
GND C89 C388 5V
74LCX244 0.1u OPEN
C389

3
10kJ

10kJ

IC107
1
(2-C1) 4
VIDEO# /VIDEO
2 R61 100J (11-A2)

3.3V VCC3 3.3V NC7ST08M5X


5V

IC14
20
2 VCC 18
1A1 1Y1 C380
4 16 0.1u
6 1A2 1Y2 14
8 1A3 1Y3 12
11 1A4 1Y4 9
2A1 2Y1 (SPFMT0) (6-B1)
13 7 (SPFMT1) (6-B1)
15 2A2 2Y2 5
2A3 2Y3 (SPFMT2) (6-B1)
17 3 (SPFMT3) (6-B1)
1 2A4 2Y4
19 1G
2G
4
3
2
1

10
GND C92 BR67
74LCX244 0.1u
10kJ
5
6
7
8

5V
3.3V 5V
IC16
20 2
2 VCC 18
1A1 1Y1 (SELIN1) (4-A4) (10-E3)
R345 4 16
1A2 1Y2 (SELIN2) (4-A4) (10-E3)
33J 6 14
1A3 1Y3 (SELIN3) (4-A4) (10-E3)
8 12 (KEYSC1) (10-E3)
11 1A4 1Y4 9
2A1 2Y1 (KEYSC2) (10-E3)
13 7 (KEYSC3) (10-E3)
15 2A2 2Y2 5
2A3 2Y3 (TM) (6-D2)
17 3 (TM_) (6-D2)
1 2A4 2Y4
1G
0.1u

19
33pF

33pF

33pF

10 2G
GND
74VHCT244
C95
C390

C391

C392

VCC3
3.3V
IC19
20
2 VCC 18
1A1 1Y1 (LCDDB7) (10-E3)
4 16 (LCDDB6) (10-E3)
6 1A2 1Y2 14
1A3 1Y3 (LCDDB5) (10-E3)
8 12 (LCDDB4) (10-E3)
11 1A4 1Y4 9
2A1 2Y1 (LCDE) (10-E3)
13 7 (LCDRS) (10-E3)
15 2A2 2Y2 5 R323 1kJ /RESET#
17 2A3 2Y3 3 R324 33J
2A4 2Y4 /RESET1
1
19 1G
0.1u
OPEN

OPEN

OPEN

2G
10
GND 1
74LCX244
0.01uF

OPEN
C104
C394

C395

C396

C377

C378

C D E

AL-1556/1566 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 13 - 8


A B C

MCU PWB (Driver section 2)

24V
BR107 1.5kJ
4 1 8 IC21
(2-C1) MC
(2-C1) BIAS 2 7 1 16 /MC (
3 6 2 1B 1C 15
(2-C1) TC 2B 2C /BIAS (
(2-C1) GRIDL 4 5 3 14 /TC (
4 3B 3C 13
4B 4C /GRIDL (
R325 5 12
MCNT 5B 5C /MCNT
1.5kJ 6 11
R343 7 6B 6C 10
CPFS2 7B 7C /CPFS2
1.5kJ 8 9
E COM
KID65001AF
PGND

24V
BR108 1.5kJ
1 8 IC23
(2-D1) 2 7 1 16 /CPFS
CPFS1 1B 1C
3 6 2 15 /MPFS
(2-D1) MPFS 2B 2C
4 5 3 14 /RRS
(2-C1) RRS 3B 3C
4 13
1 8 5 4B 4C 12
(2-C1) VFM 5B 5C
2 7 6 11 /VFMC
(2-C1) VFMCNT 6B 6C
3 6 7 10 /PR
(2-D1) PR 7B 7C
4 5 8 9
E COM
3 BR109 1.5kJ
KID65001AF
PGND

24V

IC25
SPFS# 3 2 /SPFS (11-E1)
4 I1 O1
5 NC 7
NC O2 /SPUS (11-E1)
SPUS# 6 IC26
10 I2 9 1 16
NC O3 /SGS (11-E1) (1-A2) PMCLK 1B 1C PMCLK_
SGS# 11 (2-C1) MRPS1 2 15
12 I3 16 3 2B 2C 14 MRPS_1
NC O4 /SRRC (11-E1) (2-D1) MRPS2 3B 3C MRPS_2
13 (2-D1) MRPS3 4 13
14 NC 5 4B 4C 12 MRPS_3
SRRC# I4 (2-C1) LDEN 5B 5C /LDEN
15 (2-D1) HL 6 11
NC 7 6B 6C 10
(5-E3) FTH 7B 7C
17 1 8 9
18 GND COM 8 G NC
GND COM
KID65503F
TD62064AF
PGND

For SPF/DSPF Model Only

IC27
(2-C1) MMD 1 16
1B 1C /MMD (
(2-A3) MM_Y1 2 15
2B 2C MMref0 (
(2-A3) MM_Y2 3 14
3B 3C MMref1 (
(2-C1) MM_Y3 4 13
4B 4C MMref2 (
(1-D3) POFF 5 12
5B 5C /POFF (
6 11
(2-C1) PMD 6B 6C /PMD (
(2-C1) 7 10
/LEND 8 7B 7C 9
G NC
KID65503F

A B C

AL-1556/1566 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 13 - 9


C D E

5/14

4
C (10-B4)
AS (10-A4)
C (10-B4)
RIDL (10-A4)
CNT

PFS2

VCC3 12V VCC3

R66 R67 R68 R69


1kF 1MF 7.5kF 1kJ
IC22A
KIA393F

8
3 +
D1 1 FTH (5-B2)
2 -
MA700
12V

4
R70 R71
10kF 4.3kF
C110

0.1u
24V

R73
/CPFS1 (11-B3) VCC3 VCC3
/MPFS
47kJ
/RRS D2 D3
R78
Q1 1 1
KTA1505S 3 12V 3
/VFMCNT (11-A3)
4.7kJ 2 2
/PR (10-A3)
1/4W
VFMOUT
KDS226 KDS226 3
(11-A3) IC24A
KIA358F R81 R82

8
D40 3 + 300J 100J
(11-C1) RTH_IN
1SS355 1 RTH (1-A3)
2 -
C112
12V

4
C111
PGND 22000p 0.1u
C113

0.1u

INT5V
VCC3 12V 5V
D4

Q2 1SS355
KRA119S R83 R84
1

1.2kF 10kJ
IC22B
KIA393F
8

MCLK_A (11-B2) 5 +
RPS_1 (6-A1) 2 7
RPS_2 (6-A1) THOPEN (4-A4)
6 -
RPS_3 (6-A1) 3
DEN (11-B2)
4

R85 C114
10kF
R86 R87 22000p
240J 240J

HLOUT (10-B3)

12V 2

IC24B
KIA358F
8

5 +
7
6 -
4

5V

MD (11-A4) R88
Mref0 (6-A3) 10kJ Q3
Mref1 (6-A3) KRC106S
Mref2 (6-A3)
3 SHOLD (11-B2)
OFF (10-B4)
MD (11-B2)
2
1

C D E

AL-1556/1566 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 13 - 10


A B C

MCU PWB (Driver section 3)

4
Scanner Motor Driver

(10-D2) OUT_A-
(10-D2) OUT_A+
(10-D2) OUT_B+ 24VM 5V
(10-D2) OUT_B-
R89
R90

0.68J
0.68J R91 1W
1W R92 IC29 1.5kJ
1.5kJ 1 24
2 OUT 1A VS 23
3 OUT 2A SENSE 1 22
4 SENSE 2 COMP 1 21
5 COMP 2 OUT 1B 20
OUT 2B I01 19 C115
6 MM_AI0 (2-A3)
C116 GND GND 18 820p PGND
PGND 820p 7
8 GND GND 17
(2-A3) MM_BI0 9 I02 I11 16 MM_AI1 (2-A3)
5V (2-A3) MM_BI1 I12 PHASE 1 15 MM_PH_A (2-A3)
10 PHASE 2 VREF 1 14
(2-A3) MM_PH_B 11 VREF 2 RC 1 13
12 RC 2 VSS
R93
1kJ L6219DS or AMM56219
C117 R94 R95 C118
820p 30kJ 30kJ 820p

R96 R97 R98 C119 PGND 5V PGND


2kJ 1kJ 510J 0.1u
PGND PGND
3 C121 CP2
(5-C1) MMref0
0.1u 0603FA1.5A
(5-C1) MMref1
(5-C1) MMref2 24VM
PGND
C123
PGND 0.1u/50V 0

SPF Motor Driver

C125 2200p

R99 7.5kJ

R100 7.5kJ

C126 2200p

2 C127 OPEN PGND


5V

R101 C130
1kJ 24VM
OPEN
R102 R103 1J 2W
750J
IC31
C132 23 22
20 CrA Vmm
R104 2.4kJ 2200p 25 CrB 1
3 VsA OUT /A 4 SPMT_2 (11
24 RsA OUT A 14 SPMT_0 (11
19 VrefA OUT /B 11 SPMT_3 (11
12 VrefB OUT B SPMT_1 (11
R107 R108 R109 R110
300J 620J 1.2kJ 100J C134 18 RsB
R111 2.4kJ C135 VsB
0.1u 26
2200p 27 In /A
(5-C2) MRPS_1 17 In A 15
(5-C2) MRPS_2 16 In /B PG 28
PGND PG
(5-C2) MRPS_3 In B
R114 1J 2W
PGND R115 C136
1kJ MTD1361/F
OPEN

PGND
C137 OPEN
PGND

(4-D3) (SPFMT2)
(4-D3) (SPFMT0)
(4-D3) (SPFMT3)
(4-D3) (SPFMT1)

A B C

AL-1556/1566 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 13 - 11


C D E

6/14

Duplex Motor Driver


4
IC28
3 2
(1-D3) DMT0 4 I1 O1 /DMT0 (11-B3)
5 NC 7
6 NC O2 /DMT1 (11-B3)
(1-D3) DMT1 10 I2 9
11 NC O3 /DMT2 (11-B3)
(1-D3) DMT2 12 I3 16
13 NC O4 /DMT3 (11-B3)
14 NC
(1-D3) DMT3 15 I4 24VDup
NC
17 1 D5
18 GND COM 8
GND COM
TD62064AF
MTZ J22B

PGND

Shifter Motor Driver

24V CP1 IC30


0603FA1.5A R338 3 2
(4-B2) SFTMT0 4 I1 O1 /SFTMT0 (11-A1)
0J
24VSFT 5 NC 7
6 NC O2 /SFTMT1 (11-A1)
R339 3
(4-B2) SFTMT1 10 I2 9
CP3 0J
11 NC O3 /SFTMT2 (11-A1)
A 0603FA1.5A R340
(4-B2) SFTMT2 12 I3 16
0J
24VDup 13 NC O4 /SFTMT3 (11-A1)
14 NC
R341
(4-B2) SFTMT3 15 I4 24VSFT
C124 + C122 0J
47u/35V NC
V 0.1u/50V
17 1 D6
18 GND COM 8
GND COM

PGND
TD62064AF MTZ J22B

PGND

Toner Motor Driver

24V

2
C128 + C129
10u/35V
0.1u/50V

PGND
IC32
R105 17
19 Vcc 16
1kJ PSAVE VM
2 (11-E1) 20 9
0 (11-D1) (4-D3) (TM) 18 Rin OUT1 5 TMB_O (11-A1)
3 (11-D1) (4-D3) (TM_) 21 Fin OUT2 TMA_O (11-A1)
1 (11-E1) VREF 6
R106 RNF
R112 R113 1kJ 1 8
2 NC GND FIN
47kJ 47kJ NC FIN
3
4 NC 25
7 NC NC 24
10 NC NC 23
11 NC NC 22
12 NC NC 15
13 NC NC 14
PGND NC NC

BA6920FP

PGND

C D E

AL-1556/1566 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 13 - 12


A B C

MCU PWB (Noise filter/Pull-up section)

4
VCC3

5V

C138 C139 C140 C141 C142 C143 C144 C145 C146 D11
1
0.1u OPEN 0.1u 0.1u OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN 3
2
KDS226

C147 C148 C149 C150 C151 C152 C153 C154 C155

OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN D12 R132
1SS355 20kJ
DSWS (4-A3)

C156 C157 C158 C159 C160 C161 C162 C163 C164 R134 C165
R133 2.7kJ
OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN 0.1u 0.1u OPEN OPEN OPEN 20kJ 0.1u

INT24V
C174 C175 C176 C177 C178 C179 C180 C181 C182

0.1u 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u OPEN R135
24V1(DSWS) (9-A3)
0.22J 2W
R136 D17
1kJ 1SS355
2W

PGND PGND
3

D20
1SS355
INT24V
24V

C183 + C184 R145


100J 2W IC33
47u/35V 0.1u/50V 1 3
IN OUT INT5V

GND
PGND C189 + C190
KIA7805
2

47u/35V 0.1u

2
L5 L6
ZJSR5101-223 ZJSR5101-223
(10-A4) 12VIN 12V (10-B4) 3.3VIN VCC3

C191 + C193 C192 + C194

47u/25V 0.1u 22u/16V 0.1u

5V EN5V

C195 + C197 C196 + C198

22u/16V 0.1u 22u/16V 0.1u

A B C

AL-1556/1566 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 13 - 13


C D E

7/14

5V

D7 D8 D9 D10 4
1 1 1 1
3 3 3 3
2 2 2 2 R116 R117 R118 R119 R120 R121 R122 R123
10kJ 10kJ 10kJ 4.7kJ 10kJ 10kJ 39kJ 10kJ
KDS226 KDS226 KDS226 KDS226

R124 1kJ
(11-D1) SDSW (SDSW) (4-A3)
R125 1kJ
(11-E1) SPID (SPID) (11-E1)
R126 1kJ
(11-E1) SB4D (SB4D) (4-A3)
R127 1kJ
(11-D2) PPD3 (PPD3) (4-A4)
R128 1kJ
(11-B1) PD1 (PD1) (4-A3)
R129 1kJ
(11-D2) PD2 (PD2) (4-A3)
R130 1kJ
(11-C2) POD (POD) (4-A4)
R131 1kJ
(11-A2)PMRDY (PMRDY) (4-A4)
5V

D14 D15 D16 D13 C166 C167 C168 C169 C170 C171 C172 C173
1 1 1 1
3 3 3 3 1000p 1000p 1000p 1000p 1000p 1000p 1000p 1000p
2 2 2 2

KDS226 KDS226 KDS226 KDS226

5V 3

D18 D19
1 1
3 3
2 2 R137 R138 R139 R140
10kJ 10kJ 39kJ 10kJ
KDS226 KDS226

R141 1kJ
(11-C3) DVSEL DVS1 (4-A4)
R142 1kJ
(11-C3) TCS (TCS) (4-A4)
R143 1kJ
(11-C1) MFD (MFD) (4-A4)
R144 1kJ
(11-A4) MMLD (MMLD) (4-A3)
5V

C185 C186 C187 C188


D21 D22
1 1 1000p 1000p 1000p 1000p
3 3
2 2

KDS226 KDS226

5V VCC3

D23 D24 D25 D26


1 1 1 1
3 3 3 3
2 2 2 R146 R147 R148 R149 R150 2 R151 R152
39kJ 39kJ 7.5kJ 7.5kJ 7.5kJ 10kJ 3.3kJ
KDS226 KDS226 KDS226 KDS226

R153 1kJ
(11-C2) PPD1 (PPD1) (4-A4)
R154 1kJ
(11-C1) PPD2 (PPD2) (4-A4)
R155 1kJ
(11-D1) SPPD (SPPD) (1-D2)
R156 1kJ
(10-E4) PSW (PSW) (1-D2)

R157 1kJ
(11-B4) CED1 (CED1) (4-A4)
R158 1kJ
(11-D2) CED2 (CED2) (4-A3)
R159 1kJ
(10-E4) DRST (DRST) (4-A4)
5V VCC3

C199 C200 C201 C202 C203 C204


D27 D28 D29
1 1 1000p 1000p 1000p 1000p 1 1000p 1000p
3 3 3
2 2 2

KDS226 KDS226 KDS226

C D E

AL-1556/1566 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 13 - 14


A B C

MCU PWB (IMC2 section 1/2)


IC37

119 74 SDRAM_DATA0 BR69 1 8 150JX4 _SDRAM_DATA


120 PI_LINE_SYNC/GP_D6 SDRAM_DATA0 73 SDRAM_DATA1 2 7 _SDRAM_DATA1
124 PI_TR_TGEN SDRAM_DATA1 72 SDRAM_DATA2 3 6 _SDRAM_DATA2
125 PI_TGEN6 SDRAM_DATA2 68 SDRAM_DATA3 4 5 _SDRAM_DATA3
(2-D3) /PIWR PI_TGEN5 SDRAM_DATA3
126 67 SDRAM_DATA4 BR70 1 8 150JX4 _SDRAM_DATA4
127 PI_TGEN4 SDRAM_DATA4 66 SDRAM_DATA5 2 7 _SDRAM_DATA5
(2-D3) /PIACK PI_TGEN3 SDRAM_DATA5
(2-D4) PIDATA[7..0] (2-D3) /PIREQ 128 65 SDRAM_DATA6 3 6 _SDRAM_DATA6
129 PI_TGEN2 SDRAM_DATA6 63 SDRAM_DATA7 4 5 _SDRAM_DATA7
131 PI_TGEN1 SDRAM_DATA7 62 SDRAM_DATA8 BR71 1 8 150JX4 _SDRAM_DATA8
132 PI_TGEN0 SDRAM_DATA8 61 SDRAM_DATA9 2 7 _SDRAM_DATA9
PIDATA7
133 PI_DATA7 SDRAM_DATA9 60 SDRAM_DATA10 3 6 _SDRAM_DATA1
PIDATA6
134 PI_DATA6 SDRAM_DATA10 58 SDRAM_DATA11 4 5 _SDRAM_DATA1
4 PIDATA5
135 PI_DATA5 SDRAM_DATA11 57 SDRAM_DATA12 BR72 1 8 150JX4 _SDRAM_DATA1
PIDATA4
137 PI_DATA4 SDRAM_DATA12 56 SDRAM_DATA13 2 7 _SDRAM_DATA1
PIDATA3
138 PI_DATA3 SDRAM_DATA13 55 SDRAM_DATA14 3 6 _SDRAM_DATA1
PIDATA2
141 PI_DATA2 SDRAM_DATA14 53 SDRAM_DATA15 4 5 _SDRAM_DATA1
PIDATA1
142 PI_DATA1 SDRAM_DATA15
PIDATA0
PI_DATA0 109 SDRAM_DQMA0 BR73 1 8 33JX4 _SDRAM_DQMA
143 SDRAM_DQMA0 107 SDRAM_DQMB0 2 7 _SDRAM_DQMB
OA_RX PP_HIDRIVE/USART1_RX SDRAM_DQMB0
145 106 SDRAM_DQMA1 3 6 _SDRAM_DQMA
OA_TX RY_BY 146 PP_DRIVE/USART1_TX SDRAM_DQMA1 105 SDRAM_DQMB1 4 5 _SDRAM_DQMB
147 PP_NINIT SDRAM_DQMB1
151 PP_NFAULT 104 SDRAM_CS0_L R218 33J _SDRAM_CS0_
152 PP_NSELECTIN SDRAM_CS0_L 102
153 PP_NAUTOFD SDRAM_CS1A_L 77
154 PP_SELECT SDRAM_CS1B_L 75 R332 33J
155 PP_PERROR ROM_CS_L
156 PP_BUSY 111 R333 33J S
157 PP_NACK SDRAM_WE_L 110 R334 33J SDR
159 PP_DATA7 SDRAM_CAS_L 101 R335 33J SDR
160 PP_DATA6 SDRAM_RAS_L
161 PP_DATA5 100 BR111 1 8 33JX4 SDRAM_ADDR0
162 PP_DATA4 SDRAM_ADDR0 99 2 7 SDRAM_ADDR1
163 PP_DATA3 SDRAM_ADDR1 97 3 6 SDRAM_ADDR2
165 PP_DATA2 SDRAM_ADDR2 96 4 5 SDRAM_ADDR3
166 PP_DATA1/USART1_CK SDRAM_ADDR3 95 BR112 1 8 33JX4 SDRAM_ADDR4
167 PP_DATA0 SDRAM_ADDR4 94 2 7 SDRAM_ADDR5
PP_NSTROBE SDRAM_ADDR5 92 3 6 SDRAM_ADDR6
168 SDRAM_ADDR6 91 4 5 SDRAM_ADDR7
169 BASE_CLK/GP_PWM1 SDRAM_ADDR7 90 BR113 1 8 33JX4 SDRAM_ADDR8
(8-C1) CLK_EXT CLK_EXT/GP_PWM2 SDRAM_ADDR8
170 89 2 7 SDRAM_ADDR9
MAIN_CLK/GP_PWM0 SDRAM_ADDR9 85 3 6 SDRAM_ADDR10
178 SDRAM_ADDR10 82 4 5 SDRAM_ADDR11
(13-C3) PB_NCS1 REG_A9/PB_NCS1 SDRAM_ADDR11
180 80 BR114 1 8 33JX4 SDRAM_ADDR12
(9-B3) (9-B3) (13-C4) PB_DATA[7:0] BR74 1 REG_A8/PB_NCS2 SDRAM_ADDR12
PB_DATA7 8 33JX4 181 2 7
PB_DATA6 2 7 182 REG_AD7/PB_DATA7 84 3 6 SDRAM_BANK0
PB_DATA5 3 6 183 REG_AD6/PB_DATA6 SDRAM_BANK0 83 4 5 SDRAM_BANK1
PB_DATA4 4 5 185 REG_AD5/PB_DATA5 SDRAM_BANK1
PB_DATA3 BR75 1 8 33JX4 186 REG_AD4/PB_DATA4 79 R356 33J
PB_DATA2 2 7 187 REG_AD3/PB_DATA3 SDRAM_CLK 78 SDRAM_CKE R225
PB_DATA1 3 6 188 REG_AD2/PB_DATA2 SDRAM_CKE R226
PB_DATA0 4 5 189 REG_AD1/PB_DATA1
3 190 REG_AD0/PB_DATA0
194 REG_ADDR_VALID/PB_NCS0 OA3.3V
(9-A2) PB_NCS3 195 REG_RD_L/PB_NCS3 7 C400
(9-A2) (13-C3) PB_NAE0 196 REG_WR_L/PB_NAE0 PLLCS_VDDA N.M.
197 REG_CS_L/PB_NAE1
(9-B2) (13-C3) PB_NWE 198 REG_RDY/PB_NWE C259 C260
(9-B2) (13-C3) PB_NOE INTERRUPT_L/PB_NOE 0.01U 1U
(9-B3) (13-C4) PB_ADDR[7:0]
PB_ADDR0 BR77 1 8 33JX4 199 6
PB_ADDR1 2 7 201 GP_C0/PB_ADDR0 PLLCS_VSSA
PB_ADDR2 3 6 202 GP_C1/PB_ADDR1
PB_ADDR3 4 5 203 GP_C2/PB_ADDR2
PB_ADDR4 BR78 1 8 33JX4 204 GP_C3/PB_ADDR3
PB_ADDR5 2 7 205 GP_C4/PB_ADDR4
PB_ADDR6 3 6 207 GP_C5/PB_ADDR5
PB_ADDR7 4 5 208 GP_C6/PB_ADDR6 149
GP_C7/PB_ADDR7 PLLSS_VDDA
1
(1-B3) ES_CMD 2 GP_B0/USART0_TX C262 C263
(1-B3) ESS_TS 8 GP_B1/USART0_RX 0.01U 1U
9 GP_B2/USART0_CK 148
(1-D2) (FW) 11 GP_B3/ANA_SD1 PLLSS_VSSA
(9-B2) DT_ACKB 12 GP_B4/DT_ACKB
(9-B2) DT_REQB 13 GP_B5/DT_REQB
14 GP_B6/DT_ACKA OA3.3V
MODEM_IN GP_B7/DT_REQA 3
15 VDD_IO 20
(1-A3) /ES_PAGE 16 GP_D0/ADC_A0 VDD_IO 25
(1-B3) /ESC_RDY 19 GP_D1/ADC_A1 VDD_IO 33
(1-B3) /ESS_RDY 21 GP_D2/ADC_A2 VDD_IO 46
USBVBUS (9-D3) WAKEUP GP_D3/ADC_CLK VDD_IO
22 59
23 GP_D4/ADC_DATA VDD_IO 71
R231 GP_D5/ADC_NCS VDD_IO 81
24 VDD_IO 93
7.5kF (2-D2) /IMC_READY GP_A0 VDD_IO
(13-C3) MDM_IRQ 26 103
28 GP_A1 VDD_IO 115
(9-D3) SUSPEND GP_A2/DC_CHY1 VDD_IO
29 130
30 GP_A3/DC_CHX1 VDD_IO 144
(2-E3) /SC_LINE GP_A4/DC_PWM1 VDD_IO
(9-B2) INT_USBD 31 158
32 GP_A5/DC_CHY0 VDD_IO 171
R232 (2-E3) /PR_LINE GP_A6/DC_CHX0 VDD_IO
/FPOFF /FPOFF 34 184
2 C267 GP_A7/DC_PWM0 VDD_IO 200
NC 10kJ VDD_IO
(2-D4) /H_SYNC 37
38 PO_LINE_SYNC/ANA_SCLK C273 C274 C275 C276 C277 C278
39 PO_PAGE_SYNC/ANA_NCS OA3.3V 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U
(2-D3) /POREQ PO_REQ/ANA_SD0
(2-D3) /POACK 40 18
42 PO_ACK/PDATA0/PDS0 VDD_CORE 36
43 PO_DONE/PDATA2/PDS2 VDD_CORE 70
PODATA7 1 8 44 PO_WR/PDATA1/PDS1 VDD_CORE 88
PODATA6 2 7 45 PO_DATA7/LHEAT/PAS_M VDD_CORE 122
PODATA5 3 6 47 PO_DATA6/LCTRL/CFIRE2 VDD_CORE 140
/FPOFF R320 10KJ PODATA4 4 5 48 PO_DATA5/AGATE/CFIRE1 VDD_CORE 174
PODATA3 BR36 1 8 33J 49 PO_DATA4/ACLK/MFIRE2 VDD_CORE 192 C283 C284 C285 C286 C287 C288
PODATA2 2 7 50 PO_DATA3/PENABLE/MFIRE1 VDD_CORE 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U
PODATA1 3 6 51 PO_DATA2/PLOAD
PODATA0 4 5 52 PO_DATA1/PCLK
BR38 33J PO_DATA0/PDATA3/PAS_C 10
175 VSS_IO 27
176 USB_DM VSS_IO 41
(2-E3) PODATA[7..0] USB_DP VSS_IO 54
VSS_IO 64
VSS_IO 76 C292 C293 C294 C295 C296 C297
VSS_IO 86 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U
VSS_IO 98
VCC3 VSS_IO 108
112 VSS_IO 123
(1-B1) (2-C1) (9-B2)
R244 10KJ /OA_RST RESET_L VSS_IO
TDO TDO 113 136
R243 10KJ TDO TDO VSS_IO
TCK TCK 114 150
R242 10KJ TCK TCK VSS_IO
TMS TMS 116 164
R241 10KJ VCC3 TMS TMS VSS_IO
TDI TDI 117 179
R240 10KJ TRST_L TDI TDI VSS_IO
TRST_L 118 193
TRST_L TRST_L VSS_IO 206
R233 OPEN 172 VSS_IO
R234 OPEN 177 TEST_MODE0
TEST_MODE1
R235 4.7KJ 17
R236 4.7KJ VSS_CORE 35
VSS_CORE 69
VSS_CORE 87
VSS_CORE 121
VSS_CORE 139
VSS_CORE
1 5
XIN VSS_CORE
173
C300 X4 4 191
15P 32.3022MHz XOUT VSS_CORE
R237 0J XIN
XOUT
OA-982
(8-A3) CLK_EXT CLK_EXT
C306
15P

A B C

AL-1556/1566 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 13 - 15


C D E

8/14
_SDRAM_DATA[15:0] (8-D4) (8-E4) (8-E3)

M_DATA0
_DATA1
_DATA2 (8-C3) (8-D3) (8-D2) (8-E4) SDRAM_ADDR[12:0] IC38 _SDRAM_DATA[15:0] (8-C4) (8-D4) (8-E3)
_DATA3
_DATA4
_DATA5 SDRAM_ADDR1 25 29 _SDRAM_DATA0
_DATA6 SDRAM_ADDR2 24 A0 IO0 31 _SDRAM_DATA1
_DATA7 SDRAM_ADDR3 23 A1 IO1 33 _SDRAM_DATA2
_DATA8 SDRAM_ADDR4 22 A2 IO2 35 _SDRAM_DATA3
_DATA9 SDRAM_ADDR5 21 A3 IO3 38 _SDRAM_DATA4
_DATA10 SDRAM_ADDR6 20 A4 IO4 40 _SDRAM_DATA5
_DATA11 SDRAM_ADDR7 19 A5 IO5 42 _SDRAM_DATA6
A6 IO6 4
_DATA12 SDRAM_ADDR8 18 44 _SDRAM_DATA7
_DATA13 SDRAM_ADDR9 8 A7 IO7 30
_DATA14 SDRAM_ADDR10 7 A8 IO8 32
A9 IO9 SDRAM_ADDR[12:0] (8-C3) (8-D3) (8-D4)
_DATA15 SDRAM_ADDR11 6 34
SDRAM_ADDR12 5 A10 IO10 36
(8-C3) (8-D2) SDRAM_BANK[1:0] A11 IO11
_DQMA0 SDRAM_BANK0 4 39 VCC3
_DQMB0 SDRAM_BANK1 3 A12 IO12 41
_DQMA1 SDRAM_WE_L 2 A13 IO13 43
_DQMB1 SDRAM_CAS_L 1 A14 IO14 45 SDRAM_ADDR0 R217
_SDRAM_DATA[15:0] A15 IO15/A-1
(8-C4) (8-E4) (8-E3) SDRAM_RAS_L 48
M_CS0_L _SDRAM_DQMB0 17 A16 0J
_SDRAM_DQMB1 R330 0J 16 A17
VCC3 _SDRAM_DATA8 R327 0J 9 A18 13
ROM_CS_L _SDRAM_DATA9 R328 0J 10 A19 VCCW
A20
SDRAM_WE_L _SDRAM_DQMA1 11
SDRAM_CAS_L _SDRAM_DQMA0 28 WE VCC3 C256
SDRAM_RAS_L R329 ROM_CS_L 26 OE 37 NM
CE VCC
SDRAM_ADDR[12:0] (8-E4) (8-D3) (8-D4)
10kJ RY_BY 15
RY/BY C257
47 0.1U
14 BYTE 46
12 WP/ACC GND 27
/RESET0 RESET GND

Flash ROM
Flash ROM

SDRAM_BANK[1:0] (8-D4) (8-D2) (8-D1) Model Vendor/Type

E-Sort Model 4Mbit LH28F400BVE-BL85 R327/R328/R330 ; OPEN


_SDRAM_CLK _SDRAM_CLK (8-D2)
5 33J _SDRAM_CKE
FAX Model
6 4.7KJ 8Mbit LH28F800BJE-PBTL90 R327/R328/R330 ; OPEN
(US)
3
FAX Model
16Mbit LH28F160BJE-BTL90 R327/R328/R330 ; 0J
(except US)

IC39
(8-C3) (8-E4) (8-D4) SDRAM_ADDR[12:0] _SDRAM_DATA[15:0] (8-C4) (8-D4) (8-E4)
SDRAM_ADDR0 23 2 _SDRAM_DATA0
SDRAM_ADDR1 24 A0 DQ0 4 _SDRAM_DATA1
SDRAM_ADDR2 25 A1 DQ1 5 _SDRAM_DATA2
SDRAM_ADDR3 26 A2 DQ2 7 _SDRAM_DATA3
SDRAM_ADDR4 29 A3 DQ3 8 _SDRAM_DATA4
SDRAM_ADDR5 30 A4 DQ4 10 _SDRAM_DATA5
SDRAM_ADDR6 31 A5 DQ5 11 _SDRAM_DATA6
SDRAM_ADDR7 32 A6 DQ6 13 _SDRAM_DATA7
SDRAM_ADDR8 33 A7 DQ7 42 _SDRAM_DATA8
SDRAM_ADDR9 34 A8 DQ8 44 _SDRAM_DATA9
SDRAM_ADDR10 22 A9 DQ9 45 _SDRAM_DATA10
SDRAM_ADDR11 35 A10 DQ10 47 _SDRAM_DATA11
SDRAM_ADDR12 36 A11 DQ11 48 _SDRAM_DATA12
(8-C3) (8-D4) SDRAM_BANK[1:0] A12 DQ12
SDRAM_BANK0 20 50 _SDRAM_DATA13
SDRAM_BANK1 21 BA0 DQ13 51 _SDRAM_DATA14
BA1 DQ14 53 _SDRAM_DATA15
_SDRAM_CS0_L 19 DQ15
SDRAM_WE_L 16 CS
SDRAM_CAS_L 17 WE VCC3
SDRAM_RAS_L 18 CAS 49
RAS VDDQ 43 VCC3
_SDRAM_CLK 38 VDDQ 9
(8-C3) _SDRAM_CLK CLK VDDQ
_SDRAM_CKE 37 3
CKE VDDQ
_SDRAM_DQMA0 15 27
_SDRAM_DQMA1 39 LDQM VDD 14
OA3.3V VCC3 UDQM VDD 1 C268 C269 C270 C271
VDD 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U
L10
ZJSR5101-102TA C401 52
N.M. VSSQ 46
VSSQ 12 2
+ VSSQ 6
C278 C279 C280 C281 C272 VSSQ C332 C333 C334
0.1U 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U 47U/16V 54 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U
VSS 41
40 VSS 28
N.C VSS

K4S561632D
C288 C289 C290
0.1U 0.1U 0.1U

VCC3

C264
_SDRAM_DATA0 BR115 1 8 10kJX4 NM
C297 C298 C299 _SDRAM_DATA1 2 7 _SDRAM_CS0_L
0.1U 0.1U 0.1U _SDRAM_DATA2 3 6
_SDRAM_DATA3 4 5
_SDRAM_DATA4 BR116 1 8 10kJX4 C265
_SDRAM_DATA5 2 7 47p
_SDRAM_DATA6 3 6 _SDRAM_CKE
_SDRAM_DATA7 4 5
_SDRAM_DATA8 BR117 1 8 10kJX4
_SDRAM_DATA9 2 7
_SDRAM_DATA10 3 6
_SDRAM_DATA11 4 5
_SDRAM_DATA12 BR118 1 8 10kJX4
_SDRAM_DATA13 2 7
_SDRAM_DATA14 3 6
_SDRAM_DATA15 4 5

T
R238
4.7KJ

C D E

AL-1556/1566 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 13 - 16


A B C

MCU PWB (IMC2 USB2.0 section 2/2)

VCC3

C314 C315 C316 C317 C318 C319


0.01U 0.01U 0.01U 0.01U 0.01U 0.01U VCC3

GND VCC3

C320 +
C323 C324 C325 C326 C327 C328
0.1U 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U 10U/16V

GND

GND

37
43
64

VCC(3.3) 24
VCC(3.3) 58
IC41

2
(8-A3) (9-B3) (13-C4) PB_DATA[7:0]

VCC(5.0)
VCC(5.0)
VCC(5.0)
VCC(5.0)
PB_DATA0 30
PB_DATA1 31 AD0 D
PB_DATA2 32 AD1 D
PB_DATA3 33 AD2 MO
PB_DATA4 34 AD3 MO
PB_DATA5 35 AD4 BUS_C
PB_DATA6 38 AD5
PB_DATA7 39 AD6
AD7 /
(8-A3) (9-B3) (13-C4) PB_DATA[7:0] /
PB_DATA0 40 INT
PB_DATA1 41 DATA0 RE
VCC3 PB_DATA2 44 DATA1
PB_DATA3 45 DATA2 WAK
PB_DATA4 46 DATA3 SUSP
PB_DATA5 47 DATA4
PB_DATA6 48 DATA5
(9-B3) (13-C4) PB_ADDR[7:0] DATA6
PB_DATA7 49
C338 C339 PB_ADDR0 50 DATA7
0.1U 0.1U PB_ADDR1 51 DATA8
PB_ADDR2 52 DATA9
PB_ADDR3 53 DATA10
PB_ADDR4 54 DATA11 XT
VCC3 PB_ADDR5 55 DATA12
GND PB_ADDR6 56 DATA13 XT
PB_ADDR7 57 DATA14
IC42 DATA15
10 Vreg(
1 (2-D1) /OA_RST /RESET
(8-A3) PB_NCS3 4 25
2 28 /CS
(8-A3) (13-C3) PB_NAE0 (8-A2) INT_USBD INT
(8-A2) DT_REQB 12
NC7S08M5X 13 DREQ
(8-A2) DT_ACKB DACK
(13-C3) (8-A3) PB_NOE PB_NOE 26
PB_NWE 27 /RD
(13-C3) (8-A3) PB_NWE /WR
GND
11

DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND

DGND
AGND
29 EOT
2 VCC3 ALE R

36
42
61

23
1

3
IC43 ISP1581

2 4
R303 R304
1 100P
0J
NC7S04M5X R305 NM

GND
GND GND AG AGND

MLF1608-J
L12

GND AG GND
1

A B C

AL-1556/1566 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 13 - 17


C D E

9/14

C321 + C322
0.1U
10U/16V
VCC3
GND
10KJ

10KJ

10KJ

10KJ

AG
NC
R280

R281

R282

R284

R287

14 PB_NOE
DIOR 15 PB_NWE
DIOW 20
MODE0 9 R283 10KJ
MODE1 19 R285 10KJ
BUS_CONF

17
/CS1 18
/CS0 16 R286 10KJ
INTRQ 22 R288 NC
READY 21
DA2 62
WAKEUP WAKEUP (8-A2)
63 SUSPEND (8-A2)
SUSPEND

R289 R290
10KJ 10KJ

C329 10P

60
XTAL1 Y1 GND GND GND (8-A2) USBVBUS
59 12MHz
XTAL2
L14
4 C330 10P
Vreg(3.3) BLM21PG600SN1
R293
1.5KJ GND

7 CN33
RPU 1 +5V
5 2 -D
D- 6 3 +D
D+ 4 GND
5 SHIELD
8 L15 DLW21SN900SQ2
RREF 2
UBR23(ACON)
R301 NM
USB2.0 DEV1
R302
12KF C331 0.01U
L16

BLM21PG600SN1
FGND_UD2
AG AGND_UD2 FG

AGND_UD2

MLF1608-J
L13

GND FGND_UD1
FG 1

C D E

AL-1556/1566 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 13 - 18


A B C

MCU PWB (Connector section 1)

To Power unit

4
INT5V INT24V

CN1
1 2
1 2
3 4
3 4
5 6
(5-C4) /BIAS 5 6 /TC (5-C4)
7 8
(5-C4) /GRIDL 7 8 /MC (5-C4)
9 10
9 10
11 12
11 12 3.3VIN (7-B2)
13 14
EN5V 13 14
15 16
5V 15 16 /POFF (5-C1)
17 18
(7-A2) 12VIN 17 18 24V (7-A2)
19 20
(4-C4) FW 19 20
21 22
(5-C3) /PR 21 22 HLOUT (5-D2)
23 24
23 24

B24B-PHDSS-B
1

C207 C208

0.1u/50V 0.1u/50V
2

PGND PGND

A B C

AL-1556/1566 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 13 - 19


C D E

10/14

To Operational PWB
4

EN5V 5V VCC3
5V

CN2
28
D30 28
27
27
1 26
26

1
3 25
R160 25
2 24
10kJ 24
23
23
KDS226 22
22
21
DRST 21

2
R162 1kJ 20
PSW 20
1 2 19
(4-C4) KEYIN 19
18
(PSL) 18
17
C205 (OP_CLK) 17

1
16
(OP_LATCH) 16
15
1000p (OP_DATA) 15
14
(SELIN1) 14

2
13
(SELIN2) 13
12
(SELIN3) 12
11
(LCDDB7) 11
10
(LCDDB6) 10
9
(LCDDB5) 9
8
(LCDDB4) 8
7
(LCDE) 7
6
(LCDRS) 6
5
(BZR) 5
4
(KEYSC1) 4
3
(KEYSC2) 3
2
(KEYSC3) 2
1
1

1000p

1000p

1000p
28FE-BT-VK-N 3

1
C209

C210

C211
2

To Mirror motor

2
CN4
1
(6-A4) OUT_A+ 1
2
(6-A4) OUT_B+ 2
3
(6-A4) OUT_A- 3
4
(6-A4) OUT_B- 4

B4B-PH-K-R

C D E

AL-1556/1566 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 13 - 20


A B C D

MCU PWB (Connector section 3) 11/14

To 2nd. cassette
4 4

To Mech. COUNTER

24V 24V 5V
CN8
CN18
3
2 (5-C3) /CPFS2 1 2
/MCNT 1 3 4
5 6
B3B-PH-K-S (7-C4) PPD3 7 8
9 10
(7-C4) PD2 11 12
(7-C1) CED2 13 14

1000p
1000p
1000p
B14B-PHDSS-B

C226
C227
C228

PGND

3 3

To Cover open detect

5V 5V

D37
1
3 R318
2 150J
R177 1/4W
KDS226 4.7kJ
CN14
R178

AL-1556/1566 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 13 - 21


1kJ 3
2
(4-A3) (SDOD) 1
C221
B3B-PH-K-S
1000p
(White)

For SPF/DSPF Model Only

2 2

A B C D
A B C D E

MCU PWB (IEEE1284Interface section) 12/14

4 4

IEEE1284 Driver/Receiver

3.3V 5V

IEEE1284 Connector
VCC3 EN5V

IC34
7 31 CN28
(2-E2) PARAD[7..0] 18 Vcc Vcc-cable 42 EN5V
Vcc Vcc-cable BR89 22J 1 19
PARAD0 17 32 1 8 2 /D STB D-GND 20
PARAD1 16 A8 B8 33 2 7 3 Data 0 D-GND 21
PARAD2 14 A7 B7 35 3 6 4 Data 1 D-GND 22
PARAD3 13 A6 B6 36 4 5 5 Data 2 D-GND 23
PARAD4 12 A5 B5 37 BR90 1 8 22J 6 Data 3 D-GND 24
PARAD5 11 A4 B4 38 2 7 7 Data 4 D-GND 25 D39
PARAD6 9 A3 B3 40 3 6 8 Data 5 D-GND 26
A2 B2 Data 6 D-GND 11EQS06
PARAD7 8 41 4 5 9 27
A1 B1 10 Data 7 D-GND 28
3 /ACK 2 47 11 /ACK D-GND 29 3
(2-D2) /ACK BUSY 3 A9 Y9 46 12 BUSY D-GND 30
(2-D2) BUSY PE 4 A10 Y10 45 C229 C230 C231 C232 C233 C234 C235 C236 13 PE D-GND 31
(2-D2) PE SLCT 5 A11 Y11 44 14 SLCT /INIT 32
(2-D2) SLCT /FAULT 6 A12 Y12 43 100p 100p 100p 100p 100p 100p 100p 100p 15 /AUTO FD /FAULT 33
(2-D2) /FAULT A13 Y13 16 NC D-GND 34
/STB 20 29 17 SG NC 35 R196 3.3KJ
(2-D2) /STB /AUTOFD 21 A14 C14 28 18 FG HLHIN 36
(2-D2) /AUTOFD /SLCTIN 22 A15 C15 27 PLHOUT /SLCT IN
(2-D2) /SLCTIN /INIT 23 A16 C16 26
(2-D2) /INIT A17 C17
Shield

R197 10kJ 1
/REV 48 HD BR91 22J
(2-D2) /REV R198 10kJ 19 DIR 30 1 8 IEEE1284_CN
24 PLHin PLH 25 R200 10kJ 2 7
HLH HLHin 3 6
10 34 4 5
15 GND GND 39
GND GND R204 22J

F.G
74LVX161284 C237 C238 C239 C240 C241

100p 100p 100p 100p 100p


VCC3 EN5V

C242 C243 C244 C245

0.1u 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u

AL-1556/1566 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 13 - 22


2 2

BR92 22J
1 8
2 7
3 6
4 5

VCC3 EN5V C246 C247 C248 C249

100p 330p 100p 100p


CN39
24
23
22
R319 0J 21
/OA_RST 20 R209 10kJ
PARAD0
PARAD1 19
PARAD2 18
PARAD3 17
PARAD4 16
PARAD5 15
PARAD6 14
PARAD7 13
/ACK 12
BUSY 11
PE 10
SLCT 9
/FAULT 8
/STB 7
/AUTOFD 6
/SLCTIN 5
/INIT 4
/REV R326 3
OPEN 2
1
1 1
24FMN-BTK-A

To NIC PWB

A B C D E
A B C D E

MCU PWB (Modem I/F Connector) 13/14

4 4

(8-A3) (9-B3) (9-B3) PB_DATA[7:0]

CN37
PB_DATA7
PB_DATA7 26 PB_DATA6
PB_DATA6 25 PB_DATA5
PB_DATA5 24 PB_DATA4
PB_DATA4 23 PB_DATA3
PB_DATA3 22 PB_DATA2
PB_DATA2 21 PB_DATA1
PB_ADDR[7:0] 20
(8-A3) (9-B3) PB_DATA1 PB_DATA0
PB_DATA0 19 MDM_IRQ
18
PB_ADDR7 17
PB_ADDR6 16
PB_ADDR5 15
PB_ADDR4 14 To Modem PWB
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN

PB_ADDR3 13
C359
C362
C365

PB_ADDR2 12
PB_ADDR1 11
OPEN
OPEN

PB_ADDR0 10
OPEN
C363
C366

9
C360

8
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN

(8-A3) PB_NCS1 7
C361
C364
C367

(9-A2) (8-A3) PB_NAE0 6


5
(9-B2) (8-A3) PB_NOE 4
/OA_RST MDM_IRQ 3
(2-D1)
(8-A2) MDM_IRQ 2
1

R357 N.M. 26FE-BT-VK-N


3 3

VCC3

VCC3

C402

5
IC46
(9-B2) (8-A3) 1 0.1u
PB_NWE 4
(2-D1) 2
/FWREN

3
NC7S32M5X

24V EN5V VCC3 D7


D6
CN38 D5
(1-D2) (2-A1) (3-A1) (4-A2) D[15..0] D4
20 D3
19 D2

AL-1556/1566 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 13 - 23


18 D1
VCC3 17 D0
16 MSU_ST1
15
D7 14
D6 13
R306 D5 12
11
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN

10kJ D4 To Modem PWB


10
C368
C371
C374

D3
D2 9
8
OPEN
OPEN

D1
7
OPEN
C372
C375

D0
6
C369

(4-A3) MODEM_IN 5
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN

(1-B3) (2-C1) (3-A2) /RD 4


C370
C373
C376

2 2
(1-D3) /CS4 MSU_ST1 3
(1-A3) MSU_ST1 2
1

20FE-BT-VK-N

PGND

1 1

A B C D E
A B C D E

MCU PWB (Scanner I/F section) 14/14

4 4

To Scanner unit
Copy Lamp Inverter

24V Q4 L9 CP4
KTB1151 Y 220uH 0603FA1.5A
VCL
TWKA-221K
R166 VCC3
10kJ 12V EN5V
3 3
D32
1
C213 + D33 + C214 C215 R167 R164 3 CN3
47u/35V R168 11EQS06 15kJ 10kJ 2 AFE_DB0 AFE_DB1
5.6kJ 47u/35V 0.1u/50V AFE_DB2 32 31 AFE_DB3
1/4W R165 AFE_DB4 30 29
C216 33p 1kJ KDS226 AFE_DB6 28 27 AFE_DB5
26 25 AFE_DB7
(1-D2) mt_at_home 24 23
AFE_SCK 22 21
(2-A4) CL ADCLK 20 19 AFE_SEN
C212
R169 Q5 (2-A4) CCD_PHI1 18 17
(2-A4) CCD_PHI2 16 15 AFE_SDI
15kJ R170 KTC3198 1000p
(2-A4) CCD_CP 14 13 BSAMP
56kJ
(2-A4) CCD_RS 12 11
(1-D2) (2-A4) CCD_TG 10 9 VSAMP
8 7
VCL 6 5 VCL
4 3
2 1
PGND
FF4-32-S15D5

AL-1556/1566 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 13 - 24


PGND PGND

2 2
(2-A4) AFE_DB[7..0]

AFE_DB0
AFE_DB1
AFE_DB2
AFE_DB3
AFE_DB4
AFE_DB5
AFE_DB6
AFE_DB7

1 1

A B C D E
A B C D E

FAX MAIN PWB (TEL/LIU) 1/6


R1014 5.36KF 1/4W (N.M.)

R1015 5.36KF 1/4W (N.M.)

R1016 5.36KF 1/4W (N.M.)

RGDT-
4 Q1 R12 1.78kF 2W
4
2SC4548(E) DAA3.3V
C E 4 3

Q2 Primary side Secondary side


2SD1733 DAA3.3V R10 DAA3.3V

B
1

R11
0R

C14
C2 IC2
C13 10pF/50V 16 1

100kF(1608)
OFHK MCLK MCLOCK
B1uF/16V IC1 15 2
RGDT/FSD FSYNC ASPCLK

R1017
B0.22u/16V
Q1000 C1006 16 1 14 3

150(1608)
FILT2 QE2 M0 SCLK ABITCLK
2SA1759 B0.1u/50V 15 2 13 4
FILT DCT C3 R3 VA VD
E C 14 RX IGND 3 12 GND SDO 5 ARXD
13 REXT C1B 4 11 C1A SDI 6 ATXD
R1018 12 5 10 7
2.2K 1/10W REXT2 RNG1 R4 150p/AC250V 10 1/10W M1 FC/RGDT
11 REF RNG2 6 9 AOUT RESET 8 AFERST_L

B
10 7 10 1/10W
VREG2 QB Si3021-KS R1000
9 VREG QE 8
10K
Si3015-KS C9 C1000

K
R1013 B0.1u/16V 1000pF
120K

78.7F(1608)
DAAGND

RLZ5.6
B0.22u/10V
AK DAAGND

402F(1608)
DAAGND

1.78kF 2W
9.31kF(1608)

RD43FM
B1800p/50V
C1005

D2
D1
C1

ZD1001
B0.1u/16V
B0.01u/50V TPGND
2. FAX MAIN PWB (AL-1566)

5.36kF 1/4W (N.M.)


5.36kF 1/4W (N.M.)
5.36kF 1/4W (N.M.)
SPOUT

DAN217

R1001
ZD1
0R 1/4W(N.M.)

B0.1u/16V
DAN217
A
AK

RLZ5.6

C1004
215F(1608)

R1003
B0.68u/16V
C1002
R1 0R (N.M.)

R28
R1002
C1001
A

R1019
R1028
R1027
R7

R5
C1003
0R

ZD1000
DAAGND GND

C
C12 +3.3V DAA3.3V
Q1001 B B0.022u/250V C11
2SC4548(E) (2125) (3216) N.M. 1 3
3 3

E
FB2
C10
2

MEM2012(N.M.)

DAAGND
150p/AC250V

680 1/10W
R78

33pF/50V
C74 A4.7uF/50V(NP)
R1022 FB1 R1020 C1009
L3 0R(N.M.) BLM31A601S L1 56k 1/10W B560p/250V(2125)

C76
L7
MJ1 10R 1/4W TWKA151KNP
SBT-0260
1

10M
L8
2 TWKA102KNP
3
L1 L4

SA2
L2 C7 D3
4

R13
1000p/AC250V(NM) 2 1
SBT-0260

DSS-401M
5

C15
C1007
B3900p/16V

C4
6

1000pF

SA3
MJ-64J-RD315 VA1
FL4 3 4

DSS-301L
ST110AV DSS401M(N.M.)

R14
10M
C6 S1ZB60

C5

SA1
1000p/AC250V(NM)

1000pF
C75 A4.7uF/50V(NP)

DSS-401M
FB3 R1021 +24V

C1008
BLM31A601S L2 56k 1/10W

B0.01u/250V(N.M.)
B3900p/16V
L9
10R 1/4W TWKA151KNP

C77
R1023 C1011 R1029
0R(N.M.) B560p/250V(2125) 0R (1608)

R79 D1000 1SS355


680 1/10W

33pF/50V
IC14 +5V
2 2
1 7 RY1B
IN1 VCC R73 0R
OUT1 6 HS1_L 5 + - 4
5 R74 0R
OUT2 HS2_L
4 OUAZ-SH-124DZ(N.M.)
AOUT Q4 Q5 Q3

AL-1556/1566 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 13 - 25


R1117 2 3
H1 IN2 GND C81 DTC114EKA(N.M.) DTC114EKA(N.M.) RY2B DTC123JKA
F0.1uF/16V(1005) B C B C 1 16 C B
+ - S
Screw fixing section(N.M.) N.M. (3216) THS-56F
RSB-24
E
E
E

Secondary side GND R45


GND 10K
GND GND
3 13 4 PG
R75 R76
0R 1/10W 0R 1/10W R77
RY2A 0R 1/10W(N.M.) GND
RY1A RSB-24
OUAZ-SH-124DZ(N.M.) 1 2 11 9 6 8

ZD2
C26 R27 MTZJ30B
CID_L

1
4
0.22uF/250V 39K 1W PC1A
D4
1SS355 PC1B C25
TLP621 TLP621 0.1uF

2
3

MJ2 GND
BT1 1
LT1 2 L6
TEL1 3
TEL2 4 SBT-0260
LT2 5
1 BT2 6 R30 1
30 1/4W(N.M.)
MJ-62J-RD315 ZD4
HZS2C1(N.M.)
EXHKD_L
R29
2
4

0R 1/4W PC2B
TLP620(N.M.)
ZD3 PC2A C27
HZS2C1(N.M.) TLP620(N.M.) B1000p/50V(N.M.)
1
3

L5

SBT-0260
GND

A B C D E
4 3 2 1

FAX MAIN PWB (SPEAKER) 2/6


Vref

+5V

D D

56k
56k
56k
56k
C1024 Vref C1031

R1039
R1033
R1034
R1037
F0.1u/16V R1038 100pF
1K
SPOUT
Vref

R1051 R1056 200K


C1025 10K(N.M.) R1054 100k

1M
F0.1u/16V R1035
R1032 20k 3.3K
BZ
C1026 C1028 R1057 0R SP
6

R1041
IC4 F0.1u/16V IC6 F0.1u/16V R1053 R1055 OUT
13 3 13 3 R1050 3.3K 0R 3.3k 4 CN4
X0 X R1047 5.1k X0 X
14 X1 14 X1 2 5 1
15 R1045 10k 15 3
X2 R1049 18K X2 IC7 C41 2
12 X3 12 X3
1 +5V R1043 33K 1 +5V C39 NJM2113M 10uF(N.M.) B2B-PH-K-S
X4 X4
1
7
8

5 R1048 62K 5
C1023 R1031 C1022 X5 R1044 100K X5 A4.7u/50V
2 X6 VDD 16 2 X6 VDD 16
1.6k 4 R1046 200K 4
4700pF 2200pF X7 X7
6 C35 6 C37 +5V
INH F0.1u/16V INH F0.1u/16V
11 A VEE 7 11 A VEE 7
10 8 10 8 C28 C40
B VSS B VSS A4.7u/50V A4.7u/50V
9 C 9 C
AG AG +5V R1052
BU4051BCF BU4051BCF 22k
AG
AG AG SPMUTE
AG
R1042 R1040
10K 10K AG

C VOLCNT_A C
+5V

VOLCNT_B

10k
10k
10k

R42
R43
R44
VOL_A

VOL_B

VOL_C

+5V Vref

F0.1u/16V(N.M.)
F0.1u/16V(N.M.)
F0.1u/16V(N.M.)
R1058
1k

AL-1556/1566 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 13 - 26


C1027
C1029
C1030
B B
GND ZD5 C42
A4.7u/50V
HZ2C1

AG AG

R1059 0R

R1060 0R
A A

GND AG

4 3 2 1
4 3 2 1

FAX MAIN PWB (SRAM & FLASHROM(16M)) 3/6

D[7:0]

A[21:0]
D A0
D

IC10 IC9

A16 10 29 D7 A20 9 45
A15 A16 I/O7 D6 A19 A19 DQ15
7 A15 I/O6 28 16 A18 DQ14 43
A14 11 27 D5 A18 17 41
A13 A14 I/O5 D4 A17 A17 DQ13
4 A13 I/O4 26 48 A16 DQ12 39
A12 12 25 D3 A16 1 36
A11 A12 I/O3 D2 A15 A15 DQ11
1 A11 I/O2 23 2 A14 DQ10 34
A10 31 22 D1 A14 3 32
A9 A10 I/O1 D0 A13 A13 DQ9
2 A9 I/O0 21 4 A12 DQ8 30
A8 3 A12 5 44 D7
A7 A8 A11 A11 DQ7 D6
13 A7 6 A10 DQ6 42
A6 14 A10 7 40 D5
A5 A6 A9 A9 DQ5 D4
15 A5 8 A8 DQ4 38
A4 16 9 A17 A8 18 35 D3
A3 A4 NC A7 A7 DQ3 D2
17 A3 19 A6 DQ2 33
A2 18 A6 20 31 D1
A1 A2 BAT A5 A5 DQ1 D0
19 A1 21 A4 DQ0 29
A0 20 A4 22
A0 A3 A3
VCC 8 23 A2 RY/BY 15 F_RYBY
30 A2 24 47
CS_S0L CE1 C47 + C46 A1 A1 BYTE
CS_S1L 6 CE2 25 A0
32 F0.1u/16V 22uF/16V 13
OE F_WP VPP
5 WE VSS 24 CS_FL 26 CE VCC 37 +3.3V
RESETL 12 RP
28 C48
IS62WV1288B LL OE F0.1u/16V
11 WE GND 27
GND C1032 14 46
100pF A21 WP GND
10 NC

R1030 MBM29LV160BE90TN
75 GND

GND
C C
OEL
WEL

+3.3V BAT

+3.3V R55
10k IC11
C53 C52
RTC_DATA 7 DATA VDD 8
12pF 12pF
+3.3V BAT 6 3
RTC_CLK CLK XT-
ZD6
UDZ2.0B TR3 R59 5 2 4 1 X2
RTC_CE0H CE XT
KTA1504 3 2 MC-306/DT-38 32.768KHz
L_BT-

AL-1556/1566 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 13 - 27


1 I/O- VSS 4
0R C51 C50
R50 C54
20k IC12 SM8578BV F0.1u/16V 12pF(N.M.) 18pF(N.M.)
D1001 1 4 R56
R47 C45 1SS355 OUT GND 10k
360 R49 F0.1u/16V
1k 2 3
B VCC NC B
PST3426 GND
R57 GND
1k
R48 GND GND
TR2 1k
R46 KTC3875 R58

1
560 100k
BT1
CR2477(3V)

2
TR4
DTC363EKA
C B C_BT
GND
+3.3V

E
GND

TR1
KTA1504
GND
CS_S1L

R51
1k

A A
GND

4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

FAX MAIN PWB (MN195006Q) 4/6

MDM3.3V
D D

+3.3V

+3.3V

R1063 0R(3216) C49

A47u/25V

D5 1SS355(N.M.)

R1036
+5V IC5 LM1117-3.3V(N.M.) 0R(3216 N.M.) MDM3.3V GND

FL6
FL8
FL9
FL3
FL5
FL7
FL2
FL1
R41 0R(N.M.) 3

FL11
FL12
IN OUT1 2
4

GND
C8 OUT2
A22u/16V +1.8V C38 C1034 C36

1
F0.1u/16V(N.M.) F0.1u/16V
C20 C1021 A47u/25V
F0.1u/16V F0.1u/16V
C21 C1020
F0.1u/16V F0.1u/16V
C34 C1017
F0.1u/16V F0.1u/16V GND
C33 C1015 GND
R25 4.7k F0.1u/16V F0.1u/16V
+3.3V
C18 C1016
R21 0R F0.1u/16V F0.1u/16V
MDM_IRQ C19 C1019
F0.1u/16V F0.1u/16V
C22
CLKIN
F0.1u/16V C16
C23 A22u/16
F0.1u/16V R16
C C24 C1014 33 C
F0.1u/16V F0.1u/16V X1 +3.3V
C17 C1013 SCO10-24.576000MHz-3.3V
F0.1u/16V F0.1u/16V MDM3.3V R15 33 3 OUT OE 1
GND GND MDM3.3V 2 4

34
92
78
68
44
30
15
3
55
54
97
86
62
42
21
9
53
52
GND VDD FL10
IC3 C31 C32 ZJSR5101(22000p)
C470/16V F0.1u/16V
1 26 GND
T3IRQ NDBGREQ

VDD3
VDD3
VDD3
VDD3
VDD3
VDD3
VDD3
VDD2
VDD2
VDD2
VDD2
VDD2
VDD2

AVDD
DBGMOD 27
75 36

VDDREG
VDDREG
REGOUT
REGOUT
CS_ML NDPCS PLLON R1024
OEL 74 NDPRD TMS 33
73 31 47K
WEL NDPWR TCK
R17 47K 71 29
MDM3.3V R18 47K NUB TDI
72 NLB TDO 28

GND 41
M_RESETL NRESET
CXIN 39
CXOUT 38
C1018 A11 100 43 R1006 75
DPA11 CLKOUT MCLOCK
100pF A10 98 37
A9 DPA10 CNT
96 DPA09 LON 51
A8 95
GND A7 DPA08
94 45 CN1
A6 DPA07 SCANNT +3.3V
93 DPA06 MINTEST 46 1
A5 91 48
DPA05 INTEST +3.3V 2
A4 90 49
A3 DPA04 MODE0 3
88 DPA03 MODE1 50 4
A2 87 GND
A1 DPA02 MN195006E 5

AL-1556/1566 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 13 - 28


85 DPA01 EYECLK 57 6
A0 84 58 R1004 R8 R1005
A[21:0] DPA00 EYEDAT GND A2-6PA-2.54DSA(NM) 47K 47K 47K
BR1
D7 1 8 33 25 59 R6 100
D[7:0] DPD15 ABITCLK ABITCLK
D6 2 7 24 60 R9 100
DPD14 ASPCLK ASPCLK
D5 3 6 22 63 R1007 0R
DPD13 ATXD ATXD
D4 4 5 BR2 20 61 R2 100
D3 DPD12 ARXD ARXD
1 8 33 19 DPD11
D2 2 7 18
D1 DPD10 R1009 47k
3 6 16 DPD09 BBITCLK 65 MDM3.3V
D0 4 5 14 66 R1010 47k R1008
B MDM3.3V R33 47K DPD08 BSPCLK R1012 47k 47K B
13 DPD07 BTXD 69
R34 47K 12 67 R1011 47k
R35 47K DPD06 BRXD
10 DPD05
R36 47K 8 GND
R37 47K DPD04 R23 47K GND
7 DPD03 GPIO0 76 MDM3.3V
R38 47K 6 77 R24 47K
R39 47K DPD02 GPIO1 R26 47K
4 DPD01 GPIO2 79
R40 47K 2 81 R22 47K(NM)
DPD00 GPIO3 R1025 47K
GPIO4 82
83 R1026 47K
GPIO5

AVSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS

35
99
89
80
70
64
56
47
40
32
23
17
11
5
GND
R20 0R
AFERST_L

R19
47K

A A
GND

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

FAX MAIN PWB (ASIC_NEW_CILF) D[7:0]


5/6
A[21:0]

MCU_D[7:0]

PB_A[7:0]
D BR18
D
MNR04 47
PB_D[7:0]
1 8 PB_D0
2 7 PB_D1
3 6 PB_D2
4 5 PB_D3

1 8 PB_D4
BR17 2 7 PB_D5
MNR04 47 3 6 PB_D6
4 5 PB_D7

FL20 (N.M.) +3.3V


IC13
C65
1 160 F0.1u/16V
+3.3V VDD GND
2 PB_DAT_05 GND 159
3 PB_DAT_04 PB_DAT_06 158
4 157 GND
PB_DAT_03 PB_DAT_07
5 PB_DAT_02 CPU_INT_N 156 MCU_INT
6 155 FL14 (N.M.) +3.3V
PB_DAT_01 CPU_CS_N MCU_CEL
1 8 PB_D7 7 154
PB_DAT_00 CPU_RD_N MCU_OEL
2 7 BR22 PB_D6 8 153 BR4
PB_D5 PB_A7 TESTMODE0 VDD MNR04 0R C56
3 6 MNR04 22K 9 PB_ADDR_07 GND 152
4 5 PB_D4 PB_A6 10 151 1 8 MCU_D0 F0.1u/16V
PB_D3 PB_A5 PB_ADDR_06 CPU_DT_00 MCU_D1
1 8 11 PB_ADDR_05 CPU_DT_01 150 2 7
2 7 BR23 PB_D2 PB_A4 12 149 3 6 MCU_D2
PB_D1 PB_A3 PB_ADDR_04 CPU_DT_02 MCU_D3 GND
3 6 MNR04 22K 13 PB_ADDR_03 CPU_DT_03 148 4 5
4 5 PB_D0 +3.3V PB_A2 14 147 BR3
PB_A7 PB_A1 PB_ADDR_02 GND MCU_D4
1 8 15 PB_ADDR_01 CPU_DT_04 146 1 8
2 7 BR24 PB_A6 PB_A0 16 145 2 7 MCU_D5
R1087 10K PB_ADDR_00 CPU_DT_05 MCU_D6 FL13 (N.M.) +3.3V
3 6 MNR04 (N.M.) PB_A5 17 PB_CE2_N CPU_DT_06 144 3 6
4 5 PB_A4 +3.3V FL21 (N.M.) 18 143 4 5 MCU_D7
PB_CS1L PB_CE1_N CPU_DT_07
1 8 PB_A3 19 142
PB_AE0L PB_AE0_N VDD
2 7 BR25 PB_A2 20 141 MNR04 0R C55
PB_A1 C64 VDD GND F0.1u/16V
3 6 MNR04 (N.M.) 21 GND FAXWRIN_N 140 WEL
4 5 PB_A0 1 8 F0.1u/16V 22 139 R1073 10K
PB_WEL PB_WR_N UART_RTS +3.3V
R1082 22K PB_CS1L 2 7 BR30 23 138 R1077 10K
PB_OEL PB_OE_N UART_CTS
C R1088 22K PB_AE0L 3 6 MNR14 10K 24 137 R1074 10K GND C
R1083 22K PB_WEL GND RESETL RESET_N UART_SOUT R1078 10K
4 5 WAKE_UP 25
WAKE_UP UART_SIN 136
R1089 22K PB_OEL 26 135
D7 FGPI_07 RTC_ION
1 8 27 FGPI_06 RTC_CE 134 RTC_CE0H
2 7 BR27 D6 28 133 +3.3V
EXHKD_L FGPI_05 RTC_SCLK RTC_CLK
3 6 MNR04 10K D5 D6 29 132
FGPI_04 RTC_SDATA RTC_DATA
4 5 D4 30 131 R1071
RGDT- FGPI_03 FAXCS_N_00 CS_S0L
1 8 D3 DA204U R1106 10K 31 130
HS2_L FGPI_02 FAXCS_N_01
2 7 BR26 D2 R1115 10K 32 129 10K(N.M.)
CID_L FGPI_01 FAXCS_N_02 CS_FL CS_OP1L
3 6 MNR04 10K D1 JP2 R1114 10K 33 128
HS1_L FGPI_00 FAXCS_N_03 CS_OP2L
4 5 D0 34 127
R62 10K A21 FGPIO_07 FAXCS_N_04 R1069 100
F_RYBY 35 FGPIO_06 FAXCS_N_05 126 CS_ML
R61 10K A20 T2B-SQ 36 125 R54 100
FGPIO_05 FAXOE_N OEL
1 8 A19 37 124 R1066 100
FGPIO_04 FAXWR_N WEL
2 7 BR7 A18 R1113 10K 38 123 R53 0R A21
+3.3V FL25 (N.M.) TCK FAXADD_21 C1044 C1033 C1043
3 6 MNR04 10K A17 R68 10K 39
TRST GND 122
4 5 A16 GND 40 121 18pF 18pF 18pF
A15 VDD GND
1 8
2 7 BR8 A14 C73 ASIC_NEW_CILF FL19 (N.M.) +3.3V
3 6 MNR04 10K A13 1 8 F0.1u/16V 41 120
A12 GND VDD R60 100 A20
4 5 2 7 BR29 42 GND FAXADD_20 119
1 8 A11 3 6 MNR14 10K R1112 10K 43 118 1 8 A19 C62
A10 GND TMS FAXADD_19 A18 F0.1u/16V GND
2 7 BR9 4 5 44 NC FAXADD_18 117 2 7 BR12
3 6 MNR04 10K A9 R1111 10K 45 116 3 6 MNR04 100 A17
A8 TDI FAXADD_17 A16
4 5 46 TDO FAXADD_16 115 4 5
1 8 A7 47 114
A6 FGPIO_03 FAXADD_15 A15
2 7 BR10 48 FGPIO_02 FAXADD_14 113 1 8
3 6 MNR04 10K A5 49 112 BR13 2 7 A14 GND
C_BT FGPIO_01 GND
4 5 A4 50 111 MNR04 100 3 6 A13
L_BT- FGPIO_00 FAXADD_13
1 8 A3 51 110 4 5 A12
A2 TELELIN FAXADD_12 A11
2 7 BR11 BZ 52 BEEP_O_V1 FAXADD_11 109 1 8
3 6 MNR04 10K A1 R1105 10K 53 108 2 7 BR14 A10
A0 BEEP_O_V2 FAXADD_10 A9
4 5 54 FGPO_15 FAXADD_09 107 3 6 MNR04 100
55 106 4 5 A8
R1076 22K(N.M.) RESETL GND R1104 100 FGPO_14 FAXADD_08 A7 FL18 (N.M.) +3.3V
M_RESETL 56 FGPO_13 FAXADD_07 105 1 8
R1080 22K(N.M.) WAKE_UP 57 104 BR15 2 7 A6
S FGPO_12 FAXADD_06
58 103 MNR04 100 3 6 A5
MCU_D7 +3.3V FL24 (N.M.) GND FAXADD_05 A4 C63
1 8 59 FGPO_11 FAXADD_04 102 4 5
2 7 BR5 MCU_D6 60 101 F0.1u/16V
FGPO_10 GND
3 6 MNR04 (N.M.) MCU_D5 61 FGPO_09 VDD 100
4 5 MCU_D4 C72 62 99 1 8 A3 +3.3V

AL-1556/1566 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 13 - 29


B MCU_D3 F0.1u/16V FGPO_08 FAXADD_03 A2 GND B
1 8 63 GND FAXADD_02 98 2 7 BR16
2 7 BR6 MCU_D2 64 97 3 6 MNR04 100 A1
MNR04 (N.M.) MCU_D1 VDD FAXADD_01 A0
3 6 SPMUTE 65 FGPO_07 FAXADD_00 96 4 5
4 5 MCU_D0 GND 66 95 1 8 D0 + C68
R1065 22K MCU_INT FGPO_06 FAX_DATA_00 BR28 D1 A47u/25V
F_WP 67 FGPO_05 FAX_DATA_01 94 2 7
R1081 22K MCU_CEL 68 93 MNR04 100 3 6 D2
VOL_C FGPO_04 FAX_DATA_02 D3
R1086 22K MCU_OEL 69 92 4 5
VOL_B FGPO_03 FAX_DATA_03 D4 +3.3V
70 91 R64 100
VOL_A FGPO_02 FAX_DATA_04 D5
R1075 10K WEL 71 90 R65 100
VOLCNT_B FGPO_01 FAX_DATA_05 +3.3V +3.3V
R1062 10K OEL 72 89 R1094 0R(N.M.)
VOLCNT_A FGPO_00 TMD0_OUT
R1068 10K(N.M.) CS_OP2L +3.3V FL23 (N.M.) D7 R67 100 73 88 GND
R1070 10K(N.M.) CS_OP1L D6 R66 100 FAX_DATA_07 TOUT R1092 10K R1093
74 FAX_DATA_06 TESTB 87
R1067 10K CS_FL 75 86 10K
R1072 10K CS_ML C71 VDD TMD2 R1091
76 GND TMD1 85
R1079 10K CS_S0L F0.1u/16V 77 84 10K(N.M.)
R1108 10K F_RYBY XIN TMD0 R1095 0R R32 N.M. CLKIN
78 XOUT SYSCLK_IN 83
R1102 10K(N.M.) M_RESETL 79 82
R1109 10K(N.M.) HS2_L GND GND CLKSEL
80 GND VDD 81
R1110 10K(N.M.) HS1_L C1048
100pF R1090
R1107 7.5k GND 10K
CID_L
R1084 10k 10K
EXHKD_L

R1103 10K(N.M.) SPMUTE


GND FL22 (N.M.) +3.3V GND GND

R72 22K RESETL


R71 10K M_RESETL + C70
C69 A47u/25V
R1101 10K(N.M.) VOL_C F0.1u/16V
R1100 10K(N.M.) VOL_B +3.3V
R1099 10K(N.M.) VOL_A
R1098 10K(N.M.) VOLCNT_B
R1097 10K(N.M.) VOLCNT_A GND
IC8
CLKIN 1 Xin VDD 8
2 Xout S0 7
GND 3 6 R52 0R
R31 510 S1 FSOUT
4 LF VSS 5
C44 C1049
A P2782A-08SR F0.1u/16V 100pF A
C30
C29 270pF R1096
F0.1u 75Ω

GND GND GND GND

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

FAX MAIN PWB (MCU I/F) 6/6


+24V IN5V +5V IN3.3V +3.3V
TP5V TP3.3V
TP24V LC3S-Y(N.M.) LC3S-Y(N.M.)
ZJSR5101(22000p) LC3S-Y(N.M.) ZJSR5101(22000p) ZJSR5101(22000p)
FL17 FL16 FL15

+ C61
A47u/35V
D + + D

C57

C60
C43
C59
C58

A47u/25V
A47u/25V
GND

F0.1u/16V
F0.1u/16V
IN5V IN3.3V

1000p(N.M.)
PG CN5
GND GND
GND 1
2 R1116 0R (1608 N.M.)
3
CN3 4
B4B-PH-K-S(N.M.)
1
2 GND
3
4
5
6 FB12
7 MCU_D[7:0]
1 8 MNR04 100 MCU_D7
8 MCU_D6
9 2 7
3 6 MCU_D5
10 MCU_D4
11 4 5
1 8 MCU_D3
12 MCU_D2
13 2 7 FB8
3 6 MNR04 100 MCU_D1
14 MCU_D0
15 4 5
16
17 1 8
18 2 7 FB7
19 3 6 MNR04 47
20 4 5

10p/50V(N.M.)
10p/50V(N.M.)
10p/50V(N.M.)
10p/50V(N.M.)
10p/50V(N.M.)
10p/50V(N.M.)
10p/50V(N.M.)
10p/50V(N.M.)
20FE-BT-VK-N

C1047
C1046
C1038
C1040
C1037
C1039
C1041
C1042
C GND C
R1064 0R
MCU_OEL
R1085 0R
MCU_CEL
MCU_INT

10p/50V
10p/50V
10p/50V

C1036
C1045
C1035
GND
PB_D[7:0]
PB_D7
PB_D6
PB_D5
PB_D4
PB_D3
PB_D2
PB_D1
PB_D0

33pF
33pF
33pF
33pF
33pF
33pF
33pF
33pF
CN2
FB11
1

C1062
C1063
C1064
C1065
C1066
C1067
C1068
C1069
2 1 8 MNR04 33
3 2 7
3 6

AL-1556/1566 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 13 - 30


4
5 4 5
6 1 8
2 7 FB10 GND
B 7 B
8 3 6 MNR04 33
9 4 5
FB9 BR19
10 PB_A[7:0]
1 8 MNR04 33 MNR04 0R 1 8 PB_A7
11 PB_A6
12 2 7 2 7
3 6 3 6 PB_A5
13 PB_A4
14 4 5 4 5
1 8 1 8 PB_A3
15 PB_A2
16 2 7 FB6 2 7
3 6 MNR04 33 3 6 BR20 PB_A1
17 PB_A0
18 4 5 4 5 MNR04 0R
FB5
19
20 1 8 MNR04 0R
2 7

33pF
33pF
33pF
33pF
33pF
33pF
33pF
33pF
21
22 3 6
23 4 5
R69 100
24 R70 0
25
26

C1050
C1051
C1052
C1053
C1060
C1057
C1055
C1054
26F-E-BT-VK-N

GND

1 8 PB_CS1L
R1061 N.M. 2 7 PB_AE0L
3 6 BR21 PB_WEL
4 5 MNR04 33 PB_OEL
R63 33
RESETL
MDM_IRQ
GND PG

33pF
33pF
33pF

100pF

1000pF

10p/50V
D7

1SS355(N.M.)

C66
C67
C1059
C1056
C1058
C1061

A A

GND

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
A B C D E

OPERATION PWB (LED/LCD Section) 1/3

5V

1 3
LED_V1
Q303
4 KRA225S LED302
4
LED301 LED304 LED303

FAX SCAN COPY PRINT


3.3V

Q304
To LCD
KRA225S IC301

2
1 3 10
3. OPERATION PWB

LED_V2 9 GND
8 V5
R334 100J 7 VDD
LED308 LED307 LED309 LCDRS LCDRS#
6 RS
LCDDB[7..4] R333 100J 5 R/W
SPON ALM MB LCDE LCDE# E
LCDDB4 R332 100J LCDDB4# 4
R331 100J 3 DB4
LCDDB5 LCDDB5#
Q305 R330 100J 2 DB5
LCDDB6 LCDDB6#
KRA225S DB6

2
LCDDB7 R329 100J LCDDB7# 1
1 3 DB7
LED_V3
GPM181C0
560J

LED306 LED305 LED310


C333
1CAS 2CAS READY
0.1u
R335

R328
10kJ Pin Holes x 10

2
3 3
R324 R325 R326
0J 0J 0J

DATA1

LCDDB7#

5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
LCDDB6#
IC304 LCDDB5#
LCDDB4#
TB62725AF LCDE#

/OUT0
/OUT1
/OUT2
/OUT3
/OUT4
/OUT5
/OUT6
/OUT7
LCDRS#
C332
100p
C327
100p
C328
100p
C329
100p
C330
100p
C331
100p

VCC
S-IN
CLOCK
/LATCH
/ENABLE
S-OUT
R-EXT
GND

16
2
3
4
13
14
15
1
2 2

AL-1556/1566 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 13 - 31


R327 C323
3.3V
820J
open
3.3V R306
OPEN 5VEN
C322

0.1u
R323
10KJ R305
0J
Iout=(1.15/Rext)x14.9 [A] LED311

R304 100J =(1.15/820)x14.9=20.9mA PML


OP-DATA
R303 100J
OP-CLK
R302 100J
Q302
3

2 C305 C306 C307


OP-LATCH
1000p 1000p open Q301
3 R301 470J
1 C308 1
2
PSL
Open KRC106S

1
KRC106S
1

A B C D E
A B C D E

OPERATION PWB (KEY / Buzzer Section) 2/3

5VEN

4 D301 4
BZ301
1SS133 KEY321 KEY320 KEY322 KEY316 KEY306 KEY314 KEY312 KEY301
1

2
PS1720P02 CAK NM6K NM1K NM8K MAGK ENTK DWK MODK
D302
Q306
3 R339 10kJ
1SS133 KEY325 KEY323 KEY318 KEY309 KEY315 KEY313 KEY311 KEY302
2
BZR

CLK NM2K NM4K SHPK NM7K UPK MENUK CASK


D303

KRC106S

1
1SS133 KEY324 KEY319 KEY317 KEY308 KEY307 KEY305 KEY304 KEY303

NM3K NM5K NM9K NM0K ASTK EXMODK ESTK DUPK

3 3

5V
IC303

R338 1kJ 1 15
KEYSC1 R337 1kJ A Y0
2 14
KEYSC2 R336 1kJ B Y1
3 13
KEYSC3 C Y2 12
C321 6 Y3 11
4 G1 Y4 10 F-KEYSC1
C318 C319 C320 0.1u 5 G2A Y5 9 F-KEYSC2
G2B Y6 7 F-KEYSC3
Open Open Open Y7

74HC238

IC302
6 4 R314 100J
W D0 F-KEYIN1
3 R313 100J
R318 33J D1 F-KEYIN2
5 2 R312 100J
2 KEYIN Y D2 F-KEYIN3 2
1 R311 100J
D3 F-KEYIN4
15 R307 100J
5V D4 F-KEYIN5
14 R308 100J

AL-1556/1566 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 13 - 32


D5 F-KEYIN6
13 R309 100J
D6 F-KEYIN7
C315 12 R310 100J
D7 F-KEYIN8
47pF C312 11
A 10
0.1u B 9 C337 R342 C335 R341 C334 R340 C313 R319 C314 R320 C316 R321 C317 R322 C336 R343
C 7
G Open 2kJ Open 2kJ Open 2kJ Open 2kJ Open 2kJ Open 2kJ Open 2kJ Open 2kJ
74HC151
R317 1kJ
SELIN3
R316 1kJ
SELIN2
R315 1kJ
SELIN1

C311 C310 C309

Open Open Open

KEY310

PSW
PSW
1 1
C304

Open

A B C D E
A B C D E

OPERATION PWB (Connector Section) 3/3

4 4
To MCU PWB

3.3V 5V 5VEN
Close to CN1

C303 C324 C302 C325 C301 C326

CN302 47uF/16v 0.1u 47uF/16v 0.1u 47uF/16v 0.1u


To FAX Key PWB
1 To Drum Initial Detector
2
3
4
5
6 CN301
7 DRST
8 1
9 PSW 2
10 KEYIN 3 F-KEYIN7
11 PSL 4 F-KEYIN6 CN303
12 OP-CLK 5 F-KEYIN5
13 OP-LATCH 6 F-KEYIN4
DRST
14 OP-DATA 7 F-KEYIN3 1
3 15 SELIN1 8 F-KEYIN2 2 3
16 SELIN2 LCDDB[7..4] 9 F-KEYIN1 3
17 SELIN3 10 F-KEYIN8
LCDDB7 F-KEYSC3
18 11 S3B-PH-K-S
LCDDB6 F-KEYSC2
19 12
20 LCDDB5 13 F-KEYSC1
LCDDB4 LED_V3
21 14
22 LCDE 15 LED_V2
23 LCDRS 16 LED_V1
24 BZR 17 DATA1
25 KEYSC1 18
26 KEYSC2
27 KEYSC3 18FE-ST-VK-N
28

28FE-ST-VK-N

2 2

AL-1556/1566 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 13 - 33


1 1

A B C D E
A B C D E

FAX OPERATION PWB 1/1

4 4

CN401
18
D401
17
16 F-KEYIN7
15 F-KEYIN6
14 F-KEYIN5 KEY418 KEY417 KEY416 KEY415 KEY414 KEY413 KEY412 KEY419
1SS133
13 F-KEYIN4
12 F-KEYIN3
11 F-KEYIN2
10 F-KEYIN1 S/SK MEMK OT5K OT4K OT3K OT2K OT1K SPKK
D402
9 F-KEYIN8
8 F-KEYSC3
7 F-KEYSC2
6 F-KEYSC1 KEY408 KEY407 KEY406 KEY405 KEY404 KEY403 KEY402 KEY409
4. FAX OPERATION (AL-1566)

1SS133
5 LED_V3
4 LED_V2
3 LED_V1
2 DATA1 CONTK RESOK SFTK OT9K OT8K OT7K OT6K CSK
D403
1
LED401

LS
18FE-ST-VK-N KEY411 KEY410 KEY421 KEY420 KEY401
1SS133

FDUPK REPK R/PK BCK RMODK


3 3

LED403

MEM

LED402

SHIFT

AL-1556/1566 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 13 - 34


2 2

1 1

A B C D E
5. NIC PWB
A B C

NIC PWB (CONTROL SECTION)


VCC3

C29
OPEN
2 1

1
R11 IC9
OPEN
R14 OPEN R15 OPEN
8 1 2 1 2 X2 X2
VDD Xin 1

2
VCC3 7 SR0 Xout 2
VCC3

2
L2 6 MODOUT FS0 3 X2
X1 5
ZJSR5101-223 SSon Vss 4 HC-49U/S

1
4 1 3 8 5 1 R8 2 X1
C28 40.0000MHz
VCC OUTPUT P2010/PLL701-01

1
X1 OPEN

2
R16 OPEN
22000p

33J
C12

1
1

C14 1 2
C13

1
2

0.1u 12p
1 4 R12 R13 2 1
2

N.C. GND

2
OPEN OPEN C30 OPEN
OSC-31 R17 OPEN
40MHz 1 2

2
C31

2 1 X1 X1
OPEN

R23 2
IC5
1
0J BR1 33J A0
X1 X1 64 X1 A23 101 A1
L3 X2 63 102 1 8 A2
1 2 X2 X2 A22
80 CLKOUT A21 103 2 7 A3
CLKOUT
MMZ2012Y121 (OPEN) A20 104 3 6 A4
(/RESET) 71 105 4 5 A5
(/RESET) /RESET A19
1

C36 5V A18 106 A6


OPEN 66 CKSEL A17 107 A17 A7
67 108 A16 A8
2

MODE0 A16
68 MODE1 A15 109 BR2 4 5 33J A15 A9
69 110 3 6 A14 A10
3 1 R9 2 70
MODE2 A14
111 2 7 A13 A11
MODE3 A13
10kJ A12 112 1 8 A12 A12
37 NMI A11 113 BR3 4 5 33J A11 A13
TP1 P21 P21 38 P21 A10 114 3 6 A10 A14
1 TXD0 39 TXD0 A09 115 2 7 A9 A15
RXD0 40 RXD0 A08 116 1 8 A8 A16
RXD0
TP2 41 /SCK0 A07 118 BR4 4 5 33J A7
42 119 3 6 A6 A17 1
1 TXD1 A06
RXD1 RXD1 43 RXD1 A05 120 2 7 A5
44 /SCK1 A04 121 1 8 A4
A03 122 BR5 4 5 33J A3 5V
/DREQ3 1 INTP103/DMARQ3 A02 123 3 6 A2
/DREQ3 BR6
/DREQ2 /DREQ2 2 INTP102/DMARQ2 A01 124 2 7 A1
/DREQ1 3 125 1 8 A0 10kJ
/DREQ1 INTP101/DMARQ1 A00
/DREQ0 /DREQ0 R24 0J 4 INTP100/DMARQ0 D7 4 5
TI0 1 2 5 D6 3 6
TI0 TI10/PP03
TCLR0 TCLR0 6 TCLR10/P02 D5 2 7
7 TO101/P01 P57/D15 127 D4 1 8
8 TO100/P00 P56/D14 128 D3 4 5
P55/D13 129 D2 3 6
P54/D12 130 D1 2 7
10 INTP113/DMAAK3 P53/D11 131 D0 1 8
11 INTP112/DMAAK2 P52/D10 132
12 INTP111/DMAAK1 P51/D09 133 BR7
/DACK0 /DACK0 R25 0J 13 INTP110/DMAAK0 P50/D08 134 10kJ
5V TI1 1 2 14
TI1 TI11/P13
/TCLR1 R26 0J 15 TCLR11/P12 D07 136 BR8 4 5 33J D7
/TCLR1 1 2 16 TO111/P11 D06 137 3 6 D6
TO1 17 TO110/P10 D05 138 2 7 D5
TO1
D04 139 1 8 D4
R21 1kJ D03 140 BR9 4 5 33J D3
1 2 /TCLR1 18 141 3 6 D2 A0
INTP123/TC3 D02
R22 820J 19 INTP122/TC2 D01 142 2 7 D1 VCC3 A1
1 2 /DREQ0 20 143 1 8 D0 BR13 A2
INTP121/TC1 D00
21 INTP120/TC0 10kJ A3
TI2 TI2 22 54 NICRST /PACK 1 8 A4
TI12/P103 P117 NICRST /PACK
TCLR2 TCLR2 23 TCLR12/P102 P116 55 P75 P75 2 7 A5
24 TO121/P101 P115 56 P76 P76 3 6 A6
BR10 25 57 P77 4 5 A7
TO120/P100 P114 P77
10kJ 58 A8
2 P113
1 8 RXD0 59 A9
RXD0 P112
2 7 TI2 TI2 INTP33 46 INTP133 P111 60 BR17 A10
INTP33
3 6 TCLR2 INTP32 47 INTP132 P110 61 10kJ A11
TCLR2 INTP32 /FLT 1 8 A12
4 5 /NWAIT /LK_LED 48 INTP131 /FLT
/NWAIT /LK_LED NICINT R27 0J 49 SLCT 2 7 A13
NICINT INTP130 SLCT
TI3 1 2 50 PERR 3 6 A14
TI3 TI13 PERR
BR11 TCLR3 51 72 ST_LED PBSY 4 5
TCLR3 TCLR13 P127 ST_LED PBSY
10kJ 52 73 /DMAEN
TO131 P126 /DMAEN 5V
1 8 /REFRQ /REFRQ 53 TO130 P125 74 /A_STB /A_STB BR12
2 7 /HLDRQ /HLDRQ P124 75 DIR DIR 10kJ
3 6 NICRST P123 76 /S_STB /S_STB /S_STB /S_STB 1 8
NICRST
4 5 TO1 /NWAIT 81 /WAIT P122 77 /AFEED /AFEED DIR 2 7
TO1 /NWAIT DIR
/REFRQ 82 /REFRQ P121 78 /IT /IT /A_STB 3 6
/REFRQ /A_STB
/HLDRQ 84 /HLDRQ P120 79 /SELIN /SELIN /DMAEN /DMAEN 4 5
/HLDRQ
85 /HLDAK
BR14 86 26 P77
/OE P77 P77
10kJ 87 27 P76 BR16
/BCYST P76 P76
1 8 INTP32 INTP32 BR15 88 /WE P75 28 P75 10kJ
33J P75
2 7 INTP33 /RD /RD 1 8 89 /RD P74 29 /PACK /SELIN /SELIN 1 8
INTP33 /PACK
3 6 RXD1 /WR /WR 2 7 90 /UWR P73 30 PBSY /IT /IT 2 7
RXD1 PBSY
4 5 P21 /CSPRN 3 6 91 /LWR P72 31 PERR PERR /AFEED /AFEED 3 6
P21 /CSPRN
/CSROM /CSROM 4 5 P71 32 SLCT SLCT ST_LED ST_LED 4 5
P70 33 /FLT /FLT
BR18 BR19 99 /CS0
10kJ 4 5 98 /CS1
1 8 TCLR3 TCLR3 /CSNIC /CSNIC 3 6 97 /CS2
2 7 TI3 TI3 /CSRAM /CSRAM 2 7 96 /CS3
3 6 NICINT NICINT /IOWR /IOWR 1 8 95 /CS4/IOWR
4 5 /LK_LED 94 /CS5/IORD CPU3.3 VCC3
LK_LED 33J 93 /CS6
92 /CS7
BR20 45
VDD
10kJ 144
1

VDD
1 8 JP CVDD 62
JP
2 7 /DREQ3 9
IC8
2

/DREQ3 VSS
3 6 /DREQ2 83 VSS 5V
/DREQ2
4 5 /DREQ1 117 VSS /AFEED /AFEED 1 A0 VCC 14
/DREQ1
135 VSS 2 /O0 A3 13
65 CVSS HVDD 100 3 A1 /O3 12
BR21 35 126 /AFEED3 4 11
AVSS HVDD /AFEED3 /O1 A4
1 10kJ 36 AVREF AVDD 34 /IT /IT 5 A2 /O4 10
1 8 TI0 6 /O2 A5 9
TI0
2 7 TCLR0 7 GND /O5 8
3 6 /DACK0 TCLR0
4 5 TI1 /DACK0
TI1
UPD703100GJ-33-8EU 74VHC14

A B C

AL-1556/1566 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 13 - 35


C D E

1/2

VCC3 CPU3.3 VCC3


L4
ZJSR5101-102TA
1 3
4

1
1

1
+ +

2
C19 C21 C22 C23 C20 C24 C25 C26 C27
10U/16V 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U 10U/16V 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U

2
2

2
A[17:0]

D[7:0]

IC4
0 20 21 D0
A0 D00
1 19 22 D1
A1 D01
2 18 23 D2
A2 D02
3 17 25 D3
A3 D03
4 16 26 D4
A4 D04
5 15 27 D5
A5 D05
6 14 28 D6
A6 D06
7 13 29 D7
A7 D07
8 3
A8
9 2
A9
10 31 30 /CSROM
11 1
A10 /CE
7 /WR
/CSROM 3
A11 /WE /WR
12 12 32 /RD
A12 /OE /RD
13 4 A13 5V
14 5 A14
15 11 A15 VCC 8
16 10 P[7:0]
A16
1

R10 9
NC C15
A17 1 2 6
NC VSS
24
0.1U
IC6
OPEN
2

D0 33 22 /STB /STB
SST39SF010-70-WH I/O I/O
D1 32 I/O I/O 12 P7
D2 31 I/O I/O 13 P6
D3 28 I/O I/O 14 P5
D4 27 I/O I/O 15 P4
D5 26 I/O I/O 18 P3
D6 25 I/O I/O 19 P2
D7 23 I/O I/O 20 P1
I/O 21 P0
I/O 34 /TCLR1 /TCLR1
I/O 35 /DREQ0 /DREQ0

/DMAEN /DMAEN 43 I/O


/A_STB /A_STB 44 I/O
/S_STB 1 I/O
/S_STB DIR 38
DIR IN
/PACK 10 I/O
/PACK PBSY 8
PBSY I/O VCC3
IC7 DIR3 6 I/O
DIR3
BR26 33J 9
VCCINT
0 10 A0 IO0 11 1 8 D0
VCCINT 17
1 9 12 2 7 D1 (/RESET) 39 29
A1 IO1 (/RESET) IN VCCIO
2 8 A2 IO2 13 3 6 D2
CLKOUT CLKOUT 37 IN VCCIO 41
3 7 A3 IO3 15 4 5 D3
TO1 TO1 40 IN
4 6 A4 IO4 16 4 5 D4 /RD 2 I/O GNDINT 36
5 5 17 /RD
A5 IO5
3 6 D5 /WR 3 I/O GNDINT 16
/WR 4
6 4 A6 IO6 18 2 7 D6
/CSPRN /CSPRN 5 I/O GNDIO
7 3 A7 IO7 19 1 8 D7
/DACK0 /DACK0 42 I/O GNDIO 24
8 25 A8 /IOWR /IOWR 7 I/O GNDIO 11
9 24 A9
BR27 33J
GNDIO 30 2
10 21 A10 /CS1 20 /CSRAM
/CSRAM
11 23 A11 /WE 27 /WR
/WR
12 2 A12 /OE 22 /RD
/RD
13 26 A13 EPM3032ATC44-10
14 1 A14 5V

VCC 28
1

C16
0.1U
2

VSS 14

IS16C256AH-12

VCC3
1

C18
0.1U
2

/SELIN3 /SELIN3
/SELIN /SELIN
1
/IT3 /IT3

C D E

AL-1556/1566 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 13 - 36


A B C

NIC PWB (ETHERNET SECTION)

A[17:0]

D[7:0] IC1
4

74
BA14
73
BA15
A0 5 72
A1 SA0 BA16 71
7
SA1 BA17
A2 8 69
SA2 BA18
A3 9 68
SA3 BA19
A4 10 67
SA4 BA20
11 66
5V SA5 BA21
12
SA6
13
SA7
15 85
SA8 BD0
16 84
SA9 BD1
18 82
19
SA10 BD2
81 IC2
SA11 BD3 80
20 1 CS
SA12 BD4
21 79 EESK 2 SK
SA13 BD5
22 78 EEDI 3 DI
SA14 BD6
23 77 EEDO 4 DO
SA15 BD7
24
SA16
25
26
SA17
75 IS93C
SA18 BCSB
27 76 EECS
SA19 EECS

AUI 64

BR24 0J 54
CD+
D0 1 8 36 CD- 53
D1 2 7 37 SD0 56
SD1 RX+
D2 3 6 38 RX- 55
D3 4 5 39 SD2 49
SD3 TX+
D4 1 8 40 TX- 48
D5 2 7 41 SD4 59
SD5 TPIN+
D6 3 6 42 58
SD6 TPIN-
D7 4 5 43 45
SD7 TPOUT+
3 95 46
SD8 TPOUT-
BR25 0J 94
93 SD9
92 SD10 60
91 SD11 LEDBNC /LK_LED LK_LED
61
SD12 LED0
90 62
SD13 LED1
88 63
SD14 LED2
87
SD15

50 CLKOUT
NICINT NICINT
X1
4 INT0 X2 51
3 INT1
2 INT2
1 65 JP JP
INT3 JP
100 INT4
99 ET5V
INT5
98 6
INT6 VDD
97 17
INT7 VDD 47
VDD
57
34 VDD
/CSNIC /CSNIC 70
35 AEN VDD
/NWAIT 89
/NWAIT 96 IOCHRDY VDD
/RD 29 IOCS16B
/RD IORB
/WR /WR 30
NICRST 33 IOWB 14
NICRST RSTDRV GND
31 28
32 SMEMRB GND
44
5V SMEMWB GND
2

R5 52
GND 83
27kJ GND
86
GND
1

RTL8019AS
2

5V ET5V

L1
ZJSR5101-102TA

1 3
1

+
2

1 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 C10 C11
10U/16V 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U
2

A B C

AL-1556/1566 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 13 - 37


C D E

2/2

5V

IC2
CS VCC 8
1

SK NC 7 C1
DI NC 6 0.1U
5
2

DO GND

IS93C46-3GR 5V

J1
L6 10
9
1 8
TPOUT+ TPTX+ 1
5 CT TPTX- 6 2
3 TPOUT- TPTXC 7 3
4 10BASE-T
16 TPIN+ TPRXC 10 5
12 CT TPRX+ 9 6
14 TPIN- TPRX- 11 7
R1 8 3
820J 12
1

/LK_LED /LK_LED 1 2
TLA-3M103LF C34 C35 11
2

C3 0.01U 0.01U
C2
R2 0.01U CON12
2

0.01U
200J
2

2
1

R3
5V 820J
1 2

IC3
R29
100J
ST_LED ST_LED 1 2 2 4
1

C4 1
0.1U NC7S04M5X
2

R4
OPEN VCC3 5V
1 2

CN1
24 24
23
23
22
P[7:0] 22
R6 0J 21 21
/RESET 20 20
P0 19
19
P1 18
18
P2 17 17
P3 16 16
P4 15
15
P5 14 To MCU PWB
14
P6 13 13
P7 12 12
/PACK /PACK 11
11 2
PBSY 10
PBSY 10
PERR 9
PERR 9
SLCT 8
SLCT 8
/FLT 7
/FLT /STB 7
/STB 6 6
/AFEED3 /AFEED3 5
/SELIN3 5
/SELIN3 4
/IT3 4
/IT3 3 3
DIR3 DIR3 R7 2 2
OPEN 1 1

24FMN-SSTK-A

5V

R28
OPEN

IC45

5
Vcc
/RESET 1 6 (/RESET)
A1 Y1
1

3 4 C38
A2 Y2
1

C37 0.1u
2

OPEN
GND
2
1
2

NC7WZ17

C D E

AL-1556/1566 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 13 - 38


6. POWER SUPPLY
1 2 3 4 5 6

POWER SUPPLY (120V/127V)

1 2 3 4 5 6

AL-1556/1566 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 13 - 39


6 7 8 9 10 11 12

1/1

6 7 8 9 10 11 12

AL-1556/1566 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 13 - 40


CN2 CN1 CN3
D-GND 1 28 D-GND DRST 1 BR 1 DRST
GY DRST
KEYSC3 2 27 KEYSC3 D-GND 3 2 D-GND
CN22 KEYSC2 3 26 KEYSC2
PK PK PK
1 LEDPPD2 1 1 LEDPPD2 KEYSC1 4 25 KEYSC1
BL BL BL
PPD2 2 PPD2 2 2 PPD2 BZR 5 24 BZR
GY GY GY
3 D-GND 3 3 D-GND LCDRS 6 23 LCDRS CN2 CN1
PL
4 RTH-IN LCDE 7 22 LCDE D-GND 1 18 D-GND
PL GY
1 RTH 1 5 AN-GND LCDDB4 8 21 LCDDB4 D-GND 2 17 D-GND
RTH 2 AN-GND 2 GY LCDDB5 9 20 LCDDB5 F-KEYIN7 3 16 F-KEYIN7
CN11 LCDDB6 10 19 LCDDB6 F-KEYIN6 4 15 F-KEYIN6
1 VFM LCDDB7 11 18 LCDDB7 F-KEYIN5 5 14 F-KEYIN5
VFM 3 /VFMCNT SELIN3 12 17 SELIN3 F-KEYIN4 6 13 F-KEYIN4
4 P-GND SELIN2 13 16 SELIN2 F-KEYIN3 7 12 F-KEYIN3
SELIN1 14 15 SELIN1 F-KEYIN2 8 11 F-KEYIN2
CN13 OP-DATA 15 14 OP-DATA F-KEYIN1 9 10 F-KEYIN1
1 24V OP-LATCH 16 13 OP-LATCH F-KEYIN8 10 9 F-KEYIN8
Duplex 2 /DMT0 OP-CLK 17 12 OP-CLK F-KEYSC3 11 8 F-KEYSC3 FAX OP PWB
3 /DMT1 PSL 18 11 PSL F-KEYSC2 12 7 F-KEYSC2
Motor 4 /DMT2 KEYIN 19 10 KEYIN F-KEYSC1 13 6 F-KEYSC1
5 /DMT3 PSW 20 9 PSW LED_V3 14 5 LED_V3
DRST 21 8 DRST LED_V2 15 4 LED_V2
CN19 D-GND 22 7 D-GND LED_V1 16 3 LED_V1
PK
(1) MCU SECTION (1/3)

1 LEDPOD 5VEN 23 6 5VEN DATA1 17 2 DATA1


LB
POD 2 POD D-GND 24 5 D-GND D-GND 18 1 D-GND
GY
3 D-GND 5V 25 4 5V
D-GND 26 3 D-GND OP
CN20 VCC3 27 2 VCC3
OR OR AL-1566 (FAX MODEL) ONLY
H 5V1(DSWS) 6 2 INT5V D-GND 28 1 D-GND PWB
GY GY
S D-GND 1 3 D-GND
PL PL
/VIDEO 3 5 /VIDEO
Y PK PK
S/H 2 6 SHOLD
GY GY
N D-GND 5 7 D-GND CN4
LB LB
/LDEN 4 8 /LDEN OUT_A+ 1
C PK Scanner
/H SYNC 8 9 NC OUT_B+ 2
7. ACTUAL WIRING DIAGRAM

GY PK CL
D-GND 7 10 /SYNC OUT_A- 3 Motor
LSU GY
11 D-GND OUT_B- 4
WH
12 D-GND
WH
13 P-GND
BL BL CN3
PMCLK-A 1 14 PMCLK-A CN1
PK PK INVERTER
PMRDY 2 15 PMRDY (AFE_DB0) 32 1 (AFE_DB0)
PL PL CL
PM /PMD 3 16 /PMD (AFE_DB1) 31 2 (AFE_DB1) PWB
GY GY
P-GND 4 17 P-GND (AFE_DB2) 30 3 (AFE_DB2) VCL 1
RD RD WH
24V 5 18 24V (AFE_DB3) 29 4 (AFE_DB3) P-GND 2
WH
(AFE_DB4) 28 5 (AFE_DB4)
D-GND 27 6 D-GND
MCU (AFE_DB6) 26 7 (AFE_DB6) CARRIAGE UN
CN27 (AFE_DB5) 25 8 (AFE_DB5)
1 24V MHPS 24 9 MHPS
Shifter 2 /SFTMT0 (AFE_DB7) 23 10 (AFE_DB7)
Motor 3 /SFTMT1
PWB (AFE_SCK) 22 11 (AFE_SCK)
4 /SFTMT2 D-GND 21 12 D-GND CCD
5 /SFTMT3 (ADCLK) 20 13 (ADCLK)
(AFE_SEN) 19 14 (AFE_SEN) PWB
CCD_PHI1 18 15 CCD_PHI1 THERMOSTAT
CN6 D-GND 17 16 BK
D-GND CN002 BK
24V 1 8 INT24V CCD_PHI2 16 17 CCD_PHI2 HLL 2 1 HLL 1
WH WH
24V 2 7 INT24V (AFE_SDI) 15 18 (AFE_SDI) HLN 3 2 HLN 2 HL
/MM 5 4 /MM CCD-CP 14 19 CCD-CP
MM MMLD 6 3 MMLD (BSAMP) 13 20 (BSAMP) POWER 200V EX
GND 7 2 P-GND CCD-RS 12 21 CCD-RS SUPPLY ONLY
GND 8 1 P-GND D-GND 11 22 D-GND
CCD-TG 10 23 CCD-TG
PWB
(VSAMP) 9 24 (VSAMP) CN001
BK
D-GND 8 25 D-GND L
EN5V 7 26 N WH INLET
EN5V
12V 6 27 12V
CN23 12V 5 28 12V
1 TMA-O VCL 4 29 VCL YE GR
TM 2 TMB-O VCL 3 30 VCL
P-GND 2 31 P-GND
CN12 P-GND 1 32 P-GND
1 24V

AL-1556/1566 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 13 - 41


RRS 2 /RRS CN5
RD
24V 1 1 24V 1 DV
PL
CN10 TCS 3 2 TCS 2 TCS
BR
1 24V DVSEL 5 6 DVSEL 6 un
CPFS1 GY
2 /CPFS1 D-GND 7 5 D-GND 5
RD
8 BIAS 8
CN10
RD RD
CN7 BIAS MC
BR BR GY
CED1 1 1 CED1 F-GND
CED1 GY GY WH
D-GND 2 2 D-GND CN1(1/2) CN6 CN11 GRID
OR OR RD
INT5V 1 1 INT5V MCFB
RD RD 2 INT24V
INT24V 2 WH
YE YE
CN16 /BIAS 5 5 /BIAS TC
PK BR BR
1 LEDPPD1 /TC 6 6 /TC
PL LB LB RD
PPD1 2 PPD1 /GRIDL 7 7 /GRIDL CN9 BC
GY PK PK
3 D-GND /MC 8 8 /MC
HVT PWB
CN25 CN1(2/2) CN101
PD1 1 BR PK D-GND 9 GY GY 1 D-GND
1 PD1
PD1 D-GND 2 GY GY
2 D-GND P-GND 10 GY GY 2 P-GND
D-GND 11 GY GY 3 D-GND BK
THERMOSTAT
AL-1566 (FAX MODEL) ONLY BL BL CN002
3.3VIN 12 4 3.3VIN
OR OR BK
EN5V 13 5 EN5V HLL 1 1 HLL 1
BL BL WH WH
CN26 3.3VIN 14 6 3.3VIN HLN 4 2 HLN 2 HL
OR OR
1 24V 5V 15 7 5V
MPFS BR BR
2 /MPFS /POFF 16 8 /POFF 120V
PL PL
3 LEDMFD 12VIN 17 9 12VIN
RD RD POWER
4 MFD 24V 18 10 24V ONLY
PK PK
DSW 5 D-GND FW 19 11 FW CN001
RD RD SUPPLY
24V 20 12 24V L
PK PK
CN15 /PR 21 13 /PR N
RD PL PL PWB
1 24V HLOUT 22 14 HLOUT
RD GY GY
2 24V1(DSWS) P-GND 23 15 P-GND
GY GY
P-GND 24 16 P-GND
CN24
GY GY GY
D-GND 3 1 D-GND 5 5 D-GND
PL PL PL SENSOR
SDSW 6 2 SDSW 4 4 SDSW
BL BL BL
SPID 5 3 SPID 3 3 SPID
SB4B 7 4 SB4B 2 2 SB4B PWB
OR OR OR
5V 8 5 5V 1 1 5V
24V 11 RD
/SPUS 12 BR
GY
D-GND 1
BR
SPPD 2 PK
(2) D-SPF SECTION (2/3)

LEDSPPD 4
PL
MCU SPMT-1 19
PK
SPMT-3 20
BL
SPMT-2 21
SPMT-0 22 BR
PWB RD
24Vmir 23
RD
24Vmir 24
RD
24V 13
PK
/SPFS 14
RD
24V 15
PL
/SRRC 16
RD
24V 17 RD
BL
/SGS 18 BR 1 24V 2
SPUS
2 /SPUS 1

GY
BR SPPD
PK

PL 3 SPMT-1
PK 1 SPMT-3
BL
6 SPMT-2 SPMT
BR 4 SPMT-0
RD
2 24Vmir
RD
5 24Vmir

AL-1556/1566 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 13 - 42


RD
PK 1 24V 2
SPFS
2 /SPFS 1

RD
PL 1 24V 2
SRRC
2 /SRRC 1

RD
BL 1 24V 2
SGS
2 /SGS 1

D-SPF UNIT
CN1 CN16
D-GND 1 1 D-GND
DIR3 2 2 DIR3
/IT3 3 3 /IT3
/SELIN3 4 4 /SELIN3
/AFEED3 5 5 /AFEED3
/STB 6 6 /STB
/FLT 7 7 /FLT
SLCT 8 8 SLCT
PERR 9 9 PERR
PBSY 10 10 PBSY CN37 CN2
TO /PACK 11 11 /PACK D-GND 1 26 D-GND
(3) NIC & FAX SECTION (3/3)

P7 12 12 P7 MDM_IRQ 2 25 MDM_IRQ
NETWORK P6 13 13 P6 (/FAX_RST) 3 24 (/FAX_RST)
P5 14 14 P5 PB_MOE 4 23 PB_MOE
P4 15 15 P4 PB_NWE 5 22 PB_NWE
P3 16 16 P3 PB_NAE0 6 21 PB_NAE0
P2 17 17 P2 PB_NCS1 7 20 PB_NCS1
P1 18 18 P1 D-GND 8 19 D-GND
P0 19 19 P0 PB_ADDR0 9 18 PB_ADDR0 CN10
/RESET 20 20 /RESET PB_ADDR1 10 17 PB_ADDR1 VOUT1 1
VCC3 21 21 VCC3 PB_ADDR2 11 16 PB_ADDR2 VOUT2 2 SPEAKER
NIC PWB 5V 22 22 5V PB_ADDR3 12 15 PB_ADDR3
5V 23 23 5V PB_ADDR4 13 14 PB_ADDR4
D-GND 24 24 D-GND PB_ADDR5 14 13 PB_ADDR5
PB_ADDR6 15 12 PB_ADDR6
PB_ADDR7 16 11 PB_ADDR7
D-GND 17 10 D-GND
PB_DATA0 18 9 PB_DATA0
PB_DATA1 19 8 PB_DATA1
PB_DATA2 20 7 PB_DATA2
PB_DATA3 21 6 PB_DATA3
PB_DATA4 22 5 PB_DATA4
PB_DATA5 23 4 PB_DATA5
PB_DATA6 24 3 PB_DATA6
PB_DATA7 25 2 PB_DATA7
D-GND 26 1 D-GND

CN38 CN1
D-GND 1 20 D-GND
MSU_ST1 2 19 MSU_ST1
/CS4 3 18 /CS4
/RD 4 17 /RD
MODEM_IN 5 16 MODEM_IN
D0 6 15 D0
D1 7 14 D1
D2 8 13 D2 TO TEL
D3 9 12 D3
D4 10 11 D4
D5 11 10 D5
D6 12 9 D6
D7 13 8 D7
P-GND 14 7 P-GND FAX
24V 15 6 24V
D-GND 16 5 D-GND

AL-1556/1566 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 13 - 43


EN5V 17 4 EN5V PWB
VCC3 18 3 VCC3
VCC3 19 2 VCC3
D-GND 20 1 D-GND
MCU

AL-1566 (FAX MODEL) ONLY


PWB

CN33
1 5V USB
Personal Computer(USB PORT) 2 DATA -
3 DATA +
4 D-GND
Memo
Memo
Memo
LEAD-FREE SOLDER
The PWB’s of this model employs lead-free solder. The “LF” marks indicated on the PWB’s and the Service Manual mean “Lead-Free” solder.
The alphabet following the LF mark shows the kind of lead-free solder.

Example:

<Solder composition code of lead-free solder>

Solder composition Solder composition Solder composition code


code (Refer to the Sn-Ag-Cu a
Lead-Free table at the right.)
Sn-Ag-Bi
b
Sn-Ag-Bi-Cu
Sn-Zn-Bi z
5mm
a Sn-In-Ag-Bi
Sn-Cu-Ni
Sn-Ag-Sb
n
s
i

Bi-Sn-Ag-P p
Bi-Sn-Ag

(1) NOTE FOR THE USE OF LEAD-FREE SOLDER THREAD


When repairing a lead-free solder PWB, use lead-free solder thread.
Never use conventional lead solder thread, which may cause a breakdown or an accident.
Since the melting point of lead-free solder thread is about 40°C higher than that of conventional lead solder thread, the use of the exclusive-use
soldering iron is recommendable.

(2) NOTE FOR SOLDERING WORK


Since the melting point of lead-free solder is about 220°C, which is about 40°C higher than that of conventional lead solder, and its soldering capacity is
inferior to conventional one, it is apt to keep the soldering iron in contact with the PWB for longer time. This may cause land separation or may exceed
the heat-resistive temperature of components. Use enough care to separate the soldering iron from the PWB when completion of soldering is
confirmed.
Since lead-free solder includes a greater quantity of tin, the iron tip may corrode easily. Turn ON/OFF the soldering iron power frequently.
If different-kind solder remains on the soldering iron tip, it is melted together with lead-free solder. To avoid this, clean the soldering iron tip after
completion of soldering work.
If the soldering iron tip is discolored black during soldering work, clean and file the tip with steel wool or a fine filer.
CAUTION FOR BATTERY REPLACEMENT
(Danish) ADVARSEL !
Lithiumbatteri – Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering.
Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri
af samme fabrikat og type.
Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandoren.
(English) Caution !
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type
recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to manufacturer’s instructions.
(Finnish) VAROITUS
Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu.
Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan
tyyppiin. Hävitä käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden
mukaisesti.
(French) ATTENTION
Il y a danger d’explosion s’ il y a remplacement incorrect
de la batterie. Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du
même type ou d’un type équivalent recommandé par
le constructeur.
Mettre au rebut les batteries usagées conformément aux
instructions du fabricant.
(Swedish) VARNING
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.
Använd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent
typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren.
Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens
instruktion.
(German) Achtung
Explosionsgefahr bei Verwendung inkorrekter Batterien.
Als Ersatzbatterien dürfen nur Batterien vom gleichen Typ oder
vom Hersteller empfohlene Batterien verwendet werden.
Entsorgung der gebrauchten Batterien nur nach den vom
Hersteller angegebenen Anweisungen.

CAUTION FOR BATTERY DISPOSAL


(For USA, CANADA)
"BATTERY DISPOSAL"
THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS A LITHIUM PRIMARY
(MANGANESS DIOXIDE) MEMORY BACK-UP BATTERY
THAT MUST BE DISPOSED OF PROPERLY. REMOVE THE
BATTERY FROM THE PRODUCT AND CONTACT YOUR
LOCAL ENVIRONMENTAL AGENCIES FOR INFORMATION
ON RECYCLING AND DISPOSAL OPTIONS.

"TRAITEMENT DES PILES USAGÉES"


CE PRODUIT CONTIENT UNE PILE DE SAUVEGARDE DE
MÉMOIRE LITHIUM PRIMAIRE (DIOXYDE DE MANGANÈSE)
QUI DOIT ÊTRE TRAITÉE CORRECTEMENT. ENLEVEZ LA
PILE DU PRODUIT ET PRENEZ CONTACT AVEC VOTRE
AGENCE ENVIRONNEMENTALE LOCALE POUR DES
INFORMATIONS SUR LES MÉTHODES DE RECYCLAGE ET
DE TRAITEMENT.
COPYRIGHT © 2004 BY SHARP CORPORATION
All rights reserved.
Printed in Japan.
No part of this publication may be reproduced,
stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted,
in any form or by any means,
electronic; mechanical; photocopying; recording or otherwise
without prior written permission of the publisher.

Trademark acknowledgements
• Microsoft® Windows® operating system is a trademark or copyright of Microsoft
Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
• Windows® 95, Windows® 98, Windows® Me, Windows NT® 4.0, Windows® 2000,
and Windows® XP are trademarks or copyrights of Microsoft Corporation in the
U.S.A. and other countries.
• IBM and PC/AT are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
• Acrobat® Reader Copyright® 1987- 2002 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights
reserved. Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, and the Acrobat logo are trademarks of
Adobe Systems Incorporated.
• All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.

SHARP CORPORATION
Digital Document System Group
Products Quality Assurance Department
Yamatokoriyama, Nara 639-1186, Japan
2004 February Printed in Japan

Das könnte Ihnen auch gefallen